Direct Current Drive Systems Solutions

DCV94/104 Direct Current Drive Systems Solutions
User Manual
Contents
1 - Safety instructions ............................................................................................................................... 1 2 - Presentation - General information..................................................................................................... 1 2.1 General description............................................................................................................................... 1

2.1.2 DC drive sizes ................................................................................................................................................ 2 2.1.3 Functions and general features .................................................................................................................... 2 2.1.4 Detachable display and programming module .......................................................................................... 4 2.1.5 Storage, transport .......................................................................................................................................... 5
Table 2.1.4.1: Diagnostic LED .................................................................................................................................. 4 Table 2.1.2.1: DC drive sizes. .................................................................................................................................... 2 Figure 2.1.1 functional diagram of a DC drive. ......................................................................................................... 1
2.2 Selection guide ..................................................................................................................................... 6

2.2.1 DC drive choice ............................................................................................................................................. 6 2.2.2 Single cyclic load .......................................................................................................................................... 7 2.2.3 Special cycle speed ...................................................................................................................................... 8 2.2.4 Power fuses ................................................................................................................................................... 9
Figure 2.2.4.1: Assignment of semi-conductor fuses. ............................................................................................. 9 ........................................................................................... 9 Table 2.2.4.1: Connection fuses / drive DCV104 Table 2.2.4.2: connection fuses / DC drive DCV94 ..................................................................................... 10 Table 2.2.5.1: connection line armature / DC drive . .............................................................................................. 10 Table 2.2.6.1: Connection Line circuit-breaker / DC drive. .................................................................................... 11 Table 2.2.2.1: peak current and in steady state. ....................................................................................................... 7 Table 2.2.1.1: 4-quadrant product line. .................................................................................................................... 6 Table 2.2.1.2: 2-quadrant product line. .................................................................................................................... 7
2.2.5 Input chokes ................................................................................................................................................ 10 2.2.6 Input circuit-breaker .................................................................................................................................... 11 2.2.7 Line contactor .............................................................................................................................................. 12
Table 2.2.7.1: connection line contactor / DC drive. .............................................................................................. 12
2.3 Features .............................................................................................................................................. 13

2.3.1 Environmental conditions and regulations ................................................................................................. 13 2.3.2 Connection to the mains ............................................................................................................................. 14 2.3.3 Excitation circuit .......................................................................................................................................... 15 2.3.4 Control circuit .............................................................................................................................................. 16 2.3.5 Fans ............................................................................................................................................................. 17 2.3.6 Output voltages ........................................................................................................................................... 18 2.3.7 Control and regulation features .................................................................................................................. 19 2.3.8 Accuracy ...................................................................................................................................................... 21
Table 2.3.6.1: Armature circuit output voltage ........................................................................................................ 18 Table 2.3.6.2: Excitation circuit output voltage ....................................................................................................... 18 Table 2.3.5.1: Fans. ................................................................................................................................................ 17 Table 2.3.4.1: starting and rated control circuit current. ......................................................................................... 16 Table 2.3.3.1a: excitation current calibration limitations. ......................................................................................... 15 Table 2.3.3.1b: excitation current calibration resistances. ...................................................................................... 15 Table 2.3.2.1: Powers supply voltage. .................................................................................................................... 14
3 - Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 1 3.1 Simplified sequence diagram ............................................................................................................... 1

Figure 3.1.1: Typical control circuit and connection diagram. .................................................................................. 1 Figure 3.1.2: Encoder and tachogenerator connection. ........................................................................................... 2 Table 3.1.1: List of necessary equipment. ................................................................................................................. 2
3.2 Connections .......................................................................................................................................... 3

3.2.1 Front cover removal ...................................................................................................................................... 3 3.2.2 Connection features ...................................................................................................................................... 4 3.2.3 RS485 Serial Interface ................................................................................................................................... 5
III
3.2.2.1 Wiring .................................................................................................................................................................. 4
Table 3.2.2.1: Allowable earth terminal connection section. .................................................................................... 4 Figure 3.2.1.1: cover removal. .................................................................................................................................. 3
Contents
3.2.3.1 Description .......................................................................................................................................................... 5 3.2.3.2 Connector ............................................................................................................................................................ 6

Figure 3.2.3.1.1: RS485 Serial Link .......................................................................................................................... 5 Table 3.2.3.2.1: XS connector pinouts for the RS485 serial link. ............................................................................... 6 Figure 3.2.4.1: Installing an input-output extension board. ...................................................................................... 7
3.2.4 Installing the input - output extension option board ..................................................................................... 7
3.3 DC drive installation ............................................................................................................................... 8

3.3.1 Installation Distances and Positions ............................................................................................................. 8
Figure 3.3.1.1: Maximum tilt angle. ............................................................................................................................ 8 Figure 3.3.1.2: Installation Distances DCV D40S to M11S. ................................................................................... 9 Figure 3.3.1.2: Installation Distances DCV M14Y to M27. ...................................................................................... 9 Table 3.3.2.1: ventilation. ........................................................................................................................................ 10 Figure 3.3.3.1: Sizes for products D40S.....to M11S. .............................................................................................. Table 3.3.3.1: Sizes for products D40S.....to M11S. ............................................................................................... Table 3.3.3.2: Sizes for products M14Y.....to M27 . .............................................................................................. Figure 3.3.3.2: Sizes for products M14Y.....to M27 . ............................................................................................. Figure 3.3.3.3: Fuse Sizes ....................................................................................................................................... Table 3.3.3.4: Associated fuses / fuse holder part references ...............................................................................
3.3.2 Ventilation .................................................................................................................................................... 10 3.3.3 Dimensions and weight ............................................................................................................................... 10

10 11 11 11 14 15
4 - Setup and commissioning .................................................................................................................. 1 4.1 Positioning jumpers and micro-switches .............................................................................................. 1
Figure 4.1.1: Topographical arrangement of control board components. ................................................................ Table 4.1.1: customisable S15 switch for the type and product of the DC drive. ..................................................... Table 4.1.2: S4 switch adjusting the tachogenerator input voltage. ......................................................................... Table 4.1.3: Jumper straps on the control board. ..................................................................................................... Table 4.1.4: Activating calibration jumper straps. ..................................................................................................... Table 4.1.5: customising S1, S3, S4 switches to the type and product of power bridge (power interface board) Table 4.2.1: LEDs on control board. ........................................................................................................................ Table 4.2.2: Test points on control board. ............................................................................................................... Figure 4.2.1: Positioning of earth terminals 1 to 40. .................................................................................................. Table 4.2.3: Terminal assignments (terminals 1 to 20). ............................................................................................. Table 4.2.4: Terminal assignments (terminals 21 to 40). ........................................................................................... Figure 4.2.2: Potential of the regulation part. ............................................................................................................ Table 4.2.5: Tachogenerator connecting block. ....................................................................................................... Table 4.2.6: XE1 connector pinouts for a sinusoidal encoder. ................................................................................. Table 4.2.7: XE2 connector pinouts for an incremental coder. ................................................................................. 1 2 2 2 3 4 5 5 5 6 7 8 9 9 9
4.2 Earth Terminal Designation and Control Points .................................................................................... 5
4.3 Control Keyboard ................................................................................................................................ 10

4.3.1 LED Diodes .................................................................................................................................................. 10 4.3.2 Moving Between Menus .............................................................................................................................. 11 4.3.3 Viewing parameters ..................................................................................................................................... 11 4.3.4 Changing/Validating parameters / Password ............................................................................................. 12 4.3.5 Keyboard commands .................................................................................................................................. 14
4.3.5.1 Starting and stopping the DC drive .................................................................................................................. 14 4.3.5.2 Fault register/ RAZ ............................................................................................................................................. 14 4.3.5.3 Motorised potentiometer function ..................................................................................................................... 15 4.3.5.4 Jog Function ...................................................................................................................................................... 15
Figure 4.3.2.1 Moving between menus. .................................................................................................................. 11 Table 4.3.1.1: Diagnostic LED ................................................................................................................................ 10
4.4 Menu structure .................................................................................................................................... 16 4.5 Commissioning ................................................................................................................................... 19

4.5.1 Controlling assembly and auxiliary power .................................................................................................. 19 4.5.2 DC drive factory settings ............................................................................................................................. 19
4.6 Start-up procedure: Start Up Menu .................................................................................................... 21

4.6.1 Basic settings .............................................................................................................................................. 21 4.6.2 Basic adjustments to the DC drive .............................................................................................................. 23
IV
Contents
4.6.2.1. Self-tuning of the armature current regulator ................................................................................................... 23 4.6.2.2 Controlling armature current regulator performance using the E int [V] parameter. ........................................ 24 4.6.2.3 Self-tuning the speed regulator ......................................................................................................................... 24 4.6.2.4 Auto-tuning the excitation controller ................................................................................................................. 27
4.6.3. Manual adjustment of regulators ............................................................................................................... 28

4.6.3.1 Manual adjustment of the speed regulator. ....................................................................................................... 28 4.6.3.2 Manual tuning of excitation controller ............................................................................................................... 30 4.6.3.3 Manual tuning of the voltage loop in the excitation controller .......................................................................... 31
Figure 4.6.3.2.3: increase of the excitation current without oscillation. .................................................................. 31 Figure 4.6.3.3.3: Excitation controller optimised: After a brief interval, the excitation current and the armature voltage remain constant. ......................................................................................................................................... 32
Figure 4.6.2.4.1: Functional diagram of excitation controller. ................................................................................. 27
4.6.4 Advanced drive settings ............................................................................................................................. 33

4.6.4.1 Calibrating the If curve (FLUX REGULATION/Flux / if curve menu) ................................................................. 33 4.6.4.2 Speed-up function (SPEED REGULATION\ Speed up menu) .......................................................................... 34 4.6.4.3 Speed zero logic (SPEED REGULATION \ Speed zero logic menu) ................................................................ 35 4.6.4.4 Adaptive speed regulator (ADD SPEED FUNCT \ Adaptative speed reg menu) .............................................. 35
Figure 4.6.4.1.1: flux/current conversion curve. ..................................................................................................... 33
5 - Main functions ..................................................................................................................................... 1 General information ..................................................................................................................................... 1 5.1 DC drive validations ............................................................................................................................... 5
5.1.1 Unlock DC drive (enable drive) ..................................................................................................................... 5.1.2 Start / Stop ..................................................................................................................................................... 5.1.3 Fast stop ........................................................................................................................................................ 5.1.4 Quick stop ..................................................................................................................................................... 5.1.5 External fault ..................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5.1.1: DC drive validations via dry contacts or auto-outputs. ......................................................................... 5
6 6 7 8 8
5.2 Introduction to functions ........................................................................................................................ 9 5.3 Monitor ................................................................................................................................................. 10 5.4 Variable inputs ..................................................................................................................................... 14
5.4.1 Ramp references (Ramp ref) ....................................................................................................................... 15 5.4.2 Speed reference (Speed ref) ....................................................................................................................... 17 5.4.3 Torque reference (T current ref) .................................................................................................................. 19
Figure 5.4.3.1: Torque reference. ............................................................................................................................ 19 Figure 5.4.2.1: Speed reference ............................................................................................................................. 18 Figure 5.4.1.1: Ramp references ............................................................................................................................. 16
5.5 Limits .................................................................................................................................................... 21

5.5.1 Speed limits ................................................................................................................................................ 21 5.5.2 Current limits ............................................................................................................................................... 23 5.5.3 Flux limits ..................................................................................................................................................... 25
Figure 5.5.2.1: Torque limitations with T curr lim type = T lim +/-. ....................................................................... 23 Figure 5.5.2.2: Torque limitations with T curr lim type = T lim mot/gen ............................................................... 24
5.6 Ramp .................................................................................................................................................... 26

5.6.1 Acceleration, Deceleration, Fast stop ......................................................................................................... 27 5.6.2 Shapes of the ramps and command signal ................................................................................................ 28
Figure 5.6.2.1: effect of the S shape t const parameter. .......................................................................................... 29 Figure 5.6.2.2: Ramp delay. ..................................................................................................................................... 29 Figure 5.6.2.3: Ramp control. .................................................................................................................................. 30 Figure 5.6.1.1: Acceleration and deceleration ramps. ............................................................................................ 27 Figure 5.6.1: Ramp circuit. ...................................................................................................................................... 26
5.7 Speed regulator ................................................................................................................................... 31

5.7.1 Speed regulator ........................................................................................................................................... 32 5.7.2 Speed zero logic (spd zero logic) ............................................................................................................... 34
V
5.7.1.1 Self-tuning of the speed regulator ..................................................................................................................... 33
Figure 5.7.1: Diagram showing how the speed regulator works. ............................................................................ 31
Contents
5.7.3 Speed-up Function ...................................................................................................................................... 35 5.7.4 Droop function ............................................................................................................................................. 36 5.7.5 Compensation of inertia and friction (Inertia/loss cp) ................................................................................ 38
Figure 5.7.5.1: Compensation of inertia and friction. .............................................................................................. 38 Figure 5.7.4.1: Droop compensation. ...................................................................................................................... 36 Figure 5.7.4.2: example of the Droop function on a steel-pipe manufacturing machine. ....................................... 37
Figure 5.7.2.1: Spd zero logic. ................................................................................................................................ 34
5.8 Current regulator .................................................................................................................................. 39

Figure 5.8.1: Torque regulation through the current. ............................................................................................... 39
5.9 Flux regulation ..................................................................................................................................... 41

Figure 5.9.1: controls motor excitation. ................................................................................................................... 42
5.10 Reg parameters ................................................................................................................................. 45 5.11 Configuration ..................................................................................................................................... 47

5.11.1 Choice of mode of operation .................................................................................................................... 5.11.2 Base values and maximum armature voltage ........................................................................................... 5.11.3 Configuration of the OK relay (terminals 35, 36) ...................................................................................... 5.11.4 Configuration of speed feedback circuit ................................................................................................... 47 49 49 50
5.11.5 Selection of Standard/American, Version SOFTWARE ...................................................................... 55 5.11.6 Factor function (Dimension factor, Face value factor) .............................................................................. 56 5.11.7 Programmable faults ................................................................................................................................. 58 5.11.8 Serial communication configuration (set serial comm) ............................................................................ 63 5.11.9 Password ................................................................................................................................................... 64
Figure 5.12.1: disposition of programmable inputs and outputs. ........................................................................... 65 Figure 5.11.7.1: DC drive unlocking sequence: Main command= terminals. ........................................................ 61 Figure 5.11.7.2: DC drive unlocking sequence: Main command = Digital. ............................................................ 62 Figure 5.11.6.1: Calculation using the Dimension and Face Value factors. ............................................................ 56
Figure 5.11.4.1: speed feedback circuits. ............................................................................................................... 51 Figure 5.11.4.2 ........................................................................................................................................................ 53
5.12 I/O configuration ................................................................................................................................ 66

5.12.1 Analog Outputs ......................................................................................................................................... 66 5.12.2 Analog Inputs ............................................................................................................................................ 68
Figure 5.12.1.1: Functional diagram of analog outputs. .......................................................................................... 67 Figure 5.12.2.1: Analog inputs. ................................................................................................................................ 72 Figure 5.12.2.2: Window comparator. ..................................................................................................................... 73
5.12.3 Digital Outputs ........................................................................................................................................... 75 5.12.4 Digital Inputs .............................................................................................................................................. 77 5.12.5 Speed reference from an encoder (Tach. feed. function) ......................................................................... 79
Figure 5.12.5.1: Encoder reference. ....................................................................................................................... 79 Figure 5.12.4.1: Digital inputs. ................................................................................................................................. 78 Figure 5.12.3.1: Digital outputs. .............................................................................................................................. 76
5.13 Add speed function ............................................................................................................................ 81

5.13.1 Auto capture .............................................................................................................................................. 81 5.13.2 Adaptive spd reg ....................................................................................................................................... 82 5.13.3 Speed control ............................................................................................................................................ 84
Figure 5.13.2.1: Adaptive speed regulator function. ............................................................................................... 83 Figure 5.13.3.1: Indication of Speed not exceeded (above) and Speed corresponds to the reference value (below). .................................................................................................................................................................... 85 Figure 5.13.4.1: Speed zero. ................................................................................................................................... 86
5.13.4 Speed zero ................................................................................................................................................ 86
5.14 Functions ........................................................................................................................................... 87

5.14.1 Motor potentiometer .................................................................................................................................. 87 5.14.2 Jog function ............................................................................................................................................... 89 5.14.3 Multi speed function .................................................................................................................................. 91
Figure 5.14.3.1: Multi speed. ................................................................................................................................... 92 Figure 5.14.2.1: Example of external Jog without ramp activation. ......................................................................... 89 Figure 5.14.1.1: Example of external activation of motor potentiometer function. ................................................... 87
VI
Contents
5.14.4 Multi ramp function .................................................................................................................................... 95 5.14.5 Speed Draw ............................................................................................................................................... 99

Figure 5.14.4.1: Selection of different ramps on the terminal block. ....................................................................... 96 Figure 5.14.4.2: Choice of different ramps using the keyboard or serial interface. ................................................ 96 Figure 5.14.5.1: Speed draw function ..................................................................................................................... 99 Figure 5.14.5.2: Cross-section. ............................................................................................................................. 100 Figure 5.14.6.1: Overload control (Overload mode = Curr limited). ..................................................................... 102 Figure 5.14.6.2: Overload control (Overload mode = Curr not limited). ............................................................... 103
Figure 5.14.3.2: Preselected Multi speed function ................................................................................................ 93
5.14.6 Overload control ...................................................................................................................................... 101
5.14.7 Stop control ............................................................................................................................................. 104 5.14.8 Lifting function ......................................................................................................................................... 106
5.14.8.1 Brake logic .................................................................................................................................................... 106 5.14.8.2 Double setting ............................................................................................................................................... 110
Figure 5.14.7.1: Management. .............................................................................................................................. 104
5.14.9 L/n curve .................................................................................................................................................. 113

Figure 5.14.9.1: L/n curve. .................................................................................................................................... 113
5.15 Specific functions ............................................................................................................................. 114

5.15.1 Test generator .......................................................................................................................................... 114 5.15.2 Saving, loading default parameters, hour counter ................................................................................. 115 5.15.3 Fault register ............................................................................................................................................ 116 5.15.4 Calculations (Link 1...Link 6) ................................................................................................................... 118 5.15.5 Pads ......................................................................................................................................................... 121
Figure 5.15.5.1: Data exchange between system components. ........................................................................... 123 Figure 5.15.4.1: Synopsis of calculations. ............................................................................................................. 120 Figure 5.15.1.1: Test generator output. ................................................................................................................. 114
5.16 Options ............................................................................................................................................. 124

5.16.1 Option 1 ................................................................................................................................................... 124 5.16.2 Option 2 ................................................................................................................................................... 124 5.16.3 PID function ............................................................................................................................................. 125
5.16.3.1 General information ...................................................................................................................................... 125 5.16.3.2 Inputs/Outputs .............................................................................................................................................. 125 5.16.3.3 Feed Forward ............................................................................................................................................. 126 5.16.3.4 PID function .................................................................................................................................................. 128 5.16.3.5 Proportional-Integral (PI) control block ......................................................................................................... 130
Figure 5.16.3.1: Feed-Forward block description. ................................................................................................ 126 Figure 5.16.3.2: PID block description. ................................................................................................................. 128 Figure 5.16.3.3: PI block description. ................................................................................................................... 130 Figure 5.16.3.4: PD block description. .................................................................................................................. 134 Figure 5.16.3.5: Output reference block description. ........................................................................................... 136 Figure 5.16.3.6: Initial diameter calculation block description. ............................................................................. 138 Figure 5.16.3.7: Diameter calculation. .................................................................................................................. 139
5.16.3.6 Proportional-derivative (PD) control block .................................................................................................... 134
5.16.3.7 Output reference .......................................................................................................................................... 136 5.16.3.8 Initial diameter calculation function .............................................................................................................. 138
5.16.3.9 Initial diameter calculation procedure .......................................................................................................... 140 5.16.3.10 Application examples .................................................................................................................................. 141
Figure 5.16.3.8: Traction control with dancer arm. ................................................................................................ Figure 5.16.3.9: Traction control with load cell. .................................................................................................... Figure 5.16.3.10: Winder/unwinder control with dancer arm ................................................................................ Figure 5.16.3.11: Dancer arm constant measurement. ......................................................................................... Figure 5.16.3.12: Winder/unwinder control with dancer and diameter sensor. ..................................................... Figure 5.16.3.13: Transducer signal and unwinder signal direction. .................................................................... Figure 5.16.3.14: Pressure control for pumps and extruders. ............................................................................... 141 144 147 151 152 152 154
5.16.3.11 Generic PID ................................................................................................................................................. 156 5.16.3.12 Dynamic modification of the integral gain of the PI block ........................................................................... 157
Figure 5.16.3.15: Relation between PI I Gain PID and PI I Output PID. ................................................................. 158 Figure 5.16.3.16 General diagram of the PID regulator. ........................................................................................ 159
VII
Contents
6 - Winding/Unwinding function ............................................................................................................... 1 6.1 Diameter estimation ............................................................................................................................... 3 6.2 Torque calculation .................................................................................................................................. 6
6.2.1 Compensations and closure of the tension control loop ............................................................................. 7 6.2.2 Taper function (tension reduction with diameter) ....................................................................................... 10
Figure 6.2.2.1: relationship between parameters of the Taper function. ................................................................. 10 Figure 6.2.1.1: Acceleration and deceleration signalling. ......................................................................................... 8
6.3 Estimation of speed reference ............................................................................................................. 11

Figure 6.3.1: Operational sequence of operational status. ..................................................................................... 13 Figure 6.3.2: Operation with Jog TW enabled. ........................................................................................................ 15
6.4 Typical winder connection diagrams ................................................................................................... 16

Figure 6.4.1 Typical connection diagram for winder with automatic change and regulation of closed-loop tension . ................................................................................................................................................................................. 16
6.5 Command logic ................................................................................................................................... 17

Figure 6.5.1: material tensioning with line stopped. ................................................................................................ Figure 6.5.2: automatic changeover between two reels during a period of winding/unwinding. ........................... Figure 6.5.3: stopping the reel after the automatic changeover. ............................................................................. Figure 6.5.4: jog function to prepare the machine. ................................................................................................. Figure 6.6.1: drive actioning a winder - winding direction = from above. .............................................................. Figure 6.6.2: drive actioning a winder - winding direction = from below. ............................................................... Figure 6.6.3: drive actioning an unwinder - unwinding direction = from above. .................................................... Figure 6.6.4: drive actioning an unwinder - unwinding direction = from below. .................................................... 17 18 19 19 30 31 31 32
6.6 Application example ............................................................................................................................ 20
6.7 Functional diagram .............................................................................................................................. 33
7 - Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................................. 1 7.1 Precautions ............................................................................................................................................ 1 7.2 Fault message ........................................................................................................................................ 2 7.3 Repairs ................................................................................................................................................... 7
7.3.1 Separate spare parts ..................................................................................................................................... 7
8 - List of parameters ............................................................................................................................... 1 8.1 List of parameters and menus ............................................................................................................... 3 8.2 List of high-priority parameters ............................................................................................................ 31
VIII
1 - Safety instructions
When the power supply to the DC drive is on, the power units as well as a certain number of control components are connected to the power network. It is extremely hazardous to touch them. The ventilation cover of the DC drive or the control module should be kept closed. The thyristor bridge of separate-bridge models should be protected against direct and indirect contact. After cutting the DC drive power supply voltage, make sure that there is no residual voltage still present before working on the product. Generally speaking, the DC drive power supply voltage should be cut prior to any work carried out on either the electrical or the mechanical part of the installation or the machine. When in use the motor may be brought to a stop by suppression of standby conditions or speed reference, while the DC drive remains under power. If the safety of personnel makes it necessary to prohibit any premature restart, this electronic stop is insufficient. Anticipate a disconnection on both the power circuit and on the brake if appropriate. The DC drive may start automatically when power is applied to the power unit. You should ensure that no persons or equipment are put in danger. The DC drive includes security systems that can, in the event of a fault, stop the DC drive and therefore also stop motor. This motor may come to a stop on its own because of a mechanical blockage. Finally, variations in voltage, and power outages in particular, may be the reason for a stop. Removing the cause of a stop, may result in an automatic restart. This could present a risk for certain machines or installations and in particular those that must comply with safety regulations. It is thus important that the necessary precautions are taken by the operator or installation wiring to prevent an automatic restart, for example by using a low-speed detector, which will cut the power supply to the DC drive in the event of a non-programmed motor stop. Fault management can be carried out by the DC drive in different ways. Refer to the section on fault programming, Chapter 5.11.7. The installation of equipment must comply with IEC standards. The products and materials presented in this document may at any moment be subject to further development or change regarding both technical and operational aspects. At no moment does their description serve to be contractual. The DCV DC drive should be considered to be a component; this is neither a machine nor a product ready for use according to European directives (machine directive and electromagnetic compatibility directive). It is the responsibility of the end customer to guarantee the conformity of his machine with these directives. The installation and operation of this DC drive should be executed in accordance with the rules of the type conformant to international and national standards of its place of use. Such compliance is the responsibility of the installer, who must respect, among others, EMC and Low Voltage directives of the European Community.
1/1
1 - Safety instructions
Notes:
1. In the case of motor restart, the function must be activated (Auto capture in the menu ADD SPEED FUNCT). 2. It is prohibited to connect a capacitive load (such as compensation capacitors) to the output of the DC drive (earth terminals C and D). 3. Connect the DC drive to a grounding terminal (PE) via the earth terminals provided on the casing of the product. The leakage current towards the earth is higher than 3.5 mA. According to EN50178 standard, grounding connections should not be switchable. 4. The product should only be commissioned by qualified personnel. The power cable as well as the equipotential protection should be well sized, conforming to the national and local regulations. The motor must be protected against overload. 5. No dielectric strength test should be performed on the DC drive. A suitable measuring instrument (with an internal resistance of at least 10 k/V) should be used to measure the voltage of the different signals. 6. When the DC drive is locked, but has not been isolated from the network (disconnect or contactor), it cannot be ruled out that the motor shaft may turn accidentally in the event of DC drive failure.
WARNING! The DC drive is prone to deliver an RMS symmetrical short-circuit current, under 500V, that should not exceed the values below:
DC Drive size 20 ... 70 A 110 ... 280 A 350 ... 650 A 770 A 1000 ... 1050 A 1400 ... 1500 A 2000 A 2700 A
Short-circuit current 5 kA 10 kA 18 kA 30 kA 42 kA 100 kA 150 kA 200 kA

T1001f-en
1/2
2 - Presentation - General information

2.1 General description
Variable speed drives in the DCV 4 range are intended for control of speed or torque of separately excited direct current motors, with a rated armature current from 40 to 2700A. They are all equipped with an excitation current regulator. The product range is divided into 2-quandrant DC drives (DCV94 ) and 4- quadrant DC drives (DCV104 ) in the torque-speed design and can be powered by a 3 phase 400V or 500V network (class S), or from a 690V network (class Y). The DC drives are delivered together with a CD Rom containing multi-lingual documentation of operation and any applicable options. These DC drives are available in a compact version up to 1050A and with a separate bridge from 1050A onwards, meet the most demanding applications thanks to their durable construction, high-end performance of their digital controls, and numerous integrated functions: handling and lifting PID controllers winder /unwinder
1 2 5
4
Figure 2.1.1 functional diagram of a DC drive.
Power supply (ULN):
3 x 230 V, 50/60 Hz 3 x 400 V, 50/60 Hz 3 x 440 V, 50/60 Hz 3 x 460 V, 50/60 Hz 3 x 480 V, 50/60 Hz 3 x 500 V, 50/60 Hz 3 x 690 V, 50/60 Hz Fully controlled three-phase bridge. Converts AC into DC. (Single bridge for DCV94...- double bridge for DCV104... ) Semi-controlled single phase bridge Supply, control, and power system regulation boards. Commands, references, and feedback are connected to it. direct current variable from 0... UdAN 40 ... 2700 A (for max ambient temperature of 40C)
Armature DC drive: Excitation controller: Control unit: Output voltage (UdA): Output current (IdN):
2/1

2.1.2 DC drive sizes
Table 2.1.2.1: DC drive sizes.
DCV104???? DCV104D40S DCV104D70S DCV104C11S DCV104C18S DCV104C28S DCV104C42S DCV104C65S DCV104C77S DCV104M11S DCV104M15S DCV104M14Y DCV104M20S DCV104M20Y DCV104M27S DCV104M27Y
Size
I induced permanent 40A 70A 110A 185A 280A 420A 650A 770A 1050A 1500A 1400A 2000A 2000A 2700A 2700A
DCV94????
Size
I induced permanent 70A 110A 185A 280A 420A 650A 770A 1000A 1500A 1400A 2000A 2000A 2700A 2700A
Tab 2.1.1-en
2 3
DCV94D70S DCV94C11S DCV94C18S DCV94C28S DCV94C42S DCV94C65S DCV94C77S DCV94M10S DCV94M15S DCV94M14Y DCV94M20S DCV94M20Y DCV94M27S DCV94M27Y
2 3
2.1.3 Functions and general features
DC drives rom the DCV94/104 range feature excellent regulation performance and extensive functionality. Integrated excitation control. Galvanic isolation separates the power unit and regulation. Galvanic isolation separates the regulation unit and the digital or analog inputs/outputs. Differential analog inputs. Display and programming module delivered in standard form and installed on the front face of the DC drive. Simplified commissioning with short menu. Control of the DC drive can be made: - From the terminal block - With the display programming module with backlit screen - Through use of optional programming software DCVCNF... - By connection to a MODBUS RTU field bus The last 10 faults messages are memorised and displayed on start-up. Programmable management of the DC drives behaviour upon fault detection. Revert automatically to Armature voltage feedback in the case of loss of speed feedback (only in constant torque mode) . Overload control. Three configurable analog inputs.
2/2

Extension of digital and analog inputs and outputs through use of the optional board DCVS5V62. Expression of references and values measured in percentage or under another form than can be defined by the operator. Possibility of speed and torque regulation. Adaptive speed controller. Armature-adapting current regulator. Motorised potentiometer function. Jog Function. 8 internal speed references. 5 internal linear ramps or S-ramps. Internal signal conditioning (gains, limits min/max , offset....). Extension of functions for specific applications through use of the optional DCVS5W04 board. Connection to a CANopen field bus by use of the optional DCVS5Z27 board.
2/3

2.1.4 Detachable display and programming module
Made up of an LCD display with two lines of 16 characters each, 8 function buttons, and 6 diagnostic LEDs.
It is used: - to command the DC drive when this mode has been selected, - to assign speed, voltage... during operation, - for configuration.
Table 2.1.4.1: Diagnostic LED
Description MM+ AL EN n=0 Ilim
Color yellow yellow red green yellow yellow
Function LED illuminated when the drive works in negative torque (anticlockwise rotation or braking in clockwise direction). Only for DCV104 LED illuminated when the drive works in positive torque (clockwise rotation or braking in anticlockwise direction). Braking only for DCV104 LED illuminated: DC drive malfunction LED illuminated: the DC drive is operating LED illuminated: no speed signalling LED illuminated: the DC drive is working in current limitation mode
T0020f
2/4

2.1.5 Storage, transport
Receiving the DC drive When unpacking the DC drive, verify that it has not been damaged during transport. Verify that the reference of the DC drive written on the label matches the shipping note. For DC drives from products M14 to M27 on the independent power bridge. the label bearing the DC drive reference is found
It is always recommended to transport and store DC drives in horizontal position. If the product is damaged, or if the delivery is incomplete or incorrect, please notify our service representatives immediately. Storage DC drives can only be stored in a dry place, in their original packaging, and in observance of the indicated temperature range. Note! The rooms, tables, or cabinets, where the DC drives are installed should be designed in such a way as to avoid any risk of condensation.
2/5

2.2 Selection guide
2.2.1 DC drive choice
Choice of DC drive essentially depends on: the rated armature voltage of the motor and the network voltage the optimized armature current which should not exceed the permanent optimized current of the DC drive the excitation current, the motor, as well as its voltage
4-quadrant product line - Classe S: input voltage up to 3x500V 10% / output voltage up to 520V - Classe Y: input voltage 3x690V 10% / output voltage 720V
Table 2.2.1.1: 4-quadrant product line.
DCV104llll DCV104D40S DCV104D70S DCV104C11S DCV104C18S DCV104C28S DCV104C42S DCV104C65S DCV104C77S DCV104M11S DCV104M15S DCV104M14Y DCV104M20S DCV104M20Y DCV104M27S DCV104M27Y
I induced permanent 40A 70A 110A 185A 280A 420A 650A 770A 1050A 1500A 1400A 2000A 2000A 2700A 2700A
I permanent line 34A 60A 95A 160A 241A 361A 559A 662A 903A 1290A 1205A 1720A 1720A 2313A 2313A
I max excit 10A 10A 14A 14A 20A 20A 20A 25A 25A 40A 40A 40A 40A 40A 40A
DC Drive 186W 254W 408W 553W 781W 1038W 1693W 2143W 2590W 4900W 4900W 5400W 6800W 8700W 8700W
T2211-en
Note!
Do not connect mains voltage to the outgoing terminals of DC drives! Never disconnect the motor while the product is in use.
For standard applications or for new motors, an armature choke is not necessary. However, certain motor manufacturers recommend it and in this case, it should be inserted into the armature circuit of the motor. Currents defined refer to continuous operation at an ambient temperature of 40C.
2/6

2.2 Selection guide
2-quadrant product line- Classe S: input voltage up to 3x500V 10% / output voltage up to 600V - Classe Y: input voltage 3x690V 10% / output voltage 810V
Table 2.2.1.2: 2-quadrant product line.
DCV94llll DCV94D70S DCV94C11S DCV94C18S DCV94C28S DCV94C42S DCV94C65S DCV94C77S DCV94M10S DCV94M15S DCV94M14Y DCV94M20S DCV94M20Y DCV94M27S DCV94M27Y
I induced permanent 70A 110A 185A 280A 420A 650A 770A 1000A 1500A 1400A 2000A 2000A 2700A 2700A
I permanent line 60A 95A 160A 241A 361A 559A 662A 860A 1290A 1205A 1720A 1720A 2313A 2313A
I max excit 10A 14A 14A 20A 20A 20A 25A 25A 40A 40A 40A 40A 40A 40A
DC Drive 254W 408W 553W 781W 1038W 1693W 2143W 2590W 4900W 4900W 5400W 6800W 8700W 8700W
T2212-en
2.2.2 Single cyclic load
Operation can be defined by two states: Io and Ip Ip = peak current Io= current in steady state
I
Ip Io
t1
t2
It is necessary to observe the following time limitations: - t2 7*t1 - t1 15s for products D40S to C65S - t1 10s for products C77S to M27
Table 2.2.2.1: peak current and in steady state.
I induced permanent (A) Io (A) Ip (A)
40 22 54
70 110 185 280 420 650 770 1000 1050 1400 1500 34 50 125 175 260 425 520 520 520 750 750
2000 1050 3000 (1) 2740 (2)
2700 1620 3500 (1) 3600 (2)

T2221-en
96 154 231 350 525 780 900 1400 1485 2170 2325
S Y
(1) DC drives DCV104/94M2 (2) DC drives DCV104/94M2
2/7

2.2 Selection guide
2.2.3 Special cycle speed
For a particular and well-known operating cycle, it is necessary to calculate the average heat equivalent current Itei: Itei =
I 1t1 + I 2t2 + I 3t3 + ... I ntn T
2 2 2 2
where T = t1 + t2 + t3+ ... + tn
I
I3 I4 I2 I5
t1
t2
t3
t4
t5
Itei =
I 2t2 + I 3t3 + I 4t4 + I 5t5 T
This Itei current must be less than or equal to 0.8 of the permanent armature current Furthermore it must be ensured that the peak load current is less than or equal to Ip If an overload is necessary, the adjustment must be carried out according to the instructions given in Chapter 5.14.6 Overload in the operating manual Note! The DC drive must be derated if it is installed at an altitude greater than 1000m just as for temperatures above those authorized (see Authorized ambient conditions chapter).
2/8

2.2 Selection guide
2.2.4 Power fuses
To provide adequate protection to the power semiconductors, suitable semiconductor fuses should be used. The line and armature semi-conductor fuses are included in the DC drive from the C77S product: Refer to Chapter 7, list of spare parts.
U1
V1
U1
V1
C
C D C1 D1 C D C1 D1
M 20 ... 650 A
Figure 2.2.4.1: Assignment of semi-conductor fuses.
M 770 ... 2700 A
Connection fuses / DC drive

Table 2.2.4.1: Connection fuses / drive DCV104
DCV104 ????
Line A fuses
Fuse holder
B Induced fuse Fuse holder
D excitation fuse
(1)
Fuse holder DF5FA61 DF5FA61 DF5FA61 DF5FA61 DF5FA61 DF5FA61

T0290-104f-en
DCV104D40S DCV104D70S DCV104C11S DCV104C18S DCV104C28S DCV104C42S DCV104C65S DCV104C77S DCV104M11S DCV104M15S DCV104M14Y DCV104M20S DCV104M20Y DCV104M27S DCV104M27Y
DCVF4M15 (1) DCVF4M19 (1) DCVF4M21 (1) DCVF4G23 (2) DCVF4G30 DCVF4E30 DCVF4G85 Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated
DF5FA61 DF5FA61 DF5FA61 DCVS7B77 DCVS7B78 DCVS7B78 DCVS7B78 -
DCVF4M17 (1) DCVF4M21 (1) DCVF4EAJ (2) DCVF4G23 (2) DCVF4G34 DCVF4E31 DCVF4G85 Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated
DF5FA61 DF5FA61 DCVS7B77 DCVS7B77 DCVS7B78 DCVS7B78 DCVS7B78 -
Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated DCVF4M15 DCVF4M15 DCVF4M15 DCVF4M15 DCVF4M15 DCVF4M15
(1) fixed quality of 10 fuses. (2) fixed quality of 3 fuses.
2/9

2.2 Selection guide
Table 2.2.4.2: connection fuses / DC drive DCV94
DCV94????
Line A fuses
Fuse holder
D excitation fuse
(1)
Fuse holder DF5FA61 DF5FA61 DF5FA61 DF5FA61 DF5FA61 DF5FA61

T0290-94f-en
DCV94D70S DCV94C11S DCV94C18S DCV94C28S DCV94C42S DCV94C65S DCV94C77S DCV94M10S DCV94M15S DCV94M14Y DCV94M20S DCV94M20Y DCV94M27S DCV94M27Y
DCVF4M19 (1) DCVF4M21 (1) DCVF4G23 (2) DCVF4G30 DCVF4E30 DCVF4G85 Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated
DF5FA61 DF5FA61 DCVS7B77 DCVS7B78 DCVS7B78 DCVS7B78 -
Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated DCVF4M15 DCVF4M15 DCVF4M15 DCVF4M15 DCVF4M15 DCVF4M15
(1) fixed quality of 10 fuses. (2) fixed quality of 3 fuses.
Note!
Invertors from the DCV94
product line do not require armature fuses.
The fuse holders are not equipped with fuse blowout detection.
2.2.5 Input chokes
To limit interferences associated with harmonic currents generated by the thyristor bridges, it is recommended to install at the head of each thyristor a three-phase line choke in accordance with the table below: Connection line armature / DC drive
Table 2.2.5.1: connection line armature / DC drive .
DCV?? DCV?D40S DCV?D70S DCV?C11S DCV?C18S DCV?C28S DCV?C42S DCV?C65S DCV?C77S DCV104M11S DCV94M10S DCV?M15S DCV?M14Y DCV?M20S DCV?M20Y DCV?M27S DCV?M27Y
Line inductance LDCVD70 LDCVD70 LDCVC15 LDCVC25 LDCVC25 LDCVC53 LDCVC65 LDCVM10 LDCVM10 LDCVM10 LDCVM14 LDCVM14 LDCVM24 LDCVM24 LDCVM24 LDCVM24
Characteristics 70A, 350H 70A, 350H 150A, 170H 250A, 100H 250A, 100H 530A, 45H 650A, 38H 1025A, 24H 1025A, 24H 1025A, 24H 1435A, 16H 1435A, 16H 2460A, 10H 2460A, 10H 2460A, 10H 2460A, 10H
Dissipation 110W 110W 280W 350W 350W 670W 730W 1300W 1300W 1300W 1450W 1450W 1860W 1860W 1860W 1860W
T0295-self-f-en
2/10

2.2 Selection guide
2.2.6 Input circuitbreaker
The input circuit-breaker protects the DC drive and the motor against the effects of a sustained overload and maintains the thermal cycle of the motor, even if the control of the DC drive is cut. It also makes it possible to safely isolate the motor power circuit. The magnetic setting of the input circuit breaker must be based on the peak current required by the machine, the heat setting referring to the rated induced current for the machine. The line RMS current is determined from the induced current according to the following formula: I line = I armature x 0.82 x 1.05 Connection Line circuit-breaker / DC drive
Table 2.2.6.1: Connection Line circuit-breaker / DC drive.
Merlin Gerin Line circuit breaker NS100N-TM40D NS100N-TM80D NS160N-TM125D NS250N-TM200D NS250N-TM250D NS400N-STR23SE NS630N-STR23SE NS800N-LOGIC2.0 NS1000N-LOGIC2.0 NS1000N-LOGIC2.0 NS1600N-LOGIC2.0 NS1250H-LOGIC2.0 NS2000N-LOGIC2.0 NS2000N-LOGIC2.0 NS2500N-LOGIC2.0 NS2500N-LOGIC2.0
Icu (kA) 25 25 30 30 30 30 30 40 40 40 40 42 65 65 65 65
T0296_disjonc_f-en
Note!
When using a dual motor configuration each motor should be individually protected. Icu refers to the rated power current of the DC drive.
2/11

2.2 Selection guide
2.2.7 Line contactor
The size of the contactors should be selected on the basis of the DC drives rated current. Sizing must be done according to the heating current in cycle AC1. Connection line contactor / DC drive
Table 2.2.7.1: connection line contactor / DC drive.
Telemecanique Line contactor LC1D32?? LC1D50?? LC1D80?? LC1D115?? LC1F185?? LC1F400?? LC1F500?? LC1F500?? LC1F630?? LC1F630?? LC1F780?? LC1F780?? LC1BP33?31 LC1BP33?31 LC1BR33?31 LC1BR33?31
T0297_contact_f-en
Plese select the contactor voltage code using the Telemecanique catalogue.
AC 50/60Hz 110 230 F7 P7 F P direct current 110 220 FD MD FD MD
Volts LC1D.. , LC1F.. LC1B...
Note!
For the LC1F & LC1B contactors series select the coil filter in the Telemecanique catalogue.
2/12

2.3 Features
2.3.1 Environmental conditions and regulations
General standards: Environment: Insulation distances: EMC immunity:
EN 61800-1, EN 50178 According to IEC 68-2 part 2 and 3 (EN 60068-2-2, test Bd) According to IEC 664, IEC 664 A; Air pollution degree 2 EN 61000-4-4 EMC immunity level 4 EN 61000-4-2 EMC immunity level 6 kV CD / 8kV AD
Vibrations: EMC Compatibility: Safety: Degrees of protection :
EN 60068-2-6, test Fc EN 61800-3 following the indications in the Electromagnetic compatibility guide. EN 50178 According to EN 60529 DCV D40S to M11S DCV M14Y to M27 IP20 IP00 for power bridge
Altitude: Admissible temperature (Ta):
Up to 1000 meters above sea level; for higher altitudes, 1.2% low current per 100 m of additional altitude. Function Ta = 0... 55 C Beyond 40 C: 1.25 % low current per degree above 40 C Storage Ta = -20 ... +55 C Transport Ta = -20 ... +60 C
Air humidity:
Function 5% to 85%, without condensation Storage 5% to 95% Transport 95%
Atmospheric pressure:
Operation from 86 kPa to 106 kPa Storage from 86 kPa to 106 kPa Transport from 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Recycling the DC drive:
DC drives of the DCV range can be reprocessed as electronic waste according to the prevailing national regulation for reprocessing of electronic components. The plastic ventilation covers of the DC drives up to product 185 A are recyclable: The material used is >ABS+PC< FR.
2/13

2.3 Features
2.3.2 Connection to the mains
Table 2.3.2.1: Powers supply voltage.
DC Drive DCV104/94lllS
Power bridge (terminals U/V/W) 3 x 230 V +/- 10% 3 x 400 V* +/- 10% 3 x 440 V +/- 10% 3 x 460 V +/- 10% 3 x 480 V +/- 10% 3 x 500 V +/- 10% 50/60Hz +/-5%
Excitation circuit (terminals U1/V1)
Control circuit (terminals U2/V2) DCVlD40S to C18S: 1x115V -15% to 230V+15%
Fan (terminals U3/V3) DCVlC77S to M27l***:
1 x 230 V +/- 10% 1 x 400 V +/- 10% 1 x 460 V +/- 10% 50/60Hz +/-5%
50/60Hz +/-5% 1 x 230 V +/- 10% DCVlC28S to M27l: 1x115V or 230V ** +/-15% 50/60Hz +/-5% 50/60Hz +/-5%
DCV104/94MllY
3 x 230 V +/- 10% 3 x 400 V +/- 10% 3 x 440 V +/- 10% 3 x 460 V +/- 10% 3 x 480 V +/- 10% 3 x 500 V +/- 10% 3 x 690 V* +/- 10% 50/60Hz +/-5%
Tab 0030-f-en
Factory settings To use the DC drive on a 500V network, switch S 15 on the regulation board must be positioned as follows: DCV94/104...S / DCVS4B21 S 15 .7 = ON S 15 .8 = OFF DCV94/104M...Y / DCVS4B22 Note! S 15 .7 = OFF S 15 .8 = ON
The undervoltage threshold of the power unit can be preset using the parameter Undervolt thr (standard: 230 V).
**
DC drives are delivered for a 230V power supply voltage for the control circuit For 115V power for products C28S to M11S insert a jumper between the earth terminals SA- SB placed on the DC drive.
*** Internal power of the fan for lower products
Note!
DC Drives above product C77S... have an earth current higher than 3.5 mA. The EN 50178 standards require fixed connections which cannot be disconnected.
2/14

2.3 Features
2.3.3 Excitation circuit
The DC drives (or the DCVS5N45 spare control board) are delivered with a minimum excitation current setting: 1 Up to product M11S 10 A from product M14Y to product M27 Through use of the toggle switch S 14 on the control board, it is possible to select the regulation of the excitation current closest to the value stated on the motor. In order to avoid damaging the quality of the regulation, it is recommended to work within 10% of the motor field current requirement.
Table 2.3.3.1a: excitation current calibration limitations.
DC drives DCV D40S to M11S:

Switch ohms excitation gauge 1.0 A (*) 2.0 A 3.0 A 5.0 A 10.0 A 12.9 A 17.2 A 20.0 A 24.1 A
148 ohm 330 ohm 182 ohm 36.4 ohm 845 ohm 1650 ohm
S14-1
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON
S14-2
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON
S14-3
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON
S14-4
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
S14-5
OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF
S14-6
ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF
S14-7
S14-8
equivalent resistance 1650 ohm 845 ohm 558.8 ohm 330 ohm
Not used
168 ohm 129.2 ohm 97 ohm 83 ohm 69 ohm

DCV0032en
(*) Default value upon delivery.
In order to obtain a current regulation value that is different or finer than those presented in the table, use the following formula to calculate resistor RLA-LB to insert between the earth terminals LA and LB on the control board. In this case, it is necessary to turn all the S14 switches OFF and to set the parameter Nom Flux curr to the value calculated with this formula. RLA-LB (Ohms) = 1667 /Excitation current
Table 2.3.3.1b: excitation current calibration resistances.
DC drives DCV M14Y to M27 :

excitation gauge 10A (*) 20A 40A S14-1
OFF ON ON
S14-2
ON OFF OFF
S14-3
OFF OFF ON
S14-4
OFF OFF OFF
S14-5
OFF OFF OFF
S14-6
OFF OFF OFF
S14-7
S14-8
equivalent resistance 332 ohm
Not used
168 ohm 83 ohm

DCV0062f-en
(*) Default value upon delivery. RLA-LB (Ohms) = 3332 /Excitation current
2/15

2.3 Features
2.3.4 Control circuit
115V/230V power of the control circuit (earth terminals U2 and V2) should be protected against short-circuits. The line circuit breaker or fuses should be chosen on the basis of the short-circuit power current and starting current of the power board of the DC drive. The circuit breaker or fuses are chosen to protect the wiring and to avoid tripping due to the starting current.
Table 2.3.4.1: starting and rated control circuit current.
Type Power DCVlllD40S ... DCVlllC18S DCVlllC28S ... DCVlllM11S DCVlllM15S ... DCVlllM27Y
Control circuit Nominal current absorbed 115 V 230 V 1A 0.5 A Starting current 115 V 230 V 20 A 10 A
70 W
110 W
1.2 A
0.7 A
15 A
7.5 A
70 W
1A
0.5 A
20 A
10 A
T0315-f-en
For the control circuit power supply, it's better to use an isolation transformer.
2/16

2.3 Features
2.3.5 Fans
Starting from product C77S, the fans should be powered by an independent 230V 50/60Hz circuit on the earth terminals U3 and V3 of the DC drive. The table below indicates the currents absorbed by the fans for tuning the protection connected to them:
Table 2.3.5.1: Fans.
DCV?? DCV?C77S DCV104M11S DCV94M10S DCV?M15S DCV?M14Y DCV?M20S DCV?M20Y DCV?M27S DCV?M27Y
Fan Absorbed current (A) 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.6 1.3 1.3 Flow rate (m3 /h ) 1050 1050 1050 900 900 900 1450 2600 2600
Tab0299-vent-f-en
Note!
From product M14, the power bridge is fitted with a ventilation power failure contact available on earth terminals 31-32 of the power bridge.
2/17

2.3 Features
2.3.6 Output voltages
The output voltages shown below take into account a grid undervoltage, within the limits of determined tolerances, as well as a voltage drop of the order of 4% due to the insertion of line armatures. It is the same as the recommended induced voltage for the connected motor. Armature circuit
Table 2.3.6.1: Armature circuit output voltage
Grid voltage (terminals U/V/W) 3 x 230 V 10 % 3 x 400 V 10 % 3 x 440 V 10 % 3 x 460 V 10 % 3 x 480 V 10 % 3 x 500 V 10 % 3 x 690 V 10 %
Output voltage UdAN (terminals C/D) DCV94? 260 V 470 V 530 V 560 V 580 V 600 V 810 V DCV104? 240 V 420 V 460 V 480 V 500 V 520 V 720 V
T0070f-en
Excitation circuit
Table 2.3.6.2: Excitation circuit output voltage
Grid voltage (terminals U1/V1) 1 x 230 V 10 % 1 x 400 V 10 % 1 x 460 V 10%
Output voltage UdFN** (terminals C1 / D1) fixed excitation variable excitation 200 V * 200 V * 310 V * 310 V * 360 V 360 V
T0080-f-en
* Voltage measured in accordance with DIN 40 030 (09/93) ** The max excitation voltage is 0.85 x U LN
2/18

2.3 Features
2.3.7 Control and regulation features
Digital inputs Digital outputs Analog inputs Analog outputs Outputs on relays Power Signal
0 / 15...30 V + 15...35 V + 15...35 V 0... 10 V 0...20 mA 4...20 mA 0... 10 V Relay R1 ( earth terminals 35-36) Relay R2 (earth terminals 75-76) Fusion fuses (earth terminals 81-82) * Ventilation failure (earth terminals 31-32) **
* C77S and beyond ** M14Y and beyond
3,2...6,4 mA (approx. 5 mA under 24V) 20 mA max per output 0,25 mA max 10 V max 10 V max 5 mA max per output 250V 250V 250V 250V 1A - AC11 1A - AC11 1A - AC11 1A - AC11
Input PTC
On earth terminals 78 and 79 it is possible to connect a PTC probe or thermoswitch to detect the motor overheating. When there is no temperature sensor, connect an external resistance to these earth terminals (R = 1 Kohm). Connection of temperature probe: Probes (PTC) PTC probes to DIN 44081 or 44082 adapted to the motor can be connected directly to the DC drive via earth terminals 78 and 79. In this case, the 1 K ohm resistance mounted between earth terminals 78 and 79 must be removed. Thermoswitches (Klixons) in the motor windings Klixon thermoswitches can lock the DC drive as any other external fault could (terminal 15). The sensor can also be connected to earth terminals 78 and 79 to give a specific fault signal. In this case the 1 K ohm resistance of these earth terminals must be removed and connected in series to the Klixon circuit.
Encoder inputs Sinusoidal voltage load channels pulses per revolution max. frequency max length of shielded cable Incremental voltage load channels pulses per revolution max. frequency max shielded cable
1 V pp 8,3 mA pp per channel (input resistance= 124 Ohm) two channels min: 600 - max:9999 150 kHz 150 m (0,75 mm2)/125 m (0.5 mm2)/ 55 m (0.22 mm2) 5 V TTL / 15...24 V HTL ( H logic) 4,5 mA TTL / 6,8 ... 10,9 mA HTL two channels with additional outputs min: 600 - max: 9999 150 kHz 150 m (0.75 mm2)/125 m (0.5 mm2)/ 55 m (0.22 mm2)
2/19

2.3 Features
Tachogenerator Input voltage Udt
load max length of twisted shielded cable
22.7 / 45.4 / 90.7 / 181.6 / 302.9 V max depending on position of switch S4 8 mA full scale depending on installation. 150 m typical
S4-3 S4-6 ON ON OFF OFF OFF S4-4 S4-5 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
DCV0033f-en
Udt to V max 22.7 45.4 90.7 181.6 302.9
S4-1 S4-8 ON ON ON ON OFF
S4-2 S4-7 ON ON ON OFF OFF
Internal voltages Max load +5V + 10 V - 10 V + 24 V + 10 V - 10 V + 24 V 160 mA 10 mA 10 mA 200 mA 3% 3% + 20 ... 30 V, connector XE1 PIN 7/9 terminal 7 terminal 8 connector XE2 PIN 2/9 non stabilised
Tolerance
2/20

2.3 Features
2.3.8 Accuracy
Internal reference voltage ( 10V, earth terminals 7,8): Stability error based on temperature 100 ppm/C References: by keyboard/Series link/bus resolution: by terminals (1/2, 3/4, 5/6) resolution: linearity Analog Outputs resolution: linearity: Speed regulation for all operation modes maximum speed digital resolution analog resolution by sinusoidal encoder speed feedback resolution usual accuracy control scale by incremental encoder speed feedback resolution usual accuracy control scale by tachogenerator Speed feedback resolution usual accuracy control scale Torque Regulation resolution usual accuracy control scale
16 Bit (15 Bit + sign) 11 Bit + sign 0.1% of full scale value 11 Bit + sign 0.5% of full scale value
8000 rpm 0.25 rpm 0.25 rpm 0.25 rpm 0.01% better than 1:10000 0.5 rpm 0.02% better than 1:1000 better than 1:2000 0.1% better than 1:1000 better than 1:2000 0.2% better than 1:500
2/21

2.3 Features
Note:
2/22
Q1 K0 Q4 Q20
(3) 1 sec
K0
Q6
31 VENT. (4) 32
A1
A.U
AT
35 OK 36
Control
A1 MA K2
81 FUSES (3) 82
A1
A1
A1
A1
K0
A2 CONTROL CIRCUIT 230V AC MAX , DIAGRAM TN A2
K1
KM1
A2
1 2 4
3 1
5 3
Q1
Q20
Q6
Q4
3 - Installation
L1
Digital inputs Control inputs
KM1 K0
(6) (7)
Stop Category 0 per IEC/EN60204-1
K1
F1
RS485 31 33 34
DI4 DI3 DI1 DI2
F6
3.1 Simplified sequence diagram
(1)
(10)
Power
(3)
fan (4) CONTROL
DCV104 DCV94
+10V -10V 0V10 AI1AI1+ AI2AI2+ AI3AI3+
EXTERNAL FAULT
FAN
ENABLE DRIVE
FAST STOP
R1
R2
START
AO1+
AO2+
DO1
DO2
DO3
COMAO
+ 7 8 GND 9 2 1 GND 4 3
GND
78
79 GND
C1
D1
22
21
GND
COMAO
24
23
GND
26
27
DO4
Figure 3.1.1: Typical control circuit and connection diagram.

U2 V2 35 OK SA-SB (8) XS 36 75 76 32 35 12 13 14 15 16 +24 19 0V24 18 XE1 XE2 28 29 30 25 S (9) X-Y mA or + - 10 V Analog inputs X-Y mA or + - 10 V Ref. potentiometer Analog outputs Digital outputs Sinusodal encoder Digital encoder (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) DCV104/94M14Y to M27? Resistance of 1 KOhm in the absence of PTC probe (9) (10) Input for fast stop (0 = fast stop) Input for external fault (0 = external fault) Control voltage selection DCV104/94C28S to M11S DCV104 only DCV M14Y - M15S - M20? - M27? only Power terminals DCV104/94 up to C65S DCV104 up to C65S DCV104/94C77S to M27? Control board terminals Power interface board terminals
81
82
U3
V3
31
32
U1
V1
A1
(3)
(5)
F2
(2)
1F1
1B1
2B2
PTC
2F2
M1
3/1
3 - Installation
3.1 Simplified sequence diagram
Speed feedback inputs
XE1
A+ A- B+ B- 0V 5V 5 6 8 1 7 9 5 6
XE2
A+ A- B+ B- 0V 24V 8 1 7 2
S4 - 1...8 +
Sinusodal encoder
Digital encoder
Analog tacho
Figure 3.1.2: Encoder and tachogenerator connection.
List of necessary equipment

Table 3.1.1: List of necessary equipment.
F1, F2, F6 L1 Q1 KM1 Q4
To be chosen from the associated table -d-d-dType for 115V power supply: C60N bi 1A curve D C60N bi 2A curve C
Chapter 2.2.4 Chapter 2.2.5 Chapter 2.2.6 Chapter 2.2.7 Type for 230V power supply: C60N bi 0.5A curve D C60N bi 1A curve D Type for 400V power supply: C60N bi 10A curve C C60N bi 16A curve C C60N bi 20A curve C C60N bi 25A curve C C60N bi 40A curve C Type: GV2ME05 GV2ME04 GV2ME06
Tab 3.1_nomenclature
Merlin Gerin Circuit Breaker * D40S to C18S DC Drives M14Y to M27l C28S to M11S Merlin Gerin Circuit Breaker * D40S and D70S C11S to C18S DC Drives C28S to C65S C77S to M11S M14Y to M27l Telemecanique Circuit Breaker ** C77S to M11S M20Y M14Y to M20S M27l
Q6
Q20
R
* **
1K mini between 0V10 and +10V or -10V

6KA interrupting capacity under 400V. Setting thermal release according to table in Chapter 2.3.5
3/2
3 - Installation
3.2 Connections
3.2.1 Front cover removal
To make the electrical connections, the bottom front cover of the unit must be removed.
1,5 Nm
1
1,5 Nm
To DCV
D40S
of DCV
C28S
Figure 3.2.1.1: cover removal.
To install optional boards or to configure the different switches, disconnect the display cable, then remove the upper cover.
3/3
3 - Installation
3.2 Connections
3.2.2 Connection features
Note !
The choice of connection section depends on the type of conductor, the installation type, ambient temperature, voltage and current, etc.: Refer to cable manufacturers catalogs.
Table 3.2.2.1: Allowable earth terminal connection section.
Section allowed for connection (mm2) to the terminals DCV?? DCV?D40S DCV?D70S DCV?C11S DCV?C18S DCV?C28S DCV?C42S DCV?C65S DCV?C77S DCV104M11S DCV94M10S DCV?M15S DCV?M14Y DCV?M20? DCV?M27? U, V, W, C, D, and PE 10 16 6...50 1695 Cu10x16x0.8 Cu50x8 or 2xCu10x16x0.8 Cu50x8 2xCu11x21x1 Connection to the 50 x 8 bar Connection to the 60 x 12 bar
T0322-sections-en
U1, V1, C1, D1
U3,V3, 35-36, 75-76, 78,79
+/-, control terminal
81-82, 31-32, control terminal
0.2 4
0.14 ...1.5
0.14 1.5 0.75 1.5 Without terminal Without terminal end end
Note!
Connections must be retightened after a few days of operation, then checked annually.
3.2.2.1 Wiring
Insulation: Except for the terminals identified for this use, do not connect any conductors connected to the terminal strips to the ground or the installation ground. The external analog and PTC probe circuits must be wired with stranded, shielded wire (not =< 5cm) . The same procedure is recommended for the tachogenerator feedback on + and - terminals. Separate the power cable and the control wires as much as possible. The low-level wire shields coming into the DC drive must be connected to the appropriate ground plan under the control board. The maximum length of links other than the reference and speed feedback is 5 m; Beyond that, implement an interface circuit.
Incorrect Correct
wire soldered on braid
braid stretched directly up to the ground terminal, connected drive side only
Equip all relays and contactors with voltage limiters (RC or diodes).
3/4
3 - Installation
3.2 Connections
3.2.3 RS485 Serial Interface
3.2.3.1 Description
The RS 485 serial link allows the transmission of data via a loop made up of two stranded, symmetrical conductors with a common shield. For a transmission speed of 38.4 Kbauds, the maximum transmission distance is 1200 metres. Transmission is done through a differential signal. The RS 485 serial link is able to both transmit and receive in semi-duplex mode. Through the RS 485 link it is possible to connect up to 128 DC drives (up to 128 addresses). Addressing is via the Device address parameter. Refer to Chapter 8 (in the RS485 column) for details on associated parameters. Point-to-point link On DCV series DC drives, the RS485 serial interface is a 9-pole SUB-D (XS) connector located on the DCV control board. Communication may be achieved with or without galvanic insulation: With galvanic insulation, use external DCVS5Z40 power source. The differential signal is transmitted on pins 3 (TxA/RxA) and 7 (TxB/RxB). The terminal resistors must be connected at the beginning and end of the physical connection of the RS 485 serial link to avoid signal reflection. On the control board, the terminal resistors are inserted by placing jumper straps S12 and S13. This is only necessary for the first and last product connected on the link. This configuration allows a point-to-point link with a programmable controller (PLC) or computer (PC). Multi-point link If a multi-point link is being considered, it is necessary to install a DCVS546Z adaptor onto each DC drive and to provide an external DCVS5Z40 power source. Refer to documentation on these options to use them.
DCVS5N45 XS
1 2 3 4 11 12 13 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 33 34 1 2 3 4 11 12 13 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 33 34
0VS +5 V S
470 R 100 R 470 R
S19 S18
150 R S12
S13
TxA/RxA TxB/RxB
+5 V PE
5 9
4 8
3 7
2 6
RS485
Figure 3.2.3.1.1: RS485 Serial Link
3/5
3 - Installation
3.2 Connections
To connect a serial link: - Use only shielded wires - Separate shielded wires from power and control wires.
3.2.3.2 Connector
Table 3.2.3.2.1: XS connector pinouts for the RS485 serial link.
Description* PIN 1 PIN 2 PIN 3 PIN 4 PIN 5 PIN 6 PIN 7 PIN 8 PIN 9
Function For internal use For internal use RxA/TxA For internal use 0 V (5V reference point) For internal use RxB/TxB For internal use +5V
I/O
Elect. interface
I/O I/O I/O I/O
RS485 Power supply RS485 Power supply

T0230f
I = Input, O = Output * 9-pole connector assembled on the device. A DIN 41 652 is required for connecting to the PLC or PC.
Control board jumpers S18 and S19 disconnect the serial link from the internal power supply provided by XS connector pins 5 and 9 S18 and S19 in the OFF position The serial link is galavanically isolated from the controller part. Power to the serial link is supplied through pins 5 (0V) and 9 (+5V). The serial link has the same ground potential as the control. Pins 5 and 9 supply power to the serial link adaptor. They cannot be used for any other function.
S18 and S19 in the ON position.
3/6
3 - Installation
3.2 Connections
3.2.4 Installing the input - output extension option board
An optional DCVS5V62 board may be inserted into the DC drive control board. This board extends the number of analog outputs and digital inputs/outputs. The optional DCVS5V62 board, inserted into the XBB connector, is considered to be option B by the DC drive. Refer to information on this option to use it.
RS485
21
30
31
40
1 ENC 1 ENC 2
10
11
20
DCVS5V62
2 1
20 19
XB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
3 3
Figure 3.2.4.1: Installing an input-output extension board.
A flat 75 x 2.5 x 0.4 mm screwdriver is recommended. Strip the ends of the wires to 6.5 mm. Connect only one stripped wire on each terminal. 1 2 3 Loosen the existing screws and screw in spacers onto the hole thread Attach optional board (the options XB connector into the XBB connector on the control board) Using the screws, attach the option board onto the spacers.
3/7
3 - Installation
3.3 DC drive installation
3.3.1 Installation Distances and Positions
Note!
The weights and dimensions outlined in this guide must be taken into consideration when installing the DC drive. Appropriate technical equipment (cart or lifting product for heavy units) must be used. Incorrect handling or the use of inappropriate tools could damage the unit and even cause fatal injury.
Figure 3.3.1.1: Maximum tilt angle.
The maximum tilt angle is 30. DC drives must be set up so that air may circulate freely around the unit. There must be at least 150 mm clearance around the DC drive. There must be at least 50 mm clearance for the front. Products that generate a great deal of heat must not be set up directly next to the DC drive. The power bridges of DC drives DCVM14Y to M27 have a protection index of IP00. The user is responsible for taking the necessary measures (insulation protection, put into cabinet, etc.) to protect workers from the risk of direct or indirect contact with bare parts while powered on. Connections must be retightened after a few days of operation, then checked annually.
Note!
3/8
3 - Installation
?150 mm
?150 mm
?10 mm
?10 mm
?150 mm
?10 mm
?50 mm
Figure 3.3.1.2: Installation Distances DCV D40S to M11S.
? 200 mm (*)
600 mm max
? 200 mm
?100 mm
(*) = or better: Direct contact with opening made in the top of the cabinet.
Figure 3.3.1.2: Installation Distances DCV M14Y to M27.
3/9
3 - Installation
3.3.2 Ventilation
When the DC Drive is mounted inside a cabinet, install ventilation grill for a better cooling process:
Table 3.3.2.1: ventilation.
Fan flow rate (m3 /h ) 80 160 160 320 320 680 1050 1050 1050 900 900 900 1450 2600 2600
Ventilation Grill surface area (mm) 2 x 5100 2 x 5100 2 x 11300 2 x 11300 2 x 22600 2 x 22600 2 x 35400 2 x 53100 2 x 53100 2 x 53100 2 x 53100 2 x 53100 2 x 53100 3 x 53100 2 x 160000 2 x 160000
Tab0332-ventilation-en
3.3.3 Dimensions and weight
DC drives
b1 b b1 b1 2 b1 a1
1
c a 3
1 a1
a1
Figure 3.3.3.1: Sizes for products D40S.....to M11S.
3/10
3 - Installation
Table 3.3.3.1: Sizes for products D40S.....to M11S.
Type DCV?D40S DCV?D70S DCV?C11S DCV?C18S DCV?C28S DCV?C42S DCV?C65S DCV?C77S DCV?M10S DCV?M11S
Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3
a b c a1 b1 dia. Weight [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [kg] 360 274 250 275 M6 8.4 263 360 274 250 275 M6 8.8 263 360 274 250 275 M6 10,8 263 360 274 250 275 M6 10.8 263 388 338 275 375 M6 24 311 388 338 275 375 M6 29.5 311 388 368 275 375 M6 32 311 510 402 500 200 M6 61 521 510 402 500 200 M6 65 521 510 402 500 200 M6 65 521
T0090A-f-en
Note!
Control Module DCVS4B
reinitialises the product D40S product data
Table 3.3.3.2: Sizes for products M14Y.....to M27 .
Type DCV94M14Y DCV94M15S DCV94M20S DCV94M20Y DCV94M27S DCV94M27Y DCV104M14Y DCV104M15S DCV104M20S DCV104M20Y DCV104M27S DCV104M27Y
Size 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
a [mm] 500 500 500 620 712 712 500 500 500 620 712 712
b c d e f a1 a2 d1 d2 Weight [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [kg] 760 275 550 153 95 10 480 50 225 70 760 275 550 153 95 10 480 50 225 70 760 275 550 153 95 10 480 50 225 70 764 360 550 233 95 10 600 50 225 100 785 395 660 255 95 10 692 50 280 140 775 395 560 255 95 10 692 50 230 140 1310 375 550 153 95 10 480 50 225 130 1310 375 550 153 95 10 480 50 225 130 1310 375 550 153 95 10 480 50 225 130 1314 475 550 233 95 10 600 50 225 170 1535 490 660 255 100 10 692 50 280 240 1335 475 560 255 95 10 692 50 230 240
T0090B-f-en
263
d2
d1
360
L=1.2 m (included)
d1
d2
U
a1
V
a2 a
e c
Figure 3.3.3.2: Sizes for products M14Y.....to M27 .
a1
3/11
3 - Installation
Three-phase line chokes
Reference LDCVD70 LDCVC15 LDCVC25 LDCVC53 LDCVC65 LDCVM10 LDCVM14 LDCVM24
a mm 180 270 270 380 390 400 420 420
b mm 215 240 240 410 410 410 490 550
c mm 150 150 220 225 275 310 340 385
g mm 85 105 105 315 310 310 310 310
h mm 97 96 125 95 100 125 125 155
mm 7 11,5 11,5 9 9 9 9 9
Weight Kg 8,000 14,900 24,300 37,000 46,000 66,000 80,000 120,000
3/12
3 - Installation
Fuse holder
Reference DF5FA61
Size 22-58
a 115
b 30
c 55
d 24
e 23
f 90
DCVS9B77
DCVS9B78
2xM6
2xM6
180
150
262
202 =
40
77
98
3/13
3 - Installation
Fuses
Cylindrical fuses
10
Type S
N 10
S A
DCVF4EAJ DCVF4G23
A 105 105
E 27 30
G 47 51
N 54 56
S 80 80
Type S1-S2
11 G B
11 52 S A
A S1 S2
140
6 E
140
B 24 30
E 51 60
G 51 60
S 110 110
10
Type G2M
H2
H1
E G2M1
60
H1 65
H2 99
M M10
M E
53
Type 170M
D E A
F E H
170M5 170M6
A 50 50
B 51 51
D 69 77
E 53 61
F M8 M10
G 8 10
H 20 24
Figure 3.3.3.3: Fuse Sizes
3/14
3 - Installation
Table 3.3.3.4: Associated fuses / fuse holder part references

DCV??? DCV104D4 0S
DCV??? D70S
DCV??? C11S
DCV??? C18S
DCV??? C28S
DCV??? C42S
DCV??? C65S
DCV??? C77S DCM94M10S DCM104M11S DCV??? M14Y
DCV??? M15S DCV??? M20S DCV??? M20Y DCV??? M27S DCV??? M27Y
Position (see Chap. 2.2.4) A B D A B (DCV104) D A B (DCV104) D A B (DCV104) D A B (DCV104) D A B (DCV104) D A B (DCV104) D C (DCV94) C (DCV104) D C D C D C (DCV94) C (DCV104) D C (DCV94) C (DCV104) D C D C (DCV94) C (DCV104) D C D C (DCV94) C (DCV104) D
Qty 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 6 2 3 2 6 2 6 6 2 6 6 2 6 2 6 12 2 12 2 12 12 2
Reference DCVF4M15 DCVF4M17 DCVF4M07 DCVF4M19 DCVF4M21 DCVF4M07 DCVF4M21 DCVF4EAJ DCVF4M07 DCVF4G23 DCVF4G23 DCVF4M07 DCVF4G30 DCVF4G34 DCVF4M11 DCVF4E30 DCVF4E31 DCVF4M11 DCVF4H01 DCVF4H01 DCVF4M11 DCVF4G60 DCVF4G59 DCVF4M11 DCVF4G61 DCVF4M11 DCVF4G60 DCVF4M11 DCVS7798 DCVS7804 DCVF4M15 DCVS7799 DCVS7793 DCVF4M15 DCVS7802 DCVF4M15 DCVS7802 DCVS7794 DCVF4M15 DCVS7797 DCVF4M15 DCVS7797 DCVS7805 DCVF4M15
Fuses Shape/Size Cylindrical capsule Cylindrical capsule Cylindrical capsule Cylindrical capsule Cylindrical capsule Cylindrical capsule Cylindrical capsule Type S Cylindrical capsule Type S Type S Cylindrical capsule Type S1 Type S1 Cylindrical capsule Type S2 Type S2 Cylindrical capsule Type S2 Type S2 Cylindrical capsule Type G2M Type G2M Cylindrical capsule Type G2M Cylindrical capsule Type G2M Cylindrical capsule Type 170M6 Type 170M6 Cylindrical capsule Type 170M6 Type 170M5 Cylindrical capsule Type 170M6 Cylindrical capsule Type 170M6 Type 170M6 Cylindrical capsule Type 170M6 Cylindrical capsule Type 170M6 Type 170M6 Cylindrical capsule
Dimensions (mm) 22.2x58 22.2x58 14.3x51 22.2x58 22.2x58 14.3x51 22.2x58 Fixing point = 80 mm 14.3x51 Fixing point = 80 mm Fixing point = 80 mm 14.3x51 Fixing point = 110 mm Fixing point = 110 mm 14.3x51 Fixing point = 110 mm Fixing point = 110 mm 14.3x51 Fixing point = 110 mm Fixing point = 110 mm 14.3x51
Holder ref. fuses DF5FA61 (1) DF5FA61 (1) DF5FA61 DCVS7B77 (1) DCVS7B77 (1) DCVS7B78 (1) DCVS7B78 (1) DCVS7B78 (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (2) (2) DF5FA61 (2) (2) DF5FA61 (2) DF5FA61 (2) (2) DF5FA61 (2) DF5FA61 (2) (2) DF5FA61
Tfuses-F-en
14.3x51 14.3x51 53x60 14.3x51
22.2x58
22.2x58 22.2x58
22.2x58 22.2x58
22.2x58
(1) DC drive-integrated. (2) Power bridge-integrated.
3/15
3 - Installation
Note:
3/16
4 - Setup and commissioning

4.1 Positioning jumpers and micro-switches
Note!
Before turning on the DC drive or control module, it is imperative that the configuration of jumpers and micro-switches be checked against the tables below.
S3 S2 S1 S0
RS485
21
30
31
40
ABC ENC 1 ENC 2
10
11
20
Figure 4.1.1: Topographical arrangement of control board components.
Note !
Upon receiving a spare DCVS5N45 control board, the customisable S15 switches are set to 0. It is up to the user to configure the S15 according to the type and product of the DC drive, according to the tables set out below. Upon receiving a spare DCVS4B control module, the user must do the same with the S15 switch on the control board, but he must also configure S1, S3, S4 on the power interface board according to the product of the power bridge that is linked to it.
4/1

4.1 Positioning jumper straps and micro-switches
Table 4.1.1: customisable S15 switch for the type and product of the DC drive.
Converter type
S15-1 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
S15-2 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF
S15-3 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON
S15-4 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
S15-5 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF
S15-6 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
S15-7(*) OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
S15-8 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF
DCV?D40S DCV?D70S DCV?C11S DCV?C18S DCV?C28S DCV?C42S DCV?C65S DCV?C77S DCV94M10S DCV94M15S DCV94M20S DCV94M27S DCV94M14Y DCV94M20Y DCV94M27Y DCV104M11S DCV104M15S DCV104M14Y DCV104M20S DCV104M20Y DCV104M27S DCV104M27Y
ON OFF ON ON ON ON
ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

T4110
(*) The DCV S DC drives are delivered standard for a 400V armature thyristor bridge. For use on a 500V network, set S15-7 to ON.
Adjusting DT feedback voltage range Depending on the maximum voltage which could be applied by the tachogenerator to the DC drives + and - earth terminals, the user might need to select the feedback voltage range by means of a resistor to be placed on earth terminals A, B, C of the DT feedback connector: 0...108V 108...188V 188...340V No jumper strap between terminals A/B/C There are no jumpers between terminals B et C There are no jumpers between terminals A et C
Table 4.1.2: S4 switch adjusting the tachogenerator input voltage.

S4-1 S4-8 ON ON ON ON OFF S4-2 S4-7 ON ON ON OFF OFF S4-3 S4-6 ON ON OFF OFF OFF S4-4 S4-5 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
DCV0033f-en
Udt to V max 22.7 45.4 90.7 181.6 302.9
Table 4.1.3: Jumper straps on the control board.
4/2

4.1 Positioning jumpers and micro-switches
Description S1 S4 OFF= French, ON= English
Function
Factory
Adaptation of the dynamo/tachogenerator feedback voltage see table 4.1.2 Speed feedback type Sinusoidal encoder Pos.A Combination dynamo/tachometer Pos.B Induced voltage Position immaterial Adaptation to the analogue 1 input (terminals 1 and 2) ON 0 ... 20 mA / 4 ... 20 mA OFF 0 ... 10V / -10 ... +10V Adaptation to the analogue 2 input (terminals 3 and 4) ON 0 ... 20 mA / 4 ... 20 mA OFF 0 ... 10V / -10 ... +10V Adaptation to the analogue 3 input (terminals 5 and 6) ON 0 ... 20 mA / 4 ... 20 mA OFF 0 ... 10V / -10 ... +10V Resistance of terminator for the RS485 serial interface ON Resistance of inserted terminator OFF " " " not inserted Selection of maximum values for excitation current see table 4.1.4 Adaptation of the regulation board to the size of the drive see table 4.1.1 Selection of the internal/external power supply for the RS485 serial interface Pos. OFF Serial interface powered externally (PIN 5 and 9) and galvanically isolated from the regulation unit. Pos. ON Serial interface, powered internally and connected to the reference point of the regulation potential. Control of Channel C of the incremental encoder on connector XE2 ON Channel C-controlled OFF Channel C-uncontrolled Adaptation to the voltage of the output signals from the incremental encoder ON 5 V Encoder OFF 15...30 V Encoder
22.7V
S5,S6
S9
OFF
S10
OFF
S11
OFF
S12 / S13
OFF
S14 S15
S 18 / S 19
OFF
S20
OFF
S21 / S22 / S23
OFF
T0160f-en
ON = jumper installed OFF = jumper not installed
Table 4.1.4: Activating calibration jumper straps.
DC drives DCV D40S to M11S:

Switch ohms excitation gauge 1.0 A (*) 2.0 A 3.0 A 5.0 A 10.0 A 12.9 A 17.2 A 20.0 A 24.1 A
148 ohm 330 ohm 182 ohm 36.4 ohm 845 ohm 1650 ohm
S14-1
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON
S14-2
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON
S14-3
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON
S14-4
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
S14-5
OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF
S14-6
ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF
S14-7
S14-8
equivalent resistance 1650 ohm 845 ohm 558.8 ohm 330 ohm
Not used
168 ohm 129.2 ohm 97 ohm 83 ohm 69 ohm

DCV0032en
DC drives DCV M14Y to M27 :

excitation gauge 10A (*) 20A 40A S14-1
OFF ON ON
S14-2
ON OFF OFF
S14-3
OFF OFF ON
S14-4
OFF OFF OFF
S14-5
OFF OFF OFF
S14-6
OFF OFF OFF
S14-7
S14-8
equivalent resistance 332 ohm
Not used
168 ohm 83 ohm

DCV0062f-en
(*) Default value upon delivery.
4/3

4.1 Positioning jumper straps and micro-switches
Table 4.1.5: customising S1, S3, S4 switches to the type and product of power bridge (power interface board)
IdN Type [A] DCV104M15S DCV94M15S DCV104M20S DCV94M20S DCV104M27S DCV94M27S Type [A] DCV104M14Y DCV94M14Y DCV104M20Y DCV94M20Y DCV104M27Y DCV94M27Y 1400 2000 2700 1500 2000 2700 IdN Jumper S1 on power card PRESENT CUT PRESENT CUT PRESENT CUT Jumper S1 on power card PRESENT CUT PRESENT CUT PRESENT CUT Switches S3-S4 on power card S3-1 S3-2 S3-3 S3-4 S3-5 S3-6 S3-7 S3-8 S4-1 S4-2 S4-3 S4-4 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Switches S3-S4 on power card S3-1 S3-2 S3-3 S3-4 S3-5 S3-6 S3-7 S3-8 S4-1 S4-2 S4-3 S4-4 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
T4150-F-en
Note !
In bold: Additional part default values.
4/4

4.2 Earth Terminal Designation and Control Points
Table 4.2.1: LEDs on control board.
Description PWR RST RS485 ACT RUN
Function Illuminated when the +5V is present and the correct value Illuminated when the RST signal is active Illuminated when the RS485 interface is powered on Illuminated when the thyristor control is activated Warning lamp which flashes during the regulation phase
T0170f-en
Table 4.2.2: Test points on control board.
Test point XY17 XY18
Function Current signal induced (0.61 V = DC Drive nominal current) 0V reference

T0165f-en
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Figure 4.2.1: Positioning of earth terminals 1 to 40.
4/5

Table 4.2.3: Terminal assignments (terminals 1 to 20).

Voltage max 10V Current max 0.25mA (20mA in current setpoint) 0.25mA (20mA in current setpoint) 0.25mA (20mA in current setpoint) 10mA 10mA 15V/3.2mA 24V/5mA 30V/6.4mA 15V/3.2mA 24V/5mA 30V/6.4mA 15V/3.2mA 24V/5mA 30V/6.4mA 15V/3.2mA 24V/5mA 30V/6.4mA 200 mA**
T0180f
Terminal descriptions 1+2 analog input 1 3+4 analog input 2 5+6 analog input 3 7 +10V 8 -10V 9 0V 10 10 11 12 Enable drive 13 Start 14 Fast stop 15 External fault 16 COM ID 18 0V 24 19 +24 V 20
Function Programmable differential analog input Signal:terminal 1, reference point: terminal 2 Assigned in the factory to Ramp ref 1* Programmable differential analog input Signal:terminal 3, reference point: terminal 4 Not assigned in the factory* Programmable differential analog input Signal:terminal 5, reference point: terminal 6 Not assigned in the factory* Setpoint voltage +10V Reference point: terminal 9 Setpoint voltage -10V Reference point: terminal 9 Reference point of voltages at terminals 7 and 8 Connection of shielding (PE), connected to the frame 0V internal Validation of DC drive 0V +15...30V Start command 0V +15...30V Fast stop 0V +15...30V External fault 0V +15...30V DC drive disabled DC drive enabled No start Start Fast stop No fast stop Presence of an external fault No external fault
I/O
10V
10V
O O I
+10V -10V +30V
+30V
+30V
+30V
Reference point of discrete inputs, terminals 12 to 15 Reference point of 24V voltage of terminal 19 Voltage +24V Reference point: terminal 18 Connection of shielding (PE), connected to the frame
+20...30V
* The user can adapt the configuration to the requirements of the application concerned via the keyboard, serial interface or bus link. ** Maximum available current, all loads included, on the internal +24V power supply
4/6

Table 4.2.4: Terminal assignments (terminals 21 to 40).
Description 21 22 23 24 25 26
Function Analog output 1 Reference point: terminal 22 Factory preset value is: Actual speed Reference point of analog output 1 Analog output 2 Reference point: terminal 24 Factory preset value is: Motor current Reference point of analog output 2 Reference point of discrete outputs (terminals 26 to 29) Digital output 1 Reference point: terminal 25 Assigned in the factory to Ramp + Digital output 2 Reference point: terminal 25 Assigned in the factory to Ramp Digital output 3 Reference point: terminal 25 Assigned in the factory to speed threshold Digital output 4 Reference point: terminal 25 Factory preset value is: Overload available Power supply for discrete outputs Discrete input 1 Reference point: terminal 35 Not assigned in the factory Discrete input 2 Reference point: terminal 35 Not assigned in the factory Discrete input 3 Reference point: terminal 35 Not assigned in the factory Discrete input 4 Reference point: terminal 35 Not assigned in the factory Reference point of discrete inputs (terminals 31 to 34) Not used
I/O O O O
Voltage max. 10V 10V +30V
Current max. 5mA 5mA 20mA
27
+30V
20mA
28
+30V
20mA
29
+30V
20mA Depends on the load, 80mA max 15V/3.2mA 24V/5mA 30V/6.4mA 15V/3.2mA 24V/5mA 30V/6.4mA 15V/3.2mA 24V/5mA 30V/6.4mA 15V/3.2mA 24V/5mA 30V/6.4mA
30
+30V
31
+30V
32
+30V
33
+30V
34 35 36 ... 40
+30V
T0240f
4/7

Note!
Control board power. The control board power is galavanically isolated from the power part. Figure 4.2.2 shows the principle:
Analog inputs (AI) Validations 12 13 14 15 16 11
0V
Reference 10 9
0 V 10
Digital I/O Supply 8

- 10 V
1 2
3 4
5 6
7
+ 10 V
19
+ 24 V
18
0 V 24
7 DCVS5N45 Analog outputs (AO) Digital outputs (DO) 15 V Digital inputs (DI) 0V +5V
Supply
2
XE 2
+ 15 V
7 9
XE 1
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
35
31
32
33
34
Figure 4.2.2: Potential of the regulation part.
The analog inputs are differential. The digital inputs and outputs are separated from the regulator by optocouplers. Earth terminals 12..15 have terminal 16 as a reference potential. Earth terminals 31...34 have terminal 35 as a reference potential. Terminal 11 is connected to 0 V electronic, while terminal 10 is connected to the ground. In order to give better prevention against interference, it is possible to link terminal 10 to terminal 11 by means of a 0.1 F capacitor. The power sources available on the regulation board have a common ground: +10V and - 10V for reference +24V digital input output supply +5V coding supply Analog outputs are separated by a differential amplifier. Both outputs have the same potential between them (earth terminals 22 and 24). To use the outputs, it is necessary to connect a power source voltage to terminal 30.
4/8
Sinusoidal encoder
Digital encoder

Table 4.2.5: Tachogenerator connecting block.

Description Function Reference point of tachogenerator input Positive tachogenerator input Clockwise rotation: positive " anticlockwise negative I/O Max. voltage 22.7 / 45.4 / 90.7 / 181.6 / 302.9 V * Max. current
1.8/3.6/6 mA
T0190f
* This depends on the selection imposed by switch S4 (see table 4.1.2)
Table 4.2.6: XE1 connector pinouts for a sinusoidal encoder.
Description PIN 1 PIN 2 PIN 3 PIN 4 PIN 5 PIN 6 PIN 7 PIN 8 PIN 9 Channel BNot used Channel C+(zero pulse) Channel C-(zero pulse) Channel A+ Channel A-
Function
I/O I I I I I O I O
Max. voltage 1 V pp 1 V pp 1 V pp 1 V pp 1 V pp 1 V pp +5 V
Max. current 8.3mA pp 8.3mA pp 8.3mA pp 8.3mA pp 8.3mA pp 8.3mA pp 160mA

T0210f-en
Reference point of the 5V Channel B+ Encoder supply voltage + 5V
Table 4.2.7: XE2 connector pinouts for an incremental coder.
Description PIN 1 PIN 2 PIN 3 PIN 4 PIN 5 PIN 6 PIN 7 PIN 8 PIN 9
Function Channel BEncoder supply voltage +24V Channel C+ (zero pulse) Channel C- (zero pulse) Channel A+ Channel AReference point of the 24V Channel B+ Not used
I/O I O I I I I O I
Max. voltage Max. current 30 V pp* 17mA pp 24 V 200mA** 30 V pp* 17mA pp 30 V pp* 17mA pp 30 V pp* 17mA pp 30 V pp* 17mA pp 30 V pp* 17mA pp
T0220f-en
* The maximum voltage is 30V when jumpers S21,S22,S23 are not installed (15..30V encoders). If the jumpers are installed, the maximum voltage on these pins is 5V. ** Maximum available current, all loads included, on the internal +24V power supply
4/9

4.3 Control Keyboard
The control keyboard features an LCD display with two lines of 16 characters, with six LEDs and 8 function keys.
It is used: - to control the DC drive if this command mode was selected - to display speed, voltage, ... during operation - setup of the DC drive.
4.3.1 LED Diodes
The keyboards LED displays the operating mode that the DC drive is in.
Table 4.3.1.1: Diagnostic LED
Description MM+ AL EN n=0 Ilim
Color yellow yellow red green yellow yellow
Function LED illuminated when the drive works in negative torque (anticlockwise rotation or braking in clockwise direction). Only for DCV104 LED illuminated when the drive works in positive torque (clockwise rotation or braking in anticlockwise direction). Braking only for DCV104 LED illuminated: DC drive malfunction LED illuminated: the DC drive is operating LED illuminated: no speed signalling LED illuminated: the DC drive is working in current limitation mode
T0020f
4/10

4.3.2 Moving Between Menus
The DRIVE STATUS menu always appears when the DC drive is turned on. and keys to navigate between menus. Use the Press ENT key to enter the selected menu or one of its submenus. Press CANC to return to the next higher level.
Main menu
ENT
2nd level
DRIVE STATUS Ramp ref 1
CANC
3rd level
DCV DRIVE STATUS
ENT
DRIVE STATUS Enable Drive

CANC
DCV START UP
CANC
Menu Parameter
ENT
DCV TUNING
CANC
CANC
TUNING Start/Stop
ENT
ENT
DCV MONITOR
CANC CANC
TUNING Speed self tune

CANC
Speed self tune Fwd-Rev spd tune
Figure 4.3.2.1 Moving between menus.
4.3.3 Viewing parameters
Select the parameters within the menu. Press ENT. The parameter and its value will display. Return to the menu by using CANC.
4/11

4.3.4 Changing/ Validating parameters / Password
The parameters whose values can be changed fall into three groups: parameters whose content is inserted as a number or text in a defined range, e.g., ramp time and references parameters whose content is selected among pre-established values e.g. Jog selection with Speed input and Ramp input alternatives parameters which can be automatically defined by the keyboard, e.g. Auto tune inp XX. Only parameters not linked to a digital or analog input/output may be modified by the keyboard. The modified parameters must be saved, otherwise the current parameters will be reloaded when the DC drive is turned on again. Changing the numerical or text value:
0 ... 9
Note!
9 ... 0
ENT ENT
ok
ENT
START UP Speed feedback
Speed feedback Encoder 2 pulses
Encoder 2 pulses 1 0 2 4
Return without changes

CANC
CANC
select the parameters to be changed within the Menu Press ENT. The parameters value will be displayed and the last digit will flash. Each flashing numbers value can be changed the + key to increase the value the - key to reduce the value select left digits by select right digits by ENT key: Return to preceding display and validation of new value CANC key: Return to preceding display without validating new value Selecting the Dim factor text parameter, in addition to numbers, the following characters / % & +,-.:<=>? A...Z [ ] a...z are available.
Note!
Selecting pre-defined values the parameters which can be chosen according to different possibilities are indicated on the keyboard display by the -/+ sign when the value has to be changed, press ENT. The display will indicate the current value, which can be changed using the + and - keys go back to the previous display and confirm the value by pressing ENT. go back to the previous display without confirming the value by pressing CANC.
4/12

Automatic analog input calibration Select the Auto tune input XX parameter press ENT the calibration process begins automatically. Tuning and Ready will appear in that order, followed the original parameter again. During the calibration process the maximum authorised signal should be present on the analog input.
Note!
Save The modified parameters must be saved, otherwise the current parameters will be reloaded when the DC drive is turned on again. Select Save Parameters in the Basic Menu or SPEC FUNCTIONS Menu . Press ENT The save function is automatic. Wait then Write ok indicates that the save operation is complete.
Password Introduction The operator may define a password made up of a any combination of five numbers, to protect data and avoid unwanted actions via the keyboard. Use parameter Pword 1. Select Pword1 (=Password 1) in the CONFIGURATION Menu to set up. Press ENT. 00000 will be displayed with the last digit flashing. The value of each flashing figure can then be changed. Confirm the password by pressing ENT. The message Pword1: Enable will display, with the value selected as password. In the CONFIGURATION menu, the message Pword 1: Enabled indicates that a password exists. Press the CANC key to stop entering the password. For the password to remain enabled when powered-up, it must be saved, using the Save parameters function.
Note!
Deleting the password Select the Pword1 (=Password 1) parameter in the CONFIGURATION menu. When the password is enabled, the message Pword 1:Enabled will be displayed. Press ENT. The value 00000 will be displayed, and the last figure will flash. To delete the password, please enter the same combination of figures as the saved password. Confirm deletion by pressing ENT. The message: Pword1:Disabled will appear. Press the CANC key to end password deletion. When an incorrect password is entered by mistake, the message Password wrong will display as soon as the ENT key is pressed and the keyboard will return to the CONFIGURATION Menu and display Pword1:Enabled For a password not only to be disabled, but completely deleted, the new status must be memorised using the Save Parameters function.
Note!
4/13

4.3.5 Keyboard commands
To control the DC drive via the keyboard, the following parameters must be entered: - Main commands - Control mode Keyboard Local MENU START UP and CONFIGURATION MENU CONFIGURATION
Control inputs to terminals 12 .. 15 must also be present when the DC drive is keyboardcontrolled. This means, for example, that the signal to terminal 13 must be present even though it is effectively controlled via the keyboard. If the drive is stopped via the keyboard, it can be restarted by pressing the Run key. If the stoppage has been caused by a lack of signal to terminal 13, the signal to terminal 13 and the keyboard command are both required for the drive to restart. The signal to the terminals must be present before giving the command via the keyboard. The same principle applies to validating the DC drive using the Enable drive parameter.
4.3.5.1 Starting and stopping the DC drive

DC drive release Select the Enable drive parameter on the BASIC MENU or on the MONITOR menu Press ENT Use the + key to change the display from Disabled to Enabled Press ENT to confirm input.
Disabling the DC drive Select the Enable drive parameter on the STARTUP menu or on the MONITOR menu Press ENT Use the - key to change the display from Enabled to Disabled Press ENT to confirm input.
Start / Stop This keyboard command can only be used when the Main commands parameter = Digital. To start: To stop: press RUN. press STOP .
4.3.5.2 Fault register/ RAZ

Displaying the fault register Select the Failure register parameter on the SPEC FUNCTIONS menu Press ENT. The last fault to occur is displayed The previous fault can be displayed using the + key The fault register can contain up to 10 messages. When a new fault occurs, the oldest one is deleted If the ENT key is pressed, the time of the fault is displayed. The time refers to the time that the drive has been working (connected to a power source) Pressing the CANC key returns to the Failure register menu.
Clearing the fault register Select the Failure reg del parameter on the SPEC FUNCTIONS menu Press ENT. The failure register is cleared.
4/14

Acknowledging a fault signal If a fault occurs, the display will flash Pressing the CANC key will allow acknowledgement of the failure, unless a Start command has been given.
Acknowledgement of several simultaneous faults If several faults are detected simultaneously, the words Multi failures will flash in the display Select the Failure reset parameter on the SPEC FUNCTIONS menu Pressing the ENT key will allow acknowledgement of the faults, unless a Start command has been given.
4.3.5.3 Motorised potentiometer function

Note! To use the motorised potentiometer function, it must be activated using the Enable moto pot (Enabled) parameter
Acceleration, deceleration Select the Motor pot oper parameter on the Motor pot sub-menu By pressing ENT, the current reference value will be displayed Pressing the + key will increase the reference value and speed Pressing the - key will decrease the reference value and the motor will slow down. This is valid for rotation in either direction Pressing CANC will return to the Motor pot sub-menu.
Inverting the direction of rotation Select the Motor pot sign parameter on the Motor pot sub-menu By pressing ENT, the current direction of rotation will be displayed Pressing the + key will select clockwise rotation and the - key selects anti-clockwise (anticlockwise rotation only on the DCV104) Confirm choice by pressing ENT. Changing the parameter Motor pot sign while the machine is working will invert the direction of rotation in accordance with the ramp times selected.
Motorised motor-potentiometer reset Select the Motor pot reset parameter on the Motor pot sub-menu Press ENT. The speed reference is set to zero. Setting the speed reference to zero is only possible with the DC drive disabled.
Note!
4.3.5.4 Jog Function

Note! The Jog function must be activated using the Enable jog (Enabled) parameter.
Select the Jog operation parameter on the Jog function sub-menu Press the ENT key. The Jog function selection is displayed Pressing the + key will select clockwise rotation and the - key selects anti-clockwise (anticlockwise rotation only on the DCV104) Pressing CANC will return to the Jog function sub-menu.
4/15

4.4 Menu structure
This structure contains a main menu, sub-menus and parameters. The structure can be compared to the directory and sub-directory trees on a computer. The Main Menu The Sub-menus The Parameters is the root directory are the sub-directories are the files
This structure can found both using the keyboard and browser in the optional DCVCNF100 configuration software, and in the description of the functions developed in detail in chapter 5 of this manual. The List of parameters in chapter 8 of this manual gives the values admitted by each of the parameters, their addresses and information on read/write capabilities. Main menus with sub-menus
DRIVE STATUS START UP Motor data Limits Speed feed-back Alamrs Overload contr Analog inputs Analog input 1 Analog input 2 Analog input 3 DRIVE STATUS Speed self tune START UP TUNING Speed self tune MONITOR Measurements Speed Speed in DRC [ ] Speed in rpm Speed in % I/O INPUT VARIABLES Ramp ref Ramp ref 1 Ramp ref 2 Speed ref 1 Speed ref 2 T current ref LIMITS Speed limits Speed amount Speed min/max Current limits Flux limits RAMP Acceleration Deceleration Quick stop
4/16

4.4 Menu structure
SPEED REGULAT Self tuning Spd zero logic Speed up Droop function Inertia/loss cp CURRENT REGULAT FLUX REGULATION Flux \ if curve REG PARAMETERS Percent values Speed regulator Flux regulator Voltage reg Base values Speed regulator Flux regulator Voltage reg In use values CONFIGURATION Speed fbk Drive type Dimension fact Face value fact Prog alarms Failure supply Undervoltage Overvoltage Prog. Alarm \ Heatsink Overtemp motor External fault Brake fault I2t overload Overcurrent Field loss Speed fbk loss Opt2 failure Bus loss Hw opt1 failure Enable seq err Set serial comm I/O CONFIG Analog outputs Analog output 1 Analog output 2 Analog output 3 Analog output 4 Analog inputs Analog input 1 Analog input 2 Analog input 3 Digital outputs Digital inputs Encoder inputs
4/17

4.4 Menu structure
ADD SPEED FUNCT Adaptive spd reg Speed control Speed zero FUNCTIONS Double setup Motor pot Jog function Multi speed fct Multi ramp fct Ramp 0 Acceleration 0 Deceleration 0 Ramp 1 Acceleration 1 Deceleration 1 Ramp 2 Acceleration 2 Deceleration 2 Ramp 3 Acceleration 3 Deceleration 3 Speed draw Overload contr Stop control Brake control I/n curve SPEC FUNCTIONS Test generator Links \ Link 1 Link 1 Link 2 Link 3 Link 4 Link 5 Link 6 Pad Parameters OPTIONS Option 1 Option 2 PID PID source PID references PI controls PD control PID target Diameter calc TORQUE WINDER Diam Calculatio Torque calculat Comp calculat Taper function Speed demand SERVICE
4/18

4.5 Commissioning
Warning: Conventions: positive speed negative speed positive torque negative torque
Carefully follow all safety instructions, warnings and technical specifications given above!
is the clockwise motor rotation speed seen from the output side of the drive shaft is the anti-clockwise motor rotation speed seen from the output side of the drive shaft is torque which produces clockwise motor rotation seen from the drive shaft side is torque which produces anti-clockwise motor rotation seen from the drive shaft side
4.5.1 Controlling assembly and auxiliary power
The following points need to be checked before the product is powered-on: - The cables and shieldings must be correctly connected - If the DC Drive current does not correspond to the motor nominal current, thermal protection relay should be used.. Warning! External power sources must not be connected to the DC drive output
Lock the DC drive (disconnect terminal 12) the following voltages should be present: - terminal 7 + 10V reference terminal 9 - terminal 8 - 10V reference terminal 9 - terminal 19 + 24 ... 30V reference terminal 18 Select the Actual spd (rpm) parameter on the DRIVE STATUS menu. With the DC drive locked, turn the motor clockwise (seen from the drive shaft side). The value displayed will be positive If the value does not change, or if false values are displayed, check mains power and encoder or tachogenerator cabling If the value displayed is negative, encoder or tachogenerator connections must be inverted: channel A+ to A- or B+ to B- for the encoder and inversion of the connection for the tachogenerator.
4.5.2 DC drive factory settings
Note!
Initially the DC drive has factory settings and is connected as per the diagram in chapter 3.1. The factory settings may be changed using the Load default parameter on the SPEC FUNCTIONS menu. Loading these settings means that all the modifications made by the user will be deleted. The exceptions to this rule are the Size selection, Tacho scale, and Speed offset settings. The speed feedback settings are not modified when the DC Drive is returned to factory settings. The factory settings allow the speed to be regulated via a cascade current regulator through an DC machine with separate power source, equipped with a tachogenerator. In this case, the de-energizing function is disabled. Regardless of the settings required, we recommend performing all the basic adjustments described below first of all, to avoid any possible errors.
4/19

4.5 Commissioning
The following settings should be entered with the DC drive locked. Enable drive = disabled (no power to terminal 12). Selection of mode of operation When the DC drive is only controlled from a terminal block, adjust the setting Main commands parameter = Terminals. When the keyboard is used, Main commands = Digital.
Save the settings Use the setting Save parameters on the START UP menu. Remember: To keep the changes to the settings even after the DC drive has been started and stopped, the settings need to be saved.
When using the keyboard, press ENT.
The default setting Main commands is selected in Digital mode, so the current regulator is able to perform self-tuning.
4/20

4.6 Start-up procedure: Start Up Menu
START UP
Short menu for starting the DC drive, self-tuning regulation I inductance and speed.
By following the list in the START UP menu, the DC drive may be set up to perform frequentlyused actions. Speed base value Nom flux curr Range of total speed, in tr/mn, corresponding to 10V over an analogue input Excitation regulator calibration, the value of which, when adjusted to the average of switch S14 or resistor RLA-LB , will be reported in this parameter Reducing excitation current speed to zero (field weakening) Enables ramp gradient to be adjusted (acceleration) Enables ramp gradient to be adjusted (deceleration).
4.6.1 Basic settings
Speed-0 f weak Acc delta ... Dec delta ...
Motor specifications (START UP / Motor data menu) All the data referring to the motors are entered in this sub-menu. Should it be necessary to self-tune the speed, these values should correspond to the specifications on the motor nameplate, because the motor torque constant is taken from there. Motor nom flux Flux reg mode Full load curr Rated excitation (field) current of the motor in A. Field control: constant or variable current . Rated motor armature current. The default value is the rated DC drive current. This current can be limited using the T current limit parameter. Maximum motor speed. Enter the value on the nameplate. Maximum output voltage. This is also the value which defines the start of the de-excitation (field weakening) stage if it has been selected. Speed as a % of Motor max speed where de-excitation (field weakening) starts, following default Speed fbk loss management.
Motor max speed Max out voltage
Flux weak speed
Note!
As with speed self-tuning, these specifications need to be adjusted in line with the motor nameplate. These features can only be modified once the self-tuning procedure is complete, when the user enters the desired values.
Limits (START UP / Limits menu) This sub-menu lists the speed, current and excitation limits used when they need to be different from the ones in the \Motor data sub-menu. T current limit Absolute limit of armature current as a % of Full load curr. The value of this limit depends on validation or otherwise of the Enable overload function. Adjustment of the maximum excitation current as a % of Motor nom flux. By default it is the value re-entered in the Motor nom flux parameter.
Flux current max
4/21

START UP
Flux current min Adjustment of the minimum excitation (field) current as a % of Motor nom flux. The default value is 5% of Motor nom flux. It is both the value of the low excitation current when the parameter Speed-0 f weak is enabled and the minimum limit of excitation current flux when no field weakening is applied. Sets the minimum speed of rotation. Absolute peak of reference speed; sets the maximum rotation speed.
Speed min amount Speed max amount
Speed feedback (START UP / Speed feedback menu) Speed fbk sel Selection of type of speed feedback: Tacho scale 2-pulse encoder Note! Enable fbk contr sinusoidal encoder (encoder 1), or incremental encoder (encoder 2), or tachogenerator, or armature voltage.
End adjustment coefficient for the tachogenerator. Number of pulses for each turn of the incremental encoder. Take care not to exceed a frequency of 150 KHz on encoder inputs! Enables coherence test on speed feedback This function requires Motor max speed, Max out voltage, Flux weak speed to be correctly set. Enables the test, recording the presence of signals A, B, Aneg, Bneg on incremental encoder. This test is activated only if Enable fbk contr is enabled.
Refresh enc 2
Alarms (START UP / Alarms menu) Under voltage Overcurrent thr Threshold of low voltage mains failure, taking into account whether the DC drive is unlocked. Threshold of excess current, which should be higher than T current limit.
Overload control (START UP / Overload control menu) Overload control allows the user to provide an overload higher than the rated current of the DC Drive armature current for short periods of time. It is used to provide the drive with a temporary excess torque or, for example, to allow particular load peaks on machines subjected to cyclical loads. Analogue inputs 1, 2, 3 (START UP / Analog inputs 1, 2, 3 menu) DCV-series DC drives offer the possibility of linking specific functions to three programmable analogue inputs, configured as differential inputs (terminals 1-2, 3-4, 5-6). By default, the input 1 (terminals 1 and 2) is connected to Ramp ref 1.
4/22

START UP
4.6.2 Basic adjustments to the DC drive
Note!
It is possible to dispense with self-adjustment if the control board or the control module are replaced as long as the parameters are saved using configuration software DCVCNF100. In any case, if the motor is replaced by a new one (even if it is identical), we strongly recommend that all self-tuning and calibrations be re-performed.
4.6.2.1. Self-tuning of the armature current regulator

This operation should be done the first time the DC drive is commissioned, or if the control board or the control module are replaced, or when a new motor is commissioned. The current regulator is automatically optimised via the R & L Search parameter. The armature resistanceand inductancevalues are saved to the memory as Arm resistance and Arm inductance in the CURRENT REGULAT menu. If necessary, the user can change these parameters manually. Should excitation not be supplied by the DC drive, switch the motor field supply voltage off. The internal excitation regulator of the DC drive is automatically locked during armature current regulator self-tuning, so the field wires do not need to be disconnected in this case. The user should ensure that, during optimisation, the drive does not start to turn even when there is no field (magnetic remnants, serial field, etc.). If necessary, block the drive shaft mechanically.
Initial conditions. - DC drive locked (no power to terminal 12) - The Main commands parameter (START UP or CONFIGURATION menus) should be set to Digital. - Prior to self-tuning, set the limit for the armature current (from 50% to 100% of Full load curr). - If necessary, disable the Overload control function during optimisation (Enable overload = Disabled). - Parameter R&L search in the START UP menu = Enabled - Close the line contactor - Prepare electrical unlocking of the DC drive (terminal 12) and enable it (terminal 13). - Unlock the DC drive by using the Enable drive parameter on the START UP menu. Note! If the Stop mode parameter is not OFF, press the START key on the keyboard. The self-tuning process begins. It may take several minutes. At the end of the self-tuning procedure, the DC drive is automatically disabled and the R&L search parameter on the START UP menu is configured as being = Disabled. Electrically lock the DC drive (no power to terminal 12) Adjust the Main commands parameter to the desired value. If wished, this overload control function can be enabled: (Enable overload = Enabled). Save the parameters. After booting up, the self-tuning procedure can be stopped through Enable drive = Disabled. The parameters adjusted prior to the optimisation procedure are, therefore, valid. Self-tuning cannot be performed if the DC drive is running.
Note!
4/23

START UP 4.6.2.2 Controlling armature current regulator performance using the E int [V] parameter.
During DC drive operation, the Current Regulator menu displays the Eint parameter, which measures internal current variations. This value should be close to zero, but the values which develop dynamically and are between 40 and +40 are also accepted. To consider the value displayed for this measurement as valid, the drive should have a load of at least 30%. If necessary, modify the Arm inductance parameter slightly (on the Current regulator menu) to perform fine tuning and take the Eint parameter to an acceptable value. - If the displayed value of Eint is positive, increase the value of Arm inductance. - If the displayed value of Eint is negative, reduce the value of Arm inductance.
4.6.2.3 Self-tuning the speed regulator

The self-tuning procedure identifies the total value of drive shaft inertia (kg*m2), the friction value in N*m and estimates the proportional and integral gains of the speed regulator. Danger! Warning! This procedure requires the motor drive shaft to rotate freely. During the selftuning adjustment phase take care with motor behaviour. This test is performed using the torque value adjusted in the Test T curr lim parameter. The torque reference is applied using a reference step (no ramp); mechanical transmission should be compatible with this operation.With the help of this setting, the user can modify the upper torque limit. In applications where the total system inertia value is very high, the value of the Test T curr lim parameter needs to be increased to avoid Time out gaps. The speed loop self-tuning process is not appropriate for DC drives used in applications such as elevators and lifting systems. The preliminary operations to be performed in order to reach a correct estimate of the torque constant Torque const and to conduct a correct self-tuning procedure, consist of entering the values on the motor nameplate for the following parameters: Initial conditions Motor max speed Fwd-Rev spd tune Flux weak speed Current limit Motor flux curr Max out voltage Equal to the maximum speed given on the motor nameplate. Choice of the direction or rotation of the shaft for selftuning. Speed in % of Motor max speed where field weakening starts. Equal to the value indicated on the motor nameplate. Equal to the value indicated on the motor nameplate. Equal to the value indicated on the motor nameplate.
Note !
4/24

START UP
These settings can be modified after the self-tuning procedure has been performed according to the requirements of the motor used, without modifying the Torque const value identified during the self-tuning procedure. Fix the drive shaft rotation direction: clockwise (FWD) or anti-clockwise (REV) using the FwdRev spd tune parameter. Set the torque limits to be used during the speed loop self-tuning procedure, using the Test T curr lim parameter. Select the START UP \ Speed self tune menu. Perform the procedure using the Start command. During this procedure, an acceleration test with the uppermost value of torque adjusted in the Test T curr lim parameter is performed, then a deceleration test with no motor command or any torque applied, until zero speed is reached. The threshold speed at which the test is performed is 33% of the weakest value set on the following parameters: - Speed base value - Speed max pos or Speed max neg depending on direction of rotation. This procedure will take a certain number of minutes, according to the inertia and friction values. Depending on the values of inertia and friction, the DC drive will calculate the speed regulator gains (Speed P and Speed I parameters). If certain manual adjustments are required (in case of vibration, etc.), they must be made in accordance with the integral gain value Speed I [%]. If the self-tuning procedure does not give satisfactory results, please refer to chapter 4.6.3 for the manual procedure Manual adjustment of regulators. At the end of the procedure, the new parameter values (Calc suffix) can be compared with the values prior to the self-tuning procedure by looking at the Self tuning menu. Values returned Test T curr lim Inertia Inertia Nw Friction Friction Nw Speed P Speed P Nw Speed I Speed I Nw Take val Value of the current torque limit applied during the selftuning procedure. Inertia value in kg*m2 (1 kg*m2 = 23.76 ib*ft2). New inertia value in kg*m2 identified during the self-tuning procedure. Value of friction in N*m (1 N*m = 0.738 ib*ft). New value of friction in N*m identified during the self-tuning procedure. Proportional gain of the speed regulator. New value of the proportional gain of the speed regulator. Integral gain of the speed regulator. New value of the integral gain of the speed regulator. Acquisition of the new values of the parameters after selftuning.
The new parameters can be enabled through the Take val command, after the DC drive has been locked. In this case, the values prior to the self-tuning procedure are deleted. This selftuning can be repeated, even if the values from the previous attempt have not been confirmed.
4/25

START UP
Note! The self-tuning does not permanently memorise the values calculated, which are lost if the DC drive is turned off. To memorise the values obtained, the parameters need to be saved.
Where extreme values are found for certain parameters, error messages may appear. Repeat the self-tuning procedure. If the error message does not disappear, take the default values and adjust the speed regulator manually (chapter 4.6.3 Manual adjustment of regulators). List of error messages during the self-tuning procedure General messages Drive disabled: Not ready: Power up terminal 12 (ENABLE) to a voltage = +24 V. Take val cannot be performed because the test has not been conducted correctly. Repeat the self-tuning procedure. The self-tuning procedure has not been achieved within the time given. Press ENT to confirm start of self-tuning test. The self-tuning test has been disabled by the user (the CANC key has been pressed. Select the CONFIGURATION menu and display the Main commands = digital parameter. Select the CONFIGURATION menu and display the Control mode = Local parameter.
Time out: Start ?: Tuning aborted: Set Main cmd=Dig: Set Ctrl=Local:
Error messages for measurements These messages may appear when extreme values have been detected for the parameters. It may be useful to repeat the self-tuning procedure when one of the following error messages appears. If the message does not disappear, the manual setting procedure must be performed. Over speed Drive stalled: Load applied: Increase the value of the Test T curr lim parameter and repeat Self-tuning. An excessively-high resistant torque value has been detected at zero speed. Self-tuning cannot be performed with this type of load. Decrease the value of the Test T curr lim parameter for Self-tuning. The friction value = zero or is lower than the regulator accuracy limit.
T curr too high:
Friction null:
4/26

START UP 4.6.2.4 Auto-tuning the excitation controller

Out vlt level %
Voltage regulator
Flux current max %
i/f Curve
Max out voltage
Flux current min %
Armature V Selection Constant current / Voltage control RxI
Flux reference
Flux regulator
Motor nom flux [A]
Nom flux curr [A]
Flux current (Flux I)
Figure 4.6.2.4.1: Functional diagram of excitation controller.
The default setting for DCV DC drive operation is for them to work without field weakening. The following settings should only be used when field weakening is required or when motor field excitation is not powered by the DC drives excitation regulator. All the adjustments described in this chapter should be performed with the DC drive locked (no power to terminal 12). Selection of mode of operation: - Direct field current: - With field weakening: Flux reg mode = Direct current Enable flux reg = Enabled Flux reg mode = Voltage control. Adjust maximum armature voltage in the CONFIGURATION menu using the Max out voltage parameter. Enable flux reg = Enabled Flux reg mode = External control Enable flux reg = Disabled.
- External excitation
Adjustment of rated excitation current - Adjust the rated excitation current for the motor using the Motor nom flux parameter. - When the excitation current of the motor is lower than the rated current of the excitation regulator, the current on the field converter can be adjusted using the S14 switch or the RLAresistance, as indicated in Chapter 2.3.3. LB Maximum/minimum value of the excitation current - Adjustment in the LIMITS / Flux limits menu using the Flux current max and Flux current min parameters, given as a % of Motor nom flux.
4/27

START UP
4.6.3. Manual adjustment of regulators
The adjustment of DCV Drive regulators requires certain pre-defined values. It is, therefore, normally possible to obtain satisfactory behaviour from the regulators. Adjustment of the armature current regulator should always be performed. When the adjustment meets requirements, there is no need to optimise the other regulators. The DC drive contains the following regulator circuits: - Armature current regulator. Self-tuning is achieved using the R&L search parameter - Speed regulator: available self-tuning procedure. - Field current regulator: can only be adjusted manually - Armature voltage regulator: can only be adjusted manually. The following paragraphs describe how to optimise the regulators manually, if necessary. To obtain step operations, the internal generator Test generator is used (SPEC FUNCTIONS menu). The objective is to obtain an optimal response to a step. As with the current, the response to a step can be measured directly. The analogue output, reported to the terminal block, shows a sample time of two milliseconds. Using the test generator This function provides signals in the form of a square wave with adjustable frequency and amplitude. These signals can be added to an offset which can also be adjusted. The Gen access parameter defines which PID regulator input the signal will act on. Chapter 5.15.1 Test generator describes how to implement the test generator.
4.6.3.1 Manual adjustment of the speed regulator.

DC drive locked = no power to terminal 12 Choose the following settings for the Test generator: - Gen access = Ramp ref - Gen frequency = 0.2 Hz - Gen amplitude = 10 % - Gen offset = 10 % Measures return on an analogue output. To this end, set the variable Actual Spd to one output and the variable Motor current to another (I/O CONFIG menu). Adjust the Acc delta speed parameter to the highest possible value and the Acc delta time parameter to 1 second in the START UP menu. Adjust the Speed P and Speed I parameters to 0.00 in the REG PARAMETERS / Speed regulator menu. Start the drive (voltage to terminal 12) and give the order to Start (voltage to terminal 13). Parameters available Speed P Speed I Prop filter Proportional gain of the speed regulator. Integral gain of the speed regulator. Time constant of the filter for the component P of the speed regulator
Increase Speed P until the overshoot is less than 4% with the lowest possible reaction time.
4/28

START UP
Increase Speed I until the overshoot is over 4 %. Reduce it until the value is slightly under 4%. Stop the drive and block it. Gen access = Not connected Save the parameters. When the Bypass function is enabled (Enable fbk bypas = Enabled) the DC drive is automatically switched to armature feedback until a speed feedback signal appears. Gains may be significantly different in armature feedback mode. The procedure described above for the optimisation of the speed regulator in this mode must be performed again. P (proportional) gain of the speed regulator is adjusted using the Speed P bypass parameter, whereas I (integral) gain is adjusted using Speed I bypass.
Note!
20.00 ms/DIV
20.00 ms/DIV
Figure 4.6.3.1.1: Speed P too weak. Rising: Actual spd, falling: Motor current.
Figure 4.6.3.1.2 Speed P too high. Rising: Actual spd, falling: Motor current.
20.00 ms/DIV
Figure 4.6.3.1.3: Speed I too high. Rising: Actual spd, falling: Motor current.
Figure 4.6.3.1.4: Speed P and Speed I are correctly adjusted. Rising: Actual spd, falling: Motor current.
20.00 ms/DIV
4/29

START UP 4.6.3.2 Manual tuning of excitation controller

Note! In most cases, A/C motors and those with separate excitation work at a direct field current (Flux reg mode = Direct current) In this case, the excitation regulator and the armature current regulator do not require optimisation.
The procedure described above refers to drives operating at constant torque and strength (mixed adjustment of armature and excitation). In these cases, first of all the excitation regulator needs to be configured to reflect the mode of operation chosen. Note! During the excitation regulator optimisation procedure no Start order will be accepted.
DC drive locked (no power to terminal 12) LIMITS / Flux limits menu: Flux current max = 100 % equalling the rated excitation current of the connected motor; Flux current min = 0 Parameters available Flux P Flux I Proportional gain, as a % of the excitation regulator Integral gain, as a % of the excitation regulator
Adjust the Flux I and Flux P parameters to 0.00 in the REG PARAMETERS / Flux regulator menu. Measure the excitation current on an analogue output. To this end, set the variable Flux current to one output and the variable Flux reference to another (I/O CONFIG menu). Select the FLUX REGULATION menu Enable flux reg = Enabled (standard) Flux reg mode = Voltage control Enable flux weak = Enabled Gen access = Flux reference and Gen amplitude = 70 % equalling the rated excitation current of the motor (this allows system deviation) Increase the value of the Flux P parameter until the excitation current overshoot (Flux current) is less than 4 %. Increase the value of Flux I until the overshoot is over 4 %. then reduce it until the value is slightly under 4%. Note! Because of the relatively high excitation time constant, the speed at which the current rises is limited. The time required for it to rise, when optimally setted, may be several hundred milliseconds. However, since the excitation regulator has a semi-controlled rectifier bridge (diodes and thyristors), the time it takes for the current to drop in the inducer circuit only depends on its time constant.
Gen access = Disconnected Enable flux weak = Disabled Adjust the Flux current min parameter to the desired value. Configure the analogue outputs according to the different requirements expressed. Save the parameters.
4/30

START UP
The following figures show a few examples of adjusting the excitation regulator
Figure 4.6.3.2.1: Excitation current oscillation. Non-optimal regulator behaviour. Rising: Flux reference, falling: Flux.
Figure 4.6.3.2.2: Field time constant too high. Low field current is too much a function of the field time constant. Adjustment has not affected it. Rising: Flux reference, falling: Flux.
Figure 4.6.3.2.3: increase of the excitation current without oscillation. Variation in comparison with Fig. 4.6.3.2.1: increase of Flux P from 2 to 10 %. Flux I = 5 % Rising: Flux reference, falling: Flux.
4.6.3.3 Manual tuning of the voltage loop in the excitation controller

In most cases, DC motors and those with separate excitation work at a constant field current (Flux reg mode = Constant current). In this case, the excitation regulator and the armature current regulator (loop) do not require optimisation. When field weakening, the voltage regulator keeps the armature voltage constant, even when the speed increases. The critical point for this regulator is at the start of field weakening. The aim, then, is to adjust the regulator in such a way that the armature voltage is extremely constant and only varies very slightly. Note!
Prior to optimising the voltage regulator, the other drive regulators should already have been adjusted.
4/31

START UP
Initial conditions. - Drive locked = no power to terminal 12 - Choose the following adjustments for the Test generator: - Gen access = Ramp ref - Gen frequency = 0.2 Hz - Gen amplitude = 10 % - Gen offset = Depending on de-excitation point. E.g.: Motor max speed= 2000 rpm (t/mn), the de-excitation commences at 1500 rpm. Gen offset = 75 % Measure the field current and the armature voltage on an analogue output. To this end, set the variable Flux current to one output and the variable Output voltage to another (see Input/Output programming). Start the DC drive with the Start command (voltage to terminals 12 and 13). Parameters available Voltage P Voltage I Proportional gain, as a % of the voltage regulator Integral gain, as a % of the voltage regulator
The P (proportional) and I (integral) gains of the voltage regulator can be modified from the REG PARAMETER \ Voltage regulator using the Voltage P and Voltage I parameters Controlling armature voltage. After a possible brief oscillation, the voltage should remain constant. Lock the DC drive Gen access = Not connected Save the parameters.
Figure 4.6.3.3.1: oscillations of the armature voltage. Voltage P = 10 %, Voltage I = 80 % Rising: Flux, falling: Output voltage.
Figure 4.6.3.3.2: gain too weak. Armature voltage increases Voltage P = 3 %, Voltage I = 5 % Rising: Flux, falling: Output voltage.
Figure 4.6.3.3.3: Excitation controller optimised: After a brief interval, the excitation current and the armature voltage remain constant. Voltage P=40% Voltage I=50% Rising: Flux, falling: Output voltage.
4/32

START UP
4.6.4 Advanced drive settings
4.6.4.1 Calibrating the If curve (FLUX REGULATION/Flux / if curve menu)

Calibrating this curve is designed to control, under reflux conditions, the actual flux of the motor and thus to control torque better. The figure below describes the relationship between flux and excitation current under standard conditions (curve A), or when the Flux /if curve function is selected (curve B). Note ! Adjusting the excitation regulator and the armature voltage should have been performed first, following the instructions given above, before commencing this setting.
The succession of stages for calibration is as follows: - Adjusting the excitation regulator - Calibrating the flux curve (Flux / if curve) - Adjusting the voltage loop in the excitation regulator
Flux current
100%
I field cnst 90 Curve A 50% Motor nom flux Curve B I field cnst 70
I field cnst 40
40% 50%
70%
90% 100%
Flux reference
Figure 4.6.4.1.1: flux/current conversion curve.
Calibration procedure: Make the flux / current curve linear, using the Reset flux / if command (FLUX REGULATION/Flux / If curve menu) Adjust the excitation current of the motor (data on nameplate) in the Motor nom Flux parameter (FLUX REGULATION menu) Adjust the armature voltage desired for the Max out voltage parameter (CONFIGURATION menu) and the relative % (100%) in the Out vlt level parameter (FLUX REGULATION menu) Adjust the excitation regulator in direct current mode: Flux reg mode = Direct current (FLUX REGULATION menu) Set Flux current max to 100% (FLUX REGULATION menu) Take the motor up to a speed where the armature voltage displayed in Armature voltage (MONITOR\Measurements menu) is the same as the value previously adjusted in Max out voltage
Determination of the point on the curve at 90% excitation reference (I field cnst 90) Via the Flux current max parameter, reduce the voltage displayed in Armature voltage, until reaching an armature voltage equal to 90% of Max out voltage. Report the measurement (in %) of the excitation current using the Flux current parameter (FLUX REGULATION menu) and enter it in the I field cnst 90 parameter (FLUX
4/33

START UP
REGULATION\Flux if curve menu). Determination of the point on the curve at 70% excitation reference (I field cnst 70) Proceed in the same way to bring the armature voltage to 70% of Max out voltage Report the corresponding excitation current (in %) and enter it in the I field cnst 70 parameter
Determination of the point on the curve at 40% excitation reference (I field cnst 40) Proceed in the same way to bring the armature voltage to 40% of Max out voltage Report the corresponding excitation current (in %) and enter it in the I field cnst 40 parameter Lock the DC drive. Enable the estimate of the new curve using the Set flux / if parameter (FLUX REGULATION menu). The operation may take a few seconds. Return the Flux current max value to 100%. Select the desired mode of operation for the excitation regulator (fixed excitation or field weakening). In the latter case, the field excitation voltage loop needs to be adjusted, as indicated above. Save the parameters. Changes to Max out voltage or Motor nom flux requires a new calibration of the curve.
Note!
4.6.4.2 Speed-up function (SPEED REGULATION\ Speed up menu)

Oscillations may occur during speed variations with loads. Such oscillations can be reduced by enabling the Speed-up function which acts on the DC drive speed regulator. The following figures show how this function affects performance.
Figure 4.6.4.2.1: Speed-up function disabled. Oscillations during speed variation caused by high inertia momentum. Rising: Actual speed, falling: motor current.
Figure 4.6.4.2.2: Speed-up function enabled. The same drive with a Speed-up function enabled. Rising: Actual speed, falling: motor current.
Parameters used in this example:
Speed up base Speed up gain Speed up filter
14 rpm/ms 50 % 20 ms
4/34

START UP 4.6.4.3 Speed zero logic (SPEED REGULATION \ Speed zero logic menu)
This function, whose default is disabled, determines how the DC drive will behave when the motor is stopped. It suppresses proportional and/or integral gain of the speed regulator when the reference and speed feedback are zero. Please refer to Chapter 5.7.3 for implementing this function.
4.6.4.4 Adaptive speed regulator (ADD SPEED FUNCT \ Adaptative speed reg menu)
The default for the adaptive speed regulator is disabled (Enable spd adap = Disabled) The gains defined and adjusted in this function replace these parameters in the REG PARAMETERS \ Speed regulator menu It should only be used if the speed regulator gains must be modified as a function of the speed (Select adap type = Speed) or based on a separate control (Select adap type = Adap reference). In this latter case, an analogue input of the parameter Adap reference is required to perform an external control of the proportional and integral gains of the speed regulator If Adap speed 1 and Adap speed 2 are entered, three different speed intervals are available with several gains. The values are expressed in % of Speed base value or the maximum value of Adap reference. When Select adap type = Speed, optimisation is performed as described for optimising speed regulator gains. However, the following points must be considered for this function. Using Gen offset to regulate a speed value at the start of the interval to be optimised but which is also outside the interval fixed using Adap joint XX. Amplitudes are regulated with Gen amplitude, so that speed remains within the range to be optimised. Optimisation should be performed separately for each range and the regulator parameters are defined for each speed range using Adap P gain XX and Adap I gain XX. After optimising the different phases, conduct a test on the whole range of speeds. When changing the value of Adap joint XX, certain temporary effects caused by changes to gain from one speed range to another may be reduced. By increasing the value of this parameter the transitory effects are attenuated even further. Save the parameters. When Select adap type = Adap reference: optimisation is system-dependent. When speed zero logic is enabled, the changes made are enabled when the motor is stopped. Please refer to Chapter 5.13.2 for how to implement this function.
Note!
4/35
Note:
4/36
5 - Main functions
General information
DCV-series DC drives have certain functions which need to be set and performed, to adapt them to the requirements of the application for which they are to be used. The DC drive can be controlled in the following ways: through the terminal block through the keyboard through an RS 485-series interface through a CANopen bus link (optional).
The choice of how to control it can be made with the Main commands and Control mode parameters in the CONFIGURATION menu The DCVCNF100 configuration software (optional) makes it easy to set the parameters, control and put the DC drive to work thanks to its intuitive graphic interface and numerous inbuilt tools: - unaligned control terminal - dynamic visualisation of variables - graphic setting of regulators and functions, input/output assignment - trend curves - saving and editing the regulator files - online contextual help - controls up to 32 DC drives on a Modbus network The software works on a Windows 95 or higher environment.
DCV-series DC drives allow reference values for the ramp and the speed regulator to be set in different units of measurement. - in Speed base value % - in a unit of measurement (dimension) that the user can define and enter in the desired scale using the Dimension fact of the CONFIGURATION menu, e.g. speed in m/s. The two systems of units are linked, i.e. the modification of one system will cause the modification of the other.
The existence of a password (Pword 1), prevents the DC drive being used by unauthorised persons. Password 2 (Pword 2) is reserved for Schneider Electric and grants access to the Service menu which cannot be accessed by the user. The modified parameters must be saved, otherwise the previous parameters will be reloaded when the DC drive is turned on again.
Remember!
5/1
5 - Main functions
General information
Parameter legend:
1
Parameter
2
No.
3
Format min
4
Value max Factory
5
Standard Configurat.
6
Keyp.
7
RS
8
Term
9
D/P
Access via
Fast stop
316 No Fast Stop Fast Stop
U16
c a b
Term. 13 +1530 V 0V
R/W 1 0 R/W R/W 1 0
14 H L IA, QA 12 H L
R/W 1 0 R/W R/W 1 0
DRIVE STATUS 44 314 Enabled Disabled I16 U16 -2 * P45 0 +2 * P45 1 0 Disabled (0) Term. 12 +1530 V 0V Yes Yes
Ramp ref 1 [FF] Enable drive
a b c 1 2
White text on a black background Black text on a white background Parts on a grey background
Menu/sub-menu. Accessible functions. Function not accessible from the keyboard. The corresponding parameter status only is displayed. Dimension based on the factor function. Parameter number (decimal). The value 2000H (=decimal 8192) must be added to the number given in column N. to obtain the parameter address using RS485 or CANopen. Internal parameter format: I = Integer (e.g.: I 16 = 16 bit integer). U= No polarity (e.g.: U32 = 32 bit, no polarity). Float = Floating value.
[FF] in the Parameter column N column : (Number)
Format column:
4 5 6 7
Value columns
Minimum, maximum and factory-set values. S= the value depends on the size of the product.
Standard Configuration column: Keyboard column :
Factory assignation or possibility of assignment. Yes = Parameter accessible via keyboard.
RS Column (RS485/Bus/DCVS5W04) Parameter accessible via RS485 link, CANopen DCVS5Z27 board or via the DCVS5W04 applications development and programming board in manual communications mode Low priority. The figures indicate the value to be sent during communication to enable the parameter.
5/2
5 - Main functions
General information
8 9
Terminal (Terminals) column
Parameters which might be assigned to one of the analogue input/output terminals or digital ones. Parameter available via asynchronous communication (see DCVS5W04) and/or Process Data Channel /PDC Manual). DCVS5W04, in asynchronous communication mode = Low priority PDC = High priority When using a bus link, parameters between [min = 0; max = 1] can be allocated to any virtual digital input (if there is an access code W ) and/or virtual digital output (if there is an access code R). The figures indicate the value to be sent during communication to enable the parameter.
D/P Column (DCVS5W04/PDC)
IA, QA, ID, QD in the Terminal column This gives access to the function through a programmable analogue or digital input or output. IA = analogue input QA = analogue output ID = Digital input QD = Digital output The figure which appears is the one through which the terminal is allocated. H, L in the Terminal column R/W/Z/C Signal level (H=Status 1, L=Status 0) allowing the function to be enabled. Can be accessed via the serial link, CANopen or via the applications development and programming board in manual communications or asynchoronous mode: R = Read, W = Write, Z= writing is only possible if the function is not enabled. C= command parameter (entering a value causes a command to be executed). X Pyy The value of the parameter may be min/max X times the value of parameter yy.
5/3
5 - Main functions
General information
Menu structure:
Function Chap Page
DRIVE STATUS START UP TUNING MONITOR INPUT VARIABLES LIMITS RAMP SPEED REGULAT CURRENT REGULAT FLUX REGULATION REG PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION I/O CONFIGURATION ADD SPEED FUNCT FUNCTIONS SPEC FUNCTIONS OPTIONS SERVICE
Basic displays and reference Short menu for starting the DC drive, self-tuning, armature I regul. and speed Speed regulator adjustment parameters, Iexcitation Uarmature Measurements, viewing references, speeds, voltage, current, I/O Ramp reference, speed reference, current reference Speed limits, current limits, excitation current limits Acceleration, deceleration, fast stop, S-ramp, ramp freezing Functions of the speed reg., speed zero logic, self-tuning, derivation, equalising Armature current regulator function Excitation regulator, flux/if curve functions. Adjustment of speed, excitation current, armature voltage regulators Mode of operation, return type, scaling, default allocation, communication, password Allocation of digital, analogue, encoder inputs/outputs Re-starting discharge, variable gains, speed thresholds Motorised Pot, jog, multi-speed, multi-ramp, sliding, overload control, stop modes, limitation I armature depending on speed Test generator, saving, factory settings, defaults, signal adaptation, words Vertical movement, double conf. PID, wind/unwind Reserved
5.2 4.6 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 5.10
9 21 9 10 14 21 26 31 39 41 45
5.11 5.12 5.13
47 65 81
5.14 5.15 5.16
87 114 124
5/4
5 - Main functions
5.1 DC drive validations
The following electrical validations are also required, whatever the DC drive command mode (terminal block/keyboard/serial link).
External fault
Enable drive
Fast stop
COM ID
+ 24 V
0 V 24
Start
19
18
16
12
13
14
15
19
18
16
12
13
Start
Fast stop
14
15
GND
Q ...
Q ...
Q ...
SPS (PLC)
Figure 5.1.1: DC drive validations via dry contacts or auto-outputs.
Control inputs: +15 ... 30 V. The inputs are protected against reverse polarities The reference point for validation inputs is terminal 16. When one uses an operator keyboard or a serial link (Mains Command = Digital) the control inputs and the corresponding commands on the keyboard/serial link are required. If a control input is reset to zero, restarting in this command mode can only be done if the input is reset to status 1.
There are four types of validation signal which have a different effect on the behaviour of the DCV DC drive. - Enable drive - Start - Fast stop Unlocks the DC drive Starts the DC drive Immediately resets the speed reference to zero, electrical braking according to the ramp defined by QStp delta speed [FF] and QStp delta time [s]. External fault, on which action the DC drive can be configured (default: lock).
- External fault
Q ...
External fault
Enable drive
0 V 24
COM ID
+ 24 V
5/5
5 - Main functions
5.1.1 Unlock DC drive (enable drive)
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
DRIVE STATUS
Enable drive Enabled Disabled
314
U16
Disabled (0)
Term. 12 +1530 V 0V
Yes
R/W 1 0
12 H L
R/W 1 0
This parameter, if disabled, locks the bridge pulses, removes the output voltage, and cancels any input command. Resetting the input to zero will have the same affect. In keyboard operations, the command Enable drive is available on the DRIVE STATUS, START UP , TUNING menu and on the MONITOR menu. When the Enable drive parameter is used via the keyboard (Mains command = digital) voltage needs to be applied to terminal 12. When the Main command parameter is adjusted to Terminals, Enable drive becomes a readonly parameter.
5.1.2 Start / Stop

Parameter No. Format min Value max Factory Standard Configurat. Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
DRIVE STATUS
Start/Stop Start Stop
315
U16
Stop (0)
Term. 13 +1530 V 0V
Yes
R/W 1 0
13 H L
R/W 1 0
When Main commands is set to digital, the Start/Stop parameter is used to start the DC drive and the STOP key on the keyboard is enabled to stop the DC drive. When Main commands is set to terminals, Start/stop becomes a read-only parameter. Note! Apart from the Start command, the following signals are required to make the DC drive operate: Enable drive Fast stop External fault
5/6
5 - Main functions
The behaviour of the DC drive, once the Start command has been enabled or disabled, depends on the parameters in place at the time: When using the ramp (Enable ramp = Enabled and Enable spd reg = Enabled) the DC drive accelerates in line with the adjusted ramp until the required speed is reached. If the Start command is disabled, the DC drive decelerates, as per the defined ramp. If the Start command is selected again during deceleration, the DC drive starts to accelerate again until the required speed is reached. If the value Speed ref 1 is directly controlled by the speed controller without using the ramp (Enable ramp = disabled and Enable spd reg = enabled), the DC drive accelerates to the required speed on the current limiter, as soon as the Start command is activated. When the Start command is de-activated, the value Speed ref 1 is immediately set to zero, deceleration occurs on current limitation on the DCV104. When torque is set to (Enable spd reg = Disabled) the Start command enables the torque reference (T current ref 1) or disables it after having disabled the Start command. The Start command does not affect the correction value Speed ref 2 (with speed adjustment) or Torque ref 2 (with torque setting).
The Start command is not required for Jog operating mode. If the Start and Jog + or Jog - commands are given simultaneously, the Start command will have priority. The status of the Start parameter is displayed under DRIVE STATUS and in the MONITOR menu.
5.1.3 Fast stop
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Fast stop No Fast Stop Fast Stop
316
U16
Term. 13 +1530 V 0V
R/W 1 0
14 H L
R/W 1 0
Note!
This function cannot be executed from the keyboard. Fast stop is used in emergency or dangerous situations to stop the drive as quickly as possible by electrically braking with the ramp adjusted using the Qstp delta speed and Qstp delta time parameters, providing that the DC drive is a 4quadrant type (DCV104).
Application:
When the motor is stopped, the DC drive is enabled and torque is generated. The Start or Enable drive command needs to be disabled for it to be locked. How the DC drive behaves after the Fast stop command will depend on the operating mode selected: Control to the terminal block (Main commands = Terminals): The DC drive brakes if terminal 14 is disabled. When this terminal goes over to status 1, the DC drive re-accelerates automatically to the reference value required (pre-requisite: the other validation commands are still enabled). Operation via the serial link using the commands given via the terminals (Main commands = Digital): The DC drive brakes until it stops. When terminal 14 goes to status 1, there is no automatic startup. The Start command must be used to re-start. If the Fast stop command is given via the serial interface and terminal 14 remains enabled, fast stop is executed until the DC drive stops. The Start command needs to be enabled to re-start the DC drive.
5/7
5 - Main functions
5.1.4 Quick stop

Keyp. RS Term D/P
Quick stop 343 No Quick stop Quick stop
U16
R/W 1 0
Note!
This function can only be executed via the serial link or by CANopen communication. Quick stop is used in emergency or dangerous situations to stop the drive as quickly as possible by electrically braking with the ramp adjusted using the parameters Qstp delta speed and Qstp delta time, providing that the DC drive is a 4-quadrant type (DCV104).
Application:
In comparison with the Fast stop, mode, when the motor is stopped, the DC drive locks and provides no more torque. The Start command needs to be enabled to re-start the DC drive.
5.1.5 External fault
The External fault command allows the user to associate processing of an external wired fault. Example of how it is used A pressure switch, which opens once a top pressure has been reached, causes the DC drive to go into fault mode, displaying the message External fault. Whatever the DC drive control mode, the signal always needs to be enabled for the DC drive to work. If an external fault arises, the DC drive will behave in accordance with the configuration entered under Programming Alarms.
5/8
5 - Main functions
5.2 Introduction to functions
The previous chapters referred to the different modes of controlling the DC drive and how to perform the initial calibrations on the adjustment loops. This chapter describes the main functions of the DC drive (and how to set them).
DRIVE STATUS
Basic displays and reference

This is the first menu displayed on the keyboard each time the DC drive is turned on. It is used to read the basic parameters of the DC drive prior to commissioning and also to display the main speed reference Ramp ref 1 for ramp input.
TUNING
Speed regulator, Iexcitation Uarmature adjustment parameters

This menu can be used after the first commissioning to repeat the self-tuning procedure of the speed and current regulators and for manual adjustment of the main regulator adjustment loops.
5/9
5 - Main functions
5.3 Monitor
MONITOR
Parameter No.
Measurements, viewing references, speeds, voltage, current, I/O

Format min Value max Factory Standard Configurat. Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
MONITOR Enable drive Enabled Disabled Start/Stop Start Stop Ramp ref (d) Ramp output (d) Speed ref (d) Actual spd (d) F act spd (d) Act spd filter [s] Ramp ref (rpm) Ramp outp (rpm) Speed ref (rpm) Actual spd (rpm) Enc 1 speed (rpm) Enc 2 speed (rpm) F act spd (rpm) Act spd filter [s] Ramp ref (%) Ramp output (%) Speed ref (%) Actual spd (%) Mains voltage [V] Mains frequency [Hz] Output power [Kw] Output voltage [V] Motor current [%] F T curr (%) T curr filter [s] T current ref [%] Flux reference [%] Flux current [%] Flux current (A) Digital I/Q Dig input term Dig input term 1 Dig input term 2 Dig input term 3 Dig input term 4 Dig input term 5 Dig input term 6 Dig input term 7 Dig input term 8 Dig input term 9 Dig input term 10 Dig input term 11 Dig input term 12 Dig input term 15 Dig input term 16 Dig output term Virtual dig inp Virtual dig out 109 112 115 119 925 923 110 113 118 122 427 420 924 923 111 114 117 121 466 588 1052 233 199 928 926 41 500 234 351 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 Float I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 Float Float Float Float Float U16 Float Float Float ** I16 I16 Float I16 Float Float * Float 315 U16 0 1 314 U16 0 1 Disabled (0) Stop Term. 12 +1530 V 0V Term. 13 +1530 V 0V \ Speed in DRC [ ] (A) (A) (A) rpm Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes R R R R R R R R/W R R R R R R R R R R R/W R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R QA QA QA QA R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R Yes R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R R R R R R/W 12 H L 13 H L R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R R R R R -
Yes
(0) MONITOR \ Measurements \ Speed -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 0.001 MONITOR \
+32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 1.000 0.100 Measurements \ Speed \ Speed in
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
-32768 -32768 -32768 -8192 -8192 -8192 -32768 0.001 MONITOR \ -200.0 -200.0 -200.0 -200.0 0 0.0 0.01 0 -250 -500 0.001 -200 0.0 0.0 0.1
+32767 (A) +32767 (A) +32767 (A) +8192 +8192 +8192 +32767 (A) 1.000 0.100 Measurements \ Speed \ Speed in % (A) (A)
QA QA QA QA QA QA QA -
+ 200.0 + 200.0 + 200.0 + 200.0 MONITOR \ Measurements 999 70.0 9999.99 999 250 +500 0.250 +200 100.0 100.0 99.9 0.100 S -
(A)
(A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A)
MONITOR \ I/O 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 579 580 581 582 583 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 65535 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 65535 65535 65535
(A) = This parameter may be assigned to a programmable analogue output.
5/10
5 - Main functions
5.3 Monitor
MONITOR
The MONITOR menu shows all the analog reference values for the current and the real values, and the status of digital inputs/outputs. The values referring to speed are given in tr/mn, as a % (referring to Speed base value) and in the dimension specified for the factor function. Enable drive When the DC drive is controlled via the keyboard, it is enabled via the Enable drive parameter. Terminal 12 also needs to be enabled. The Start command is required to start the drive. Enabled DC drive unlocked Disabled DC drive locked Whether the DC drive is Running or Stopped. Total ramp input reference value in the units specified by the factor function. Total ramp input reference value in tr/mn. Total ramp input reference value as a % of Speed base value. Ramp output, in the units specified by the factor function. Ramp output in tr/mn. Ramp output as a % of Speed base value. Total analog reference value for the speed in the units specified by the factor function. Total analog reference value for the speed in tr/mn. Speed analog reference value as a % of Speed base value. Actual speed, in the units specified by the factor function. Actual speed in tr/mn. Actual speed as a % of Speed base value. Filtered value of actual speed in the units specified by the factor function. Filtered value of actual speed in tr/mn. Time constant of the first order of the bottom-line over actual Speed. Actual speed measured by encoder 2. This parameter is only accessible when Speed fbk sel = encoder 2. Mains voltage in V. Mains frequency in Hz. Output power in kW. Armature voltage in Volts. Armature current as a % of Full load curr. Filtered value as a % of Torque current. Bottom-line filter of the first order on Torque current parameter. Total current analog reference value as a % of Full load current.
Start/Stop Ramp ref (d) Ramp ref (tr/mn) Ramp ref (%) Ramp output (d) Ramp outp (tr/mn) Ramp output (%) Speed ref (d) Speed ref (tr/mn) Speed ref (%) Actual spd (d) Actual spd (tr/mn) Actual spd (%) F act spd (d) F act spd (tr/mn) Act spd filter Enc 2 speed (rpm) Mains voltage Mains frequency Output power Output voltage Motor current F T curr (%) T curr filter T current ref
5/11
5 - Main functions
5.3 Monitor
MONITOR
Flux reference Flux current Flux current (A) Digital I/O Field excitation current reference as a % of Motor nom flux. Field excitation current as a % of Motor nom flux. Field excitation current expressed in amperes. Displays digital input/output values of the DC drive and the DCVS5V62 board. Display: I 12345678ESF Q 12345678 The inputs and outputs displayed are the ones which are enabled. E = Enable drive (terminal 12) S = Start (terminal 13) F = Fast stop (terminal 14) When a serial link or CANopen is used, the status of digital inputs/ outputs can be read using the parameters Dig input term and Dig output term. Dig input term Status of digital inputs of the product and the optional DCVS5V62 board to be read via the serial link or CANopen. The information is contained in a word where each bit is 1 and if there is any voltage to the corresponding terminal.
Bit n. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 inputs terminal 21 (digital input 1) terminal 22 (digital input 2) terminal 23 (digital input 3) terminal 24 (digital input 4) DCVS5V62, terminal 11 (digital input 5) DCVS5V62, terminal 12 (digital input 6) DCVS5V62, terminal 13 (digital input 7) DCVS5V62, terminal 14 (digital input 8)
T6035f-en
Bit n. 8 9 10
control inputs terminal 12 (Enable drive) terminal 13 (Start) terminal 14 (Fast stop)
Dig input term 1* Dig input term 2* Dig input term 3* Dig input term 4* Dig input term 5* Dig input term 6* Dig input term 7* Dig input term 8* Dig input term 9* Dig input term 10* Dig input term 11* Dig input term 12*
Status of digital 1 input (terminal 31) Status of digital 2 input (terminal 32) Status of digital 3 input (terminal 33) Status of digital 4 input (terminal 34) Status of digital 5 input (terminal 11, DCVS5V62 board) Status of digital 6 input (terminal 12, DCVS6V62 board) Status of digital 7 input (terminal 13, DCVS7V62 board) Status of digital 8 input (terminal 14, DCVS8V62 board) Status of digital input terminal 12 (Enable drive) Status of digital input terminal 13 (Start) Status of digital input terminal 14 (Fast stop) Not used
5/12
5 - Main functions
5.3 Monitor
MONITOR
Dig input term 13* Dig input term 14* Dig input term 15* Dig input term 16* Dig output Not used Not used Not used Not used Status of digital outputs on the product and the optional DCVS5V62 board to be read via the serial link or CANopen. The information is contained in a word where each bit is 1 if the corresponding terminal is enabled
Bit n. 0 1 2 3 outputs terminal 26 (digital output 1) terminal 27 (digital output 2) terminal 28 (digital output 3) terminal 29 (digital output 4) Bit n. 4 5 6 7 outputs DCVS5V62, terminal 6 (digital output 5) DCVS5V62, terminal 7 (digital output 6) DCVS5V62, terminal 8 (digital output 7) DCVS5V62, terminal 9 (digital output 8)
T6040f-en
Virtual dig inp Virtual dig out
Status of virtual digital inputs ** Status of virtual digital outputs **
* Available only via the serial link or CANopen. ** Virtual inputs/outputs are only used in conjunction with a bus interface, to provide faster communications. For further details, please consult the bus interface manual.
5/13
5 - Main functions
5.4 Variable inputs
VARIABLE INPUTS
Ramp reference, speed reference, current reference

DCV-series DC drives allow ramp input reference values for the ramp and the speed regulator to be set in different dimensions: - as a % of Speed base value - in a unit which the user may define using the factor function, e.g. speed m/s. The default value for the unit is tr/mn. The two systems of units are linked, i.e. the modification of one system will cause the modification of the other. E.g.: A motor at a maximum speed of 1500 rpm. This is 100% and at the same time the value defined by the user is 10,000 bottles/hour (see 5.11.6). Changing the analog reference value to 50% will automatically change the other value to 5,000 bottles/hour. The table below shows the interaction between the different analog reference values. If changes are made, the other parameters are automatically overwritten.
Parameter with the same value Ramp ref 1 Ramp ref 1 (%) Ramp ref 2 Ramp ref 2 (%) Speed ref 1 Speed ref 1 (%) Speed ref 2 Speed ref 2 (%) N. 44 47 48 49 42 337 43 338 Dimensions according to function factor % according to function factor % according to function factor % according to function factor %
T6045f-en
5/14
5 - Main functions
5.4 Variable inputs
VARIABLE INPUTS
5.4.1 Ramp references (Ramp ref)

Parameter No. Format min Value max Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Factory
INPUT VARIABLES \ Ramp ref \ Ramp ref 1 Ramp ref 1 Ramp ref 1 (%) 44 47 I16 Float -2 * P45 -200.0 +2 * P45 +200.0 0 0 Analog inp.1 (Terminals 1+2) (B) (B) Yes Yes R/W R/W IA, QA R/W -
INPUT VARIABLES \ Ramp ref \ Ramp ref 2 Ramp ref 2 Ramp ref 2 (%) 48 49 I16 Float -2 * P45 -200.0 +2 * P45 +200.0 0 0 Yes Yes R/W R/W IA, QA R/W -
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
MONITOR \ Measurements \ Speed \ Speed in DRC [ ] Ramp ref (d) Ramp output (d) Speed ref (d) Actual spd (d) F act spd (d) Act spd filter [s] Ramp ref (rpm) Ramp outp (rpm) Speed ref (rpm) Actual spd (rpm) Enc 1 speed (rpm) Enc 2 speed (rpm) F act spd (rpm) Act spd filter [s] Ramp ref (%) Ramp output (%) Speed ref (%) Actual spd (%) 109 112 115 119 925 923 110 113 118 122 427 420 924 923 111 114 117 121 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 Float I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 Float Float Float Float Float -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 0.001 MONITOR \ -32768 -32768 -32768 -8192 -8192 -8192 -32768 0.001 MONITOR -200.0 -200.0 -200.0 -200.0 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 1.000 0.100 Measurements \ Speed \ Speed in (A) (A) (A) rpm Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes R R R R R R R R/W R R R R QA QA QA QA R R R R R R R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes R R R R R R/W R R R R R -
+32767 (A) +32767 (A) +32767 (A) +8192 +8192 +8192 +32767 (A) 1.000 0.100 \ Measurements \ Speed \ Speed in % + + + + 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 (A) (A)
QA -
(A) = This parameter may be assigned to a programmable analogue output. (B) = This parameter may be assigned to another analogue input. P .45 = Speed base value. Must not exceed 8192.
The ramp input reference value gives the speed the drive must attain, after the acceleration stage. Changes to the ramp input reference value are therefore transferred to the ramp. As regards 4-quadrant DC drives (DCV104), the direction of rotation is determined by the polarity (+/-) of the reference. Note! Two-quadrant DCV94 DC drives only accept positive analog reference values. Negative values are disregarded!
5/15
5 - Main functions
5.4 Variable inputs
VARIABLE INPUTS
Min Speed Limit
Speed limited Speed Speed min amount 0 rpm Ramp ref 1 0 rpm Speed min pos 0 rpm Enab multi spd F Enab motor pot S + Speed min neg 0 rpm Ramp ref 2 0 rpm Dig input term 11 + 0 Speed Ramp ref (d) Quick stop COMMAND F t Speed t
Zero + T
In=0
Ramp Reference
Zero T
Out=0 Ramp output (d)
Ramp in = 0
Ramp out = 0
Ramp ref 1
t Ramp ref 2 7 Multi speed function Motor potentiometer function
JOG function + Jog + Ramp input Jog Jog selection Speed input
Figure 5.4.1.1: Ramp references
Ramp ref 1 Ramp ref 1 (%) Ramp ref 2 Ramp ref 2 (%) Ramp ref (tr/mn) Ramp ref (d) Ramp ref (%)
1st ramp input reference. The value to be entered depends on the factor function. 1st ramp input reference value as a % of Speed base value. 2nd ramp input reference. The value to be entered depends on the factor function. 2nd ramp input reference as a % of Speed base value. Total ramp input reference value for the ramp in tr/mn. Total ramp input reference value in the dimension specified by the factor function. Total ramp input reference value as a % of Speed base value.
The total ramp input reference value Ramp ref is the sum of Ramp ref 1 and Ramp ref 2. Example 1: Example 2: Ramp ref 1 = + 50 % Ramp ref 2 = + 30 % Ramp ref = 50 % + 30 % = 80 % Ramp ref 1 = + 40 % Ramp ref 2 = - 60 % Ramp ref = 40% - 60% = -20%
The signals 0 ... 10 V, 0 ... 20 mA- and 4 ... 20 mA can be used as references. Single polarity current references can only be used with 2-quadrant DC drives. Ramp ref (tr/mn), Ramp ref (d) and Ramp ref (%) are affected by minimal speed limitations. These are directly applied to Ramp ref 1, and the motorised potentiometer references and Multispeed references.
5/16
5 - Main functions
5.4 Variable inputs
VARIABLE INPUTS
5.4.2 Speed reference (Speed ref)

Parameter No. Format min Value max Standard Configurat. Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Factory
INPUT VARIABLES \ Speed ref \ Speed ref 1 Speed ref 1 Speed ref 1 (%) Speed ref 2 Speed Ref 2 (%)
Parameter
42 378 43 379
No.
I16 Float I16 Float

Format
-2 * P45 -200.0 -2 * P45 -200.0
+2 * P45 +200.0 +2 * P45 +200.0

Value max
0 0 0 0
Ramp output (C)
Yes Yes
R/W R/W R/W R/W
IA, QA IA, QA -
R/W R/W -
INPUT VARIABLES \ Speed ref \ Speed ref 2 (C) Yes Yes

Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
min
Factory
MONITOR \ Measurements \ Speed \ Speed in DRC [ ] Ramp ref (d) Ramp output (d) Speed ref (d) Actual spd (d) F act spd (d) Act spd filter [s] Ramp ref (rpm) Ramp outp (rpm) Speed ref (rpm) Actual spd (rpm) Enc 1 speed (rpm) Enc 2 speed (rpm) F act spd (rpm) Act spd filter [s] Ramp ref (%) Ramp output (%) Speed ref (%) Actual spd (%) 109 112 115 119 925 923 110 113 118 122 427 420 924 923 111 114 117 121 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 Float I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 Float Float Float Float Float -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 0.001 MONITOR \ -32768 -32768 -32768 -8192 -8192 -8192 -32768 0.001 MONITOR -200.0 -200.0 -200.0 -200.0 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 1.000 0.100 Measurements \ Speed \ Speed in (A) (A) (A) rpm Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes R R R R R R R R/W R R R R QA QA QA QA R R R R R R R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes R R R R R R/W R R R R R -
+32767 (A) +32767 (A) +32767 (A) +8192 +8192 +8192 +32767 (A) 1.000 0.100 \ Measurements \ Speed \ Speed in % + + + + 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 (A) (A)
QA -
(A) = This parameter may be assigned to a programmable analogue output. (C) = This parameter may be assigned to a programmable analogue input. P .45 = Speed base value. Must not exceed 8192.
The speed reference value defines the required speed for the drive. The drive responds directly to the progression of the reference value, except where available torque is insufficient, when the DC drive is working in current limitation mode. The speed reference determines the speed of the motor, whereas the +/- signs determine the direction of rotation. Note! Two-quadrant DCV94 DC drives only accept positive reference values. Negative values are disregarded!
5/17
5 - Main functions
5.4 Variable inputs
VARIABLE INPUTS
MAX Speed Limits
Speed limited
Speed ref 2 0 rpm
Speed max amount 1750 rpm Speed max pos 1750 rpm
T current ref
From Speed Reference generation

Spd draw out (d)
Speed ref (d)
Speed Regulator
Current Regulator
Enable spd reg
Motor current
+ +
+ T
+ +
S
To Motor Control
Speed max neg 1750 rpm T current ref 1 0 % T current ref 2 Actual spd (d) Speed reg output 0 %
Speed Feedback Encoder 1

Enc 1 speed Encoder 1 Speed fbk sel
Encoder 2
Enc 2 speed
Speed fbk sel Encoder 2
Droop compensation + Droop gain 0 % T current ref
Load comp 0 %
Actual speed Actual spd (d)
Speed fbk sel Tacho
Output voltage Output voltage
Speed fbk sel Armature
Figure 5.4.2.1: Speed reference
Speed ref 1 Speed ref 1 (%) Speed ref 2 Speed ref 2 (%) Speed ref (rpm) Speed ref (d) Speed ref (%)
1st speed reference value. The value to be entered depends on the factor function. 1st. speed reference value as a % of Speed base value. 2nd. speed reference value. The value to be entered depends on the factor function. 2nd. speed reference value as a % of Speed base value. Total reference value for the speed in rpm. Total reference value in the size specified by the factor function. Total reference value as a % of Speed base value.
The total speed reference value is the sum of Speed ref 1 and Speed ref 2. The signals 0 ... 10 V, 0 ... 20 mA- and 4 ... 20 mA can be used as references. Single polarity current references can only be used with 2-quadrant DC drives. If the ramp is selected, (Enable ramp parameter = Enabled), Speed ref 1 input value is automatically linked to ramp output.
5/18
5 - Main functions
5.4 Variable inputs
VARIABLE INPUTS
5.4.3 Torque reference (T current ref)

Keyp. RS Term D/P
INPUT VARIABLES \ T current ref T current ref 1 [%] 39 I16 -200 +200 0 Speed regulator output (C) (C) Yes R/W IA, QA R/W
T current ref 2 [%]
40
I16
-200
+200
Yes
R/W
IA, QA
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
CURRENT REGULAT T current ref [%] Motor current [%] Arm resistance [ ] Arm inductance [mH] Current scale E int [V] R&L search ON OFF Zero torque Not active Active 41 199 453 454 1365 587 452 I16 I16 Float Float Float I16 U16 -200 -250 S S 0.3 -80 0 +200 250 S S 2.0 +80 1 0.500 4.00 1 OFF (0) 353 U16 0 1 Not active (1) (E) Yes (A) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes R R R/W R/W R/W R R/Z 1 0 R/W 1 0 QA QA QA R R -
(A)
ID H L
R/W
(A) = This parameter may be assigned to a programmable analogue output. (C) = This parameter may be assigned to a programmable analogue input.
The current reference value is proportional to the motor armature current and determines torque. The polarity (+/-) determines torque direction. In most applications, T current Ref 1 comes from speed controller output. T current ref 2 can also be used as a correction value.
T current ref Curr limit state
T current lim + 136 % Torque current regulator From Speed regulator Enable spd reg T + T current lim 136 % T current ref 1 0 % T current ref 2 0 % + S To Motor Control
Figure 5.4.3.1: Torque reference.
5/19
5 - Main functions
5.4 Variable inputs
VARIABLE INPUTS
T current ref 1 1st. Reference value as a % of Full load curr. The maximum value depends on the Enable overload parameter. Enable overload Enable overload T current ref 2 Disabled Enabled T current ref 1 T current ref 1 100 % max 150% max
2nd. current reference value. Input as a % of Full load curr. The maximum value depends on the Enable overload parameter. Enable overload Enable overload Disabled Enabled T current ref 2 T current ref 2 100 % max 150% max
T current Ref
Total reference value as a % of Full load curr.
The total current reference value is the sum of T current ref 1 and T current ref 2. Example 1: T current ref 1 = + 50 % T current ref 2 = + 30 %
T current ref = 50 % + 30 % = 80 % Example 2: T current ref 1 = + 40 % T current ref 2 = - 60 %
T current ref = 40 % - 60 % = - 20 % The signals 0 ... 10 V, 0 ... 20 mA, et 4 ... 20 mA can be used as references. Single polarity current references can only be used with 2-quadrant DC drives.
5/20
5 - Main functions
5.5 Limits
LIMITS
Speed limits, current limits, excitation current limits
5.5.1 Speed limits

Keyp. RS Term D/P
Factory
LIMITS \ Speed limits \ Speed amount Speed min amount Speed max amount Speed min pos Speed max pos Speed min neg Speed max neg 1 2 5 3 6 4 U32 U32 U32 U32 U32 U32 U16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 232-1
32
0 5000 0 5000 0 5000 (D)
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
R/Z R/Z R/Z R/Z R/Z R/Z R 1 0
QD H L
R 1 0
2 -1 LIMITS \ Speed limits \ Speed min/max 232-1 232-1 232-1 232-1 1
Speed limited 372 Speed limited Speed not limited
(D) = This parameter can be assigned to a programmable digital output.
Speed min amount
Defines minimum speed in both directions of rotation (DCV104). Any value lower than this minimum is disregarded, whatever the selected reference value. This parameter observes ramp input. (see fig. 5.4.1.1) If the parameter Speed min amount is changed, the parameters Speed min pos and Speed min neg are set to the same value. If either of these parameters is later changed, the last change is the valid one. The value to be entered depends on the factor function. Defines maximum speed in both directions of rotation (DCV104). This parameter limits speed controller input and takes into account both the reference values from the ramp and slip compensation (see fig. 5.4.2.1) If the parameter Speed max amount is changed, the parameters Speed max pos and Speed max neg are set to the same value. If either of these values is later changed, the last change is the valid one. The value to be entered depends on the factor function. Defines minimum speed of clockwise rotation of the motor. Any value lower than this minimum is disregarded, whatever the selected reference value. This function affects ramp input. The value of the parameter to be entered depends on the factor function. Defines the maximum speed of clockwise rotation of the motor. This function affects speed controller input and therefore takes into account both the reference values from the ramp and the direction of rotation. The value of the parameter to be entered depends on the factor function. Defines minimum speed of anti-clockwise rotation of the motor (DCV104). Any value lower than this minimum is disregarded, whatever the selected reference value. This parameter affects ramp input. The value of this input parameter is based on the factor function. Defines maximum speed of anti-clockwise rotation of the motor (DCV104). This parameter affects speed controller input and therefore takes into account both the reference values from the ramp and the direction of rotation. The value of this input parameter is based on the factor function.
Speed max amount
Speed min pos
Speed max pos
Speed min neg
Speed max neg
5/21
5 - Main functions
5.5 Limits
LIMITS
Speed limited Message indicating that the reference value is limited by the minimum and maximum values input. Status 1 Status 0 Note! Reference value limited by input value is outside the value limits set. Reference value found within limits of values set.
The parameters Speed min amount, Speed min pos and Speed min neg affect the reference value Ramp ref 1, motorised potentiometer operation and the multi-speed function. However, they have no effect on the parameter Ramp ref 2.
5/22
5 - Main functions
5.5 Limits
LIMITS
5.5.2 Current limits
The torque limitation operating on speed controller output (see fig. 5.4.3.1).
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
LIMITS \ Current limits T current lim type 715 T lim mot gen T lim +/T current lim [%] 7 T current lim + [%] 8 T current lim - [%] 9 Curr limit state 349 Curr. limit reached Curr. limit not reached In use Tcur lim+ [%] 10 In use Tcur lim- [%] 11 Current lim red [%] 13 Torque reduct 342 Active Not active U16 0 1 0 Yes R/Z 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R 1 0 R R R/W R/W 1 0 -
U16 U16 U16 U16
0 0 0 0
200 200 200 1
100 100 100
(E) (E) (E) Digital output 5 (D)
Yes Yes Yes -
U16 U16 U16 U16
0 0 0 0
200 200 200 1
100 Not active (0)
(E)
Yes Yes Yes Yes
IA IA IA QD H L ID H L
R/W R/W R/W R 1 0 R R R/W R/W 1 0
(D) = This parameter can be assigned to a programmable digital output. (C) = This parameter may be assigned to a programmable digital input.
torque
T current lim +
T current lim +
speed
T current lim -
T current lim -
Figure 5.5.2.1: Torque limitations with T curr lim type = T lim +/-.
T curr lim type
This parameter determines how the DC drive will work with current limitations. T lim +/The active positive torque limitation is T current lim+ and the active negative torque limitation is T current lim-.
5/23
5 - Main functions
5.5 Limits
LIMITS
T lim mot/gen : 1- If motor speed is > +1% of Motor max speed, active negative torque limitation is T current lim-. 2- If motor speed is < -1% of Motor max speed, active positive torque limitation is T current limand active negative torque limitation is T current lim +. 3- Between -1% and +1% of Motor max speed is the value given to the parameter T current lim+ which controls the direction of rotation. T current lim Symmetrical current limitation for both directions of rotation for DCV104 DC drives. Defined as a % of the parameter Full load curr. The maximum value depends on the Enable overload parameter. Enable overload Enable overload Disabled Enabled T current limit : 100% T current limit : 150%
If the parameter T current limit is changed, the parameters T current lim + and T current lim - are set to the same value. If these two parameters are later changed, the last change is the valid one.
torque
T current lim + T current lim -
speed
T current lim T current lim + -1% of Motor nom speed +1% of Motor nom speed
Figure 5.5.2.2: Torque limitations with T curr lim type = T lim mot/gen
T current lim +
Limitation of DC drive current by positive torque (motor rotating clockwise and braking anti-clockwise). Defined as a % of the parameter Full load curr. The maximum value depends on the Enable overload parameter. Limitation of DC drive current by negative torque (motor rotating anticlockwise and braking clockwise). Defined as a % of the parameter Full load curr. The maximum value depends on the Enable overload parameter. This parameter is not enabled for DCV94 DC drives. Status message, indicating whether the DC drive is operating with current limitations or not. Status 1 DC drive operating with current limitations. (Diode Ilim lit) Status 0 DC drive not operating with current limitations.
T current lim -
Curr limit state
5/24
5 - Main functions
5.5 Limits
LIMITS
In use Tcur lim + In use Tcur lim Torque reduct Status message indicating current limitation value Tcur lim + used. Status message indicating the current limitation value Tcur lim - used by the negative torque direction as a % of Full load curr. Validation of torque reduction. This function can be assigned to a digital input. When the torque reduction function is active, the limit of current changes in accordance with the % set for the parameter Current lim red. Status 1 (Disabled) Torque reduction enabled Status 0 (Enabled) Torque reduction disabled % of T current lim +/- enabled by the Torque reduct function. If the overload controller (Enable Overload = Enable) is enabled, the maximum value of Current lim red is equal to 150% if not, it may not exceed 100%.
Current lim red
Example of this function and the Current lim red and Torque reduct parameters. T current limit (or T current lim +/-) = 80 % Current lim red = 70 % Torque reduct = Status 1 (Enabled) Current limit = 80 % Torque reduct = Status 0 (Disabled) Current limit = 50 % (70 % of 80 %) The value for T current limit can be set in the START UP\Limits menu.
5.5.3 Flux limits
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
LIMITS \ Flux limits Flux current max [%] Flux current min [%] 467 468 U16 U17 P468 0 100 P467 100 5 (A), (C) Yes Yes R/W R/W R/W ----
(A) = This parameter may be assigned to a programmable analogue output. (C) = This parameter may be assigned to a programmable analogue input.
Flux current max
% of maximum flux on the basis of the Motor nom flux parameter. The maximum value (100%) corresponds the motor inducer circuit working with a current equal to the value set in Motor nom flux. If no curve is defined for the I field cnst parameters, variation of the excitation current is proportional to the value of this parameter. (see Flux /if curve paragraph 4.6.4.1) % of minimum flux on the basis of the Motor nom flux parameter. The value causes a minimum current in relation to the value set in Motor nom flux to circulate in the motor field circuit. The value programmed here affects the threshold for giving off a Field loss alarm. The threshold is equal to one half of Flux current min.
Flux current min
5/25
5 - Main functions
5.6 Ramp
RAMP
Acceleration, deceleration, quick stop, S-ramp, ramp freezing

Ramp +
Ramp -
t
Ramp Reference
Ramp +/- delay 100 ms

From Ramp in = 0
Freeze ramp
T
To Speed Reference generation
Ramp ref (d)

Freeze ramp COMMAND
Acc. delta speed 100 rpm Acc. delta time 1 s
Linear Quick stop
Enab multi rmp

F
Dec. delta speed 100 rpm Dec delta time 1 s
QStp delta speed 1000 rpm QStp delta time 1 s
Ramp shape
Linear F S-shape Speed Multi Ramp Function
S shape t const 300 ms S acc t const 300 ms S dec t const 300 ms
Ramp shape
T S-shape
Figure 5.6.1: Ramp circuit.
The ramp (reference value integrator) determines the acceleration and deceleration times of the DC drive. These times can be set separately. An additional ramp is supplied for fast-stop. The ramp may be linear or in an S-shape. The reference values can be defined in different ways - with the reference values Ramp ref 1 and/or Ramp ref 2 - using the multi-speed function - using the motorised potentiometer function - using the Jog function. The ramp generator can be used as a standalone. When the ramp generator is disabled (Enable ramp = disabled), the commands Enable drive, Start/Stop and Fast stop do not affect the ramp generator. As such, it can operate freely and be used separately.
5/26
5 - Main functions
5.6 Ramp
RAMP
5.6.1 Acceleration, Deceleration, Fast stop

Keyp. RS Term D/P
RAMP \ Acceleration Acc delta speed Acc delta time [s] Dec delta speed Dec delta time [s] QStp delta speed QStp delta time [s] 21 22 29 30 37 38 U32 U16 U32 U16 U32 U16
Speed
0 0 0 0 0 0
232-1 65535 232-1 65535 232-1 65535
100 1 100 1 1000 1

Speed
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
RAMP \ Deceleration
RAMP \ Quick stop
3 1 2 Time [s] 1 2 3 4 Acc delta speed [21] Acc delta time [22] Dec delta speed [29] Dec delta time [30] 4 2 1
3 4
1 2 3 4
Acc delta speed [21] Acc delta time [22] Dec delta speed [29] Dec delta time [30]
2 4 1 3
Time [s]
DCV94
DCV104
Figure 5.6.1.1: Acceleration and deceleration ramps.
Acc delta speed Acc delta time Dec delta speed Dec delta time Qstp delta speed Qstp delta time Quick stop
Increases acceleration speed using the same unit as the ramp reference and is based on the factor function. Increases acceleration times, defined in seconds. If this parameter is set to 0 seconds, ramp output directly follows the reference value. Deceleration speed decreases. Deceleration time increases. Deceleration speed decreases in fast-stop mode. Deceleration time increases in fast-stop mode. Enables the Quick stop ramp.
DC drive acceleration is defined as a ratio of the Acc delta speed and Acc delta time parameters (see diagram 5.6.1.1). As regards 4-quadrant DC drives (DCV104), the same is true for both motor rotation directions. DC drive deceleration is defined as a ratio of the Dec delta speed and Dec delta time parameters. The Quick-Stop function allows for a second deceleration ramp to fast-stop the DC drive. In this case, ramp output is not set to zero immediately, but after a defined interval. Drive deceleration via the Quick Stop function is defined as a ratio of the Qstp delta speed and Qstp delta time parameters. This ramp is enabled by the Fast stop and Quick stop functions and only works with 4-quadrant DC drives.
5/27
5 - Main functions
5.6 Ramp
RAMP
5.6.2 Shapes of the ramps and command signal

Keyp. RS Term D/P
RAMP Ramp shape S-Shaped Linear S shape t const [ms] S acc t const [ms] S dec t const [ms] Ramp +/- delay [ms] Fwd-Rev No direction Fwd direction Rev direction No direction Forward sign Reverse sign Enable ramp Enabled Disabled Ramp out = 0 Not active Active Ramp in = 0 Not active Active Freeze ramp Not active Active Ramp + Acc.CW+Dec.antiCW 18 U16 0 1 Linear 0 300 300 300 100 1 Yes R/Z 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 1 2 3 R/W R/W R/Z 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R 1 0 R 1 0 R 1 0 R 1 0
(E) = This parameter may be assigned to a programmable digital input.
19 663 664 20 673
Float Float Float U16 U16
100 100 100 0 0
3000 3000 3000 65535 3
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
ID
293 294 245
U16 U16 I16
0 0 0
1 1 1
0 0 Enabled (1) Not active (1) Not active (1) Not active (1) (E)
Yes
ID ID -
R/W 0 1 2 3 R/W R/W -
344
U16
Yes
345
U16
(E)
Yes
373
U16
(E)
Yes
346
U16
Digital output 1 (E)
ID H L ID H L ID H L QD H L QD H L QD H L QD H L
R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R 1 0 R 1 0 R 1 0 R 1 0
Other states Ramp 347 Acc.anti CW+DecCW Other states Acc state 1259 Acc CW+Acc.antiCW Other states Dec state 1260 Dec CW+Dec.antiCW Other states
U16
U16
U16
5/28
5 - Main functions
5.6 Ramp
RAMP
S shape t const
Figure 5.6.2.1: effect of the S shape t const parameter.
The parameters Ramp shape and S shape t const determine the shape of the ramp. Ramp shape Linear Linear ramp S shaped S-shaped ramp Determines the gradient of the curve for S-shaped ramps (see diagram 5.6.2.1). Determines the curve for S-shaped acceleration ramps. Determines the curve for S-shaped deceleration ramps.
S shape t const S acc t const S dec t const
When using very different S acc t const and S dec t const values, this provides discontinuous behaviour when changing the motor rotation direction. The value of S shape t constant is added to the ramp times of linear ramps. Ramp time is thus extended by the value defined by the S shape t const parameter. This is true however wide a speed change may be required Acceleration or deceleration statuses (= Active ramp) are indicated by the Ramp + and Ramp - parameters.
Ramp output
Ramp +
Ramp -
Ramp +/- delay

Figure 5.6.2.2: Ramp delay.
Ramp +/- delay Fwd-Rev
Introduces a delay when enabling Ramp + and Ramp - information. Changes the reference sign with a ramp. When the Fwd direction is requested, the ramp reference is multiplied by +1. When the Rev direction is requested, the ramp reference is multiplied by -1. Selects forward direction prior to the reference with ramp. Can be programmed on a digital input.
Forward sign
5/29
5 - Main functions
5.6 Ramp
RAMP
Reverse sign Selects reverse direction prior to the reference with ramp. Can be programmed on a digital input.
When Forward sign and Reverse sign are both 0 or 1, the multiplier has a value of 0. Ramp circuit behaviour is defined by the Enable Ramp, Ramp In = 0, Ramp Out = 0 and Freeze ramp parameters.
Ramp in = 0
Ramp out = 0
Ramp ref
Ramp output
Figure 5.6.2.3: Ramp control.
Enable Ramp
This parameter can only be changed with the DC drive locked. Enabled The ramp is enabled Disabled The ramp is disabled. Not active Active Not active Ramp output enabled. Ramp output is immediately set to zero. Ramp input enabled. The Ramp Ref parameter corresponds to the reference set. Ramp input disabled. Ramp Ref = 0. The output value of the ramp is maintained, whatever changes may occur in the input reference values. Ramp output follows changes to input reference values in accordance with the ramp times set.
Ramp out = 0 Ramp in = 0
Active Freeze ramp Active Not active Ramp + Ramp -
Active if the DC drive is using positive torque (motor rotating clockwise and braking anti-clockwise). Active if the DC drive is using negative torque (motor rotating anticlockwise and braking clockwise). Only applies to DCV104.
The DC drive will only work if the ramp is enabled. Enable ramp = Enabled. When ramp input is enabled using Ramp in = 0, DC drive acceleration time starts. If input is disabled, the motor slows down after the deceleration time set until reaching zero speed. When ramp output is set to zero using Ramp out=0, the product brakes with the maximum torque available. Braking is not possible with DCV94 DC drives.
5/30
5 - Main functions
5.7 Speed regulator
SPEED REGULATOR
Speed reg., speed zero logic, self-tuning, derivation, equalising functions

Speed droop comp
Load comp
Inertia/Loss comp Aux spd fun sel T
Speed Limits
Speed max amount 2000 rpm Speed max pos 2000 rpm Speed max neg 2000 rpm +
Speed ref (d) Speed reg output
Speed P in use
Speed I in use To Torque current regulator T current ref + T
P/I speed regulator Speed ref 1 0 rpm + + Speed min neg 0 rpm Speed min pos 0 rpm Speed min amount 0 rpm + + Lock speed reg + F T + Enable spd reg + Zero Torque
Zero
Speed ref 2 0 rpm T current ref 1 0 % Speed P 10 % Speed I 1 % Prop. filter 0 ms + Speed up Aux spd fun sel F Speed P/I base value Speed P base 0.939379 A/rpm Speed up gain 0 % Speed up filter 0 ms Speed I base 0.234845 A/rpm*ms Lock speed I Not Active T current ref 2 0 %
Zero torque COMMAND
Actual spd (rpm)
Speed fbk
Speed up base 1000 ms
Figure 5.7.1: Diagram showing how the speed regulator works.
DCV -series DC drives are equipped with a speed regulator circuit which can be adapted easily to the requirements of the various applications. The product is factory set for PI tuning using the tuning parameters over the entire tuning range. It can also perform the following functions: Speed-up to prevent oscillations during acceleration with strong inertia momentum. Speed zero logic for tuning when the motor is stopped. Adaptive speed regulator to optimise the regulator in accordance with actual speed or an external reference (Adap. Reference). On-the-fly restart of a working motor Speed signals Current balance function
5/31
5 - Main functions
5.7 Speed regulator
SPEED REGULATOR
5.7.1 Speed regulator

Keyp. RS Term D/P
Factory
SPEED REGULAT Speed ref [rpm] Speed reg output [%] Lock speed reg ON OFF Enable spd reg Enabled Disabled 348 Not active Active Aux spd fun sel 1016 Inertia-loss cp Speed up Prop filter [ms] 444 Lock speed I U16 0 1 242 I16 0 1 118 236 322 I16 I16 U16 -32768 -200 0 +32767 +200 1 OFF (0) Enabled (1) Not active (1) Speed up (0) 0 (E) (A) T current ref (A) (E) Yes Yes Yes R R R/W 1 0 R/Z 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/Z 1 0 R/W QA QA ID H L R R R/W 1 0 -
Yes
Yes
U16
(E)
Yes
ID H L -
R/W 1 0 -
U16
1000
Yes
(A) = This parameter may be assigned to a programmable analogue output. (E) = This parameter may be assigned to a programmable digital input.
Speed ref Speed reg output
Total reference value for the speed in tr/mn Speed regulator output value, used as reference value for current controller. Note! The speed regulator remains active, even when disabled. (Enable spd reg= Disabled), even when, in this condition, the Speed reg output parameter contains valid information. These data can be sent to the optional DCVS5W04 applications development and programming board to be used for other adjustments. If the speed regulator is active. (Enable spd reg = Enabled) the Speed reg output parameter contains the sum of real speed regulator output and the T current ref 2 parameter.
Lock speed reg
This parameter is used to block the speed regulator. When it is reached, it stops functioning, the current reference value is set to zero and the drive stops. The stopping time depends on the inertia and friction of the system in question. If the connection between the speed regulator and the current regulator is re-established, the DC drive restarts on current limitation. ON Speed regulator locked (= 0 V on digital input). OFF Regulator not locked (= 15...30 V on digital input). This parameter can only be changed with the DC drive locked. Enabled The speed regulator is enabled. Regulator output is connected to the current PID regulator input. Speed reg output = T current ref 1. Disabled The speed regulator is disabled.
Enable spd reg
5/32
5 - Main functions
5.7 Speed regulator
SPEED REGULATOR
Lock speed I Aux spd fun sel Prop. filter Disabled Enabled Integral gain of the speed regulator enabled. Integral gain of the speed regulator disabled.
Selection of Speed up or Inertia/loss cp functions (see chapters 5.7.3. Speed up function and 5.7.5. Inertia/loss cp for more details). Time constant of the Derivative part of the Speed-up function.
The speed regulator must be enabled using the Enable spd reg parameter if it is to be used. The speed regulator reference value is the sum of Speed ref 1 and Speed ref 2. Speed feedback can be provided by an encoder or a tachogenerator mounted on the drive shaft. The higher the resolution of the encoder (providing maximum frequency limits are observed), the more accurate the regulator control. The regulator parameters can be set separately.
5.7.1.1 Self-tuning of the speed regulator

Keyp. RS Term D/P
SPEED REGULAT. \ Self tuning Fwd-Rev spd tune Fwd direction Rev direction Test T curr lim [%] Start Inertia [kg*m*m] Inertia Nw [kg*m*m] Friction [N*m] Friction Nw [N*m] Speed P [%] Speed P Nw [%] Speed I [%] Speed I Nw [%] Take val 1029 U16 1 2 Fwd Direction (1) 20 S S S S Yes R/Z 1 2 R/Z C R/W R R/W R R/W R R/W R Z/C -
1048 1027 1014 1030 1015 1031 87 1032 88 1033 1028
U16 U16 Float Float Float Float Float Float Float Float U16
0 0 0.001 0.001 0.000 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0
S 65535 999.999 999.999 99.999 99.99 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 65535
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Fwd-Rev spd tune
Choice of direction of output rotation during the self tuning procedure (FWD = clockwise rotation, or REV = anti-clockwise rotation; rotation seen from the side of the drive shaft. Uppermost torque current limit applied during self-tuning. Starts self-tuning of speed regulator. Inertia value in Kg*m2 (1 Kg*m2 = 23.76 ib*ft2). New inertia value in Kg*m2 identified during the self-tuning procedure. Friction value in N*m (1 N*m = 0.738 lb*ft). New friction value in N*m identified during the self-tuning procedure. Proportional gain of the speed regulator. New value of the proportional gain of the speed regulator. Integral gain of the speed regulator. New value of the integral gain of the speed regulator. Acquisition of the new values of the parameters after self-tuning.
Test T curr lim Start Inertia Inertia Nw Friction Friction Nw Speed P Speed P Nw Speed I Speed I Nw Take val
5/33
5 - Main functions
5.7 Speed regulator
SPEED REGULATOR
5.7.2 Speed zero logic (spd zero logic)

Parameter No.
Speed zero logic determines how the drive will behave when the motor is stopped.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
SPEED REGULAT \ Spd zero logic Enable spd=0 I Enabled Disabled Enable spd=0 R Enabled Disabled Enable spd=0 P Enabled Disabled Spd=0 P gain [%] Ref 0 level 123 U16 0 1 Disabled (0) Disabled (0) Disabled (0) 10.00 10
Enable spd=0 P 10 % Ref 0 level 10 rpm
Yes
124
U16
Yes
125
U16
Yes
126 106
Float U16
0.00 1
Spd=0 P gain
100.00 32767
Yes Yes
R/Z 1 0 R/Z 1 0 R/Z 1 0 R/W R/W
>=
Enable spd=0 R
Lock speed I
Ramp ref / Speed ref
Ref 0 level &
&
>=
Enable spd=0 I
Lock speed I & > =
Speed
Speed zero
Speed zero delay 100 ms
Figure 5.7.2.1: Spd zero logic.
Enable spd=0 I
Enabled
Disabled
Output of the integral part of the speed regulator returns to zero when the reference and feedback are equal to zero. Control, then, is solely proportional. Component I (one) is enabled when a reference value is given to re-launch acceleration. Function disabled
5/34
&
5 - Main functions
5.7 Speed regulator
SPEED REGULATOR
Enable spd=0 R Only works if Enable spd=0 P is enabled Enabled Proportional gain Spd=0 P gain is active when the motor is stopped. Is disabled when the reference speed is higher than the value defined by Ref 0 level. Disabled Active proportional gain Spd=0 P gain, active when the motor is stopped. Disabled when the reference speed or the actual speed are greater than the value defined by Ref 0 level. Enabled When the reference value and the actual value are below Ref 0 level proportional gain Spd = 0 P gain becomes active after an interval defined by Speed zero delay. For disabling Spd=0 P gain the Enable spd=0 R parameter is used. Disabled The speed regulator also retains its proportional component when the motor is stopped. Proportional gain is only active if the Enable spd=0 P function has been enabled. Threshold at which speed zero logic intervenes. Defined in the units specified by the factor function. Speeds under this threshold are defined as being equal to zero.
Enable spd=0 P
Spd=0 P gain
Ref 0 level
5.7.3 Speed-up Function

Keyp. RS Term D/P
SPEED REGULAT \ Speed up Speed up gain [%] Speed up base [ms] Speed up filter [ms] 445 446 447 Float Float U16 0.00 0 0 100.00 16000 1000 0.00 1000 0 Yes Yes Yes R/W R/W R/W -
The Speed-up function is used to prevent oscillations during strong inertia changes momentum. It is made up of a part of a derivative D in the speed feedback circuit, which allows for integral gain of the speed regulator. This is also useful in the case of unstable cyclical loads on the motor (e.g. cams). The feedback applied to the speed regulator has two parts: - motor speed - the output signal of the Speed up function Please see the oscillograms in chapter 4.6.4.2. Speed up gain Speed up base Speed up filter Speed up function gain as a % of Speed up base. Maximum gain of the Speed up function. The value defined is 100% of the Speed up gain parameter. Time constant of the filter D part of the Speed-up function.
5/35
5 - Main functions
5.7 Speed regulator
SPEED REGULATOR
5.7.4 Droop function

Keyp. RS Term D/P
SPEED REGULAT \ Droop function Droop gain [%] Droop filter [ms] Load comp [%] Droop limit Enable droop Enabled Disabled 696 697 698 700 699 Float U16 I16 U16 U16 0.00 0 -200 0 0 100.00 1000 +200 2*P45 1 0.00 0 0 1500 Disabled (0)
(C) = This parameter may be assigned to a programmable analogue input. (E) = This parameter may be assigned to a programmable digital input.
Load comp 0 %
(C) (E)
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 0
IA ID
R/W R/W 1 0
Droop limit 1500 rpm
Droop filter 0 ms
To Speed reference
Enable droop
+ low pass filter

Droop gain T current ref
Zero
0 %
Figure 5.7.4.1: Droop compensation.
The Droop function is used to balance the current. A typical example of when it is used is when two motors are mechanically coupled and need to turn over at the same speed. A difference in the specifications of the motors and/or in speed control adjustments on the DC drives linked to them tends to give slightly different speeds. This would lead to an overload of one of the motors, as the other would be acting as a brake. The Droop function allows the user to eliminate the maladjustment by adding a correction term to the drive speed reference, proportional to the difference in load between the two drives. The effect is to balance the currents of the two motors (See fig. 5.7.1). Droop gain Droop function gain. This is determined as a % of the ratio between Speed base value and the difference between Load comp - T current ref. This means that when the difference between Load comp - T current ref is 100% and Droop gain = 100%, the correction signal of the reference is equal to Speed base value. Time filter constant of the function. Load balance signal. This is typically the current of the master drive, but can be provided by an external control (e.g. API). The parameter may be assigned to a programmable analogue input. It is determined as a % of IdN.
Droop filter Load comp
5/36
5 - Main functions
5.7 Speed regulator
SPEED REGULATOR
Enable droop Droop limit Enabled Disabled Droop function enabled Droop function disabled
Determines the range of correction of the speed reference within which the Droop function is active. The value is based on the factor function.
(For more information, please see fig. 5.7.1 diagram of how the speed regulator works).
M1
M2
Drive master
Analog input Analog output
Drive slave
Line speed
Figure 5.7.4.2: example of the Droop function on a steel-pipe manufacturing machine.
Example of tuning: > Aim: Motor 1 torque should be equal to motor 2 torque Master DC drive Slave DC drive Analogue input 1 = Speed ref 1 Analogue output 2 = Load comp Enable droop = Enable Droop gain = 5% Droop filter = 100 ms Droop limit = 1000
Analogue input 1 = Speed ref 1 Analogue output 1 = Speed ref 1
5/37
5 - Main functions
5.7 Speed regulator
SPEED REGULATOR
5.7.5 Compensation of inertia and friction (Inertia/loss cp)

Keyp. RS Term D/P
SPEED REGULAT \ Inertia/loss cp Inertia [kg*m*m] Friction [N*m] Torque const [N*m/A] Inertia c filter [ms] 1014 1015 1013 1012
Ref 0 level 10 rpm
Float Float Float U16
0.001 0.000 0.01 0
999.999 99.999 99.99 1000
S S S 0
Yes Yes Yes Yes
R/W R/W R R/W
Speed
Inertia c filter 0 ms Friction 0.001 N*m
Speed ref (d)
n d
1
Torque const
Aux spd fun sel
low pass filter

Inertia 0.005 Kg*m*m Flux reference
T To speed regulator output
Figure 5.7.5.1: Compensation of inertia and friction.
An increase in the response speed of the speed regulator to a variation in the reference can be obtained by modifying the value of the current during acceleration or deceleration to counterbalance the inertia of the drive motor. These parameters are identified in the speed loop self-tuning procedure Speed self tune (START UP\Speed self tune and SPEED REGULAT\Self tuning), but they can also be manually adjusted by the operator. Enabling this function makes it impossible to use the Speed up function. It must be selected using the Aux spd fun sel parameter (on the SPEED REGULAT menu). Inertia Friction Torque const Inertia c filter Total inertia of the drive shaft in kg*m2 identified during the self-tuning procedure (1 kg*m2 = 23.76 lb*ft2). Friction value in N*m identified during the self-tuning procedure (1 N*m = 0.738 lb*ft). Motor torque constant in N*m/A. Used to calculate compensation of inertia and friction. It is automatically adapted during field weakening. Top-ranking low-step filter. This filter reduces the oscillation in the Inertia/Loss comp. block.
5/38
5 - Main functions
5.8 Current regulator
CURRENT REGULATOR
Parameter No.
Armature current regulator function

Format min Value max Standard Configurat. Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Factory
CURRENT REGULAT T current ref [%] Motor current [%] Arm resistance [ ] Arm inductance [mH] Current scale E int [V] R&L search ON OFF Zero torque Not active Active 41 199 453 454 1365 587 452 I16 I16 Float Float Float I16 U16 -200 -250 S S 0.3 -80 0 +200 250 S S 2.0 +80 1 0.500 4.00 1 OFF (0) 353 U16 0 1 Not active (1) (E) Yes (A) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes R R R/W R/W R/W R R/Z 1 0 R/W 1 0 QA QA QA R R -
(A)
ID H L
R/W
(A) = This parameter may be assigned to a programmable analogue output. (E) = This parameter may be assigned to a programmable digital input.
Current Limits
T current lim + 150 % T current lim 150 % T current ref In use Tcur limIn use Tcur lim+ Arm resistence 2.55 Ohm Arm inductance 34.33 mH Curr limit state
P / I Regulator
Modulator DC Motor
+ -
From Speed Regulator To Droop Feedback

T current lim 150 % Output voltage
Feedback (option)
Motor current Current lim red 100 % Torque reduct
Torque reduction
T
T curr lim type
Torque reduction command
torque
torque T current lim + T current lim +
T current lim + T current lim -
speed
speed
T current lim T current lim + -1% of Motor nom speed +1% of Motor nom speed
T current lim -
T current lim -
Motoring & Generating Torque Limit
Torque Limit +/-
Figure 5.8.1: Torque regulation through the current.
The Full load curr parameter on the CONFIGURATION menu defines the rated current of the motor. It also corresponds to the output current of the converter with T current ref = 100%. T current ref Total reference value of the current as a % of Full load curr. For this parameter, DCV94 DC drives require a positive value. In this case, negative references are processed and correspond to a reference value of zero.
5/39
5 - Main functions
5.8 Current regulator
CURRENT REGULATOR
Arm resistance Motor armature resistance in . When the self-calibration cycle is performed using R&L search, this parameter is automatically updated. That is why, if necessary, it can be changed manually. Motor armature inductance in mH. When the self-calibration cycle is performed using R&L search, this parameter is automatically updated. That is why, if necessary, it can be changed manually. Auxiliary signals used to determine whether the current regulator is well-adjusted. The value should be as low as possible. Values between -40V and + 40V are acceptable (max 80V). Self-calibration cycle of the current regulator. The armature resistance and inductance values are calculated and set in the parameters Arm resistance and Arm inductance. The parameter may be used to set the reference value T current ref for the armature current to zero, so that the drive has no more torque. Not active T current ref not set to zero Active T current ref set to zero. The drive has no torque.
Arm inductance
E int
R&L search
Zero torque
5/40
5 - Main functions
5.9 Flux regulation
FLUX REGULATION
Parameter No.
field regulator function, flow/if curve

Keyp. RS Term D/P
Factory
FLUX REGULATION Enable flux reg ON OFF Flux reg mode Constant current Voltage control External control Enable flux weak ON OFF Speed-0 f weak ON OFF Flux reference [%] Flux current [%] Out vlt level I field cnst 40 I field cnst 70 I field cnst 90 Set flux / if Reset flux / if Nom flux curr [A] Motor nom flux [A] 469 U16 0 2 497 U16 0 1 ON (1) Const. current (0) (E) Yes R/W 1 0 R/Z 0 1 2 R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R R R/W R/Z R/Z R/Z Z/C Z/C R/Z R/Z ID H L -
Yes
498
U16
OFF (0) OFF
(E)
Yes
499
U16
Yes
ID H L -
500 234 921 916 917 918 919 920 374 280
Float* Float* Float* Float Float Float U16 U16 Float Float
0.0 0.0 0 0 0 0
(0) 100.0 0.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 FLUX REGULATION \ Flux \ if curve 100.0 100.0 100.0 40.0 70.0 90.0
(A) (A) (A), (C)
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
QA QA IA, QA
R R/W -
0.5 0.0
80.0 P374
S P374x0.3
(A) = This parameter may be assigned to a programmable analogue output. (C) = This parameter may be assigned to a programmable analogue input. (E) = This parameter may be assigned to a programmable digital input.
5/41
5 - Main functions
5.9 Flux regulation
FLUX REGULATION
Voltage reg P / I Base
Voltage P 30 % Flux P base 3277 Flux I base Voltage I Out vlt level 100 % 40 % 3277 Flux curr max 100 %
Field current limits

Energy saving
Flux curr max Flux curr min Output Voltage
Voltage regulator
Max out voltage 500 V
+ -
T
Flux reg mode Set field min Disabled Flux curr min 70 % Speed 0 weak Enabled
Output voltage
Field economy
Flux curr max
Flux P / I Base
Fllux P 2 % Flux I Flux reference Motor nom flux 10 A 1 % Voltage P base 1.8 A/V Voltage I base 13.0909 A/V*ms
Flux curr min Spd=0 Thr
Speed zero level 10 rpm
Field controller I field curve Flux P / I
+ -
Enable flux reg
Nom flux curr 10 A Set flux/if 0 Reset flux/if 0 Ifield cnst 90 Ifield cnst 70 Ifield cnst 40 40 % Flux current % 70 % Motor nom flux
C1
M
D1
10 A
90 %
Figure 5.9.1: controls motor excitation.
Enable flux reg
Starts the field excitation regulator ON Field excitation regulator on. OFF Field excitation regulator off. There is no field current. Mode of operation of the field excitation regulator. Constant current The motor is working with a constant DC field current. The value of the current is the same as the one programmed using the Motor nom flux parameter. If no curve is defined by the I field cnst parameters, this value may be adjusted in a linear fashion using Flux current max (% of excitation current as a function of Motor nominal flux) (see Flux /if curve paragraph 4.6.4.1)
Flux reg mode
5/42
5 - Main functions
5.9 Flux regulation
FLUX REGULATION
Voltage control The motor is working in field weakening (torque control) mode with variable voltage being applied to the motor field winding. Maximum armature voltage is adjusted using the Max out voltage parameter on the CONFIGURATION menu. The motor field circuit is powered by a source other than the DC drive (field rectifier/converter).
External control Enable flux weak
Validation of the energy-saving function ON The field excitation current is the same as the value set using the Flux current min parameter. OFF The field excitation current is set based on the mode of operations and the conditions under which the motor is working when in field weakening mode. Minimum field excitation current, as per the Flux current min parameter, that is applied when the Start and Fast stop commands = 0. Can be used to reheat the motor if safety conditions do not require the motor to be unplugged when stopped. ON Function operational OFF Function not operational 100% as per the Motor nom flux parameter. With the Flux/if curve function enabled, this reference corresponds to the flux reference as per the curve determined. With the Flux/if curve function non-enabled (default value), this reference corresponds to the excitation current reference. Excitation current feedback, expressed as a % of the Motor nom flux parameter. % of maximum armature voltage, as per the Max out voltage parameter. This parameter allows motor armature voltage to be changed in Voltage control mode (FLUX REGULATION\Flux reg mode). Current value at 40% flux. Current value at 70% flux. Current value at 90% flux. Command to adjust the flux curve in relation to the one programmed on I field cnst 40-70-90. With the curve defined, the indication Flux current max/Flux reference only shows the % of flux according to the features of this curve. Thus the value of the field current will also be determined by this feature (see Flux /if curve paragraph 4.6.4.1). Command to use the flux curve adjusted using the Set flux / if command. With this command, the Motor nominal flux parameter is once again changed in a linear fashion by Flux current max/Flux reference.
Speed-0 f weak
Flux reference
Flux current Out vlt level
I field cnst 40 I field cnst 70 I field cnst 90 Set flux / if
Reset flux / if
5/43
5 - Main functions
5.9 Flux regulation
FLUX REGULATION
Nom flux curr Calibration of the field reguator; IdFN. To improve the behaviour during adjustment, the maximum field current can be reduced using the S14 switch on the control board (see the table in the chapter 2.3.3). E.g.: Armature : Drive type:
500 V Excitation voltage: 230 V 102 A 0.8 A DCV104C18S (Excitation current 14 A max)
Adjust S14 so as to adapt the product of the excitation regulator as closely as possible to the motor specifications:
Switch ohms Field curr scale 1.0 A 148 ohm S14-1 OFF 330 ohm S14-2 OFF 182 ohm S14-3 OFF 36.4 ohm S14-4 OFF 845 ohm S14-5 OFF 1650 ohm S14-6 ON Equivalent resistance 1650 ohm
GD6111g
Set the parameter Nom flux curr to 1A. Motor nom flux Rated field current IdFN of the motor connected. In the above example: Motor nom flux = 0.8A.
5/44
5 - Main functions
5.10 Reg.parameters
REG PARAMETERS
Parameter No.
Adjustment of speed, excitation current, armature voltage regulators

Keyp. RS Term D/P
Factory
REG PARAMETERS \ Percent values \ Speed regulator Speed P [%] Speed I [%] Speed P bypass [%] Speed I bypass [%] Flux P [%] Flux I [%] Voltage P [%] Voltage I [%] Speed P base Speed I base 87 88 459 460 91 92 493 494 93 94 Float Float Float Float Float Float Float Float Float Float 0.00 100.0 10.00 0.00 100.0 1.00 0.00 100.0 10.00 0.00 100.0 1.00 REG PARAMETERS \ Percent values \ Flux regulator 0.00 100.0 2.00 0.00 100.0 1.00 REG PARAMETERS \ Percent values \ Voltage reg 0.00 100.0 30.00 0.00 100.0 40.00 REG PARAMETERS \ Base values \ Speed regulator 0,300 P93max 0.001 S 0,3 P94max REG PARAMETERS \ Base values \ Flux regulator 1 32767 3277 1 32767 3277 REG PARAMETERS \ Base values \ Voltage reg 0.0100 S S 0.01 S S REG PARAMETERS \ In use values 0.00 0.00 100.00 100.00 S S 0.001 S Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/Z R/Z -
Flux P base Flux I Base Voltage P base Voltage I base Speed P in use [%] Speed I in use [%]
97 98 495 496 99 100
Float Float Float Float Float Float
R/Z R/Z R/Z R/Z R R
Speed P Speed I Speed P bypass
Proportional gain KP* of the speed regulator expressed as a % of Speed P base. Integral gain KI* of the speed regulator expressed as a % of Speed I base. Proportional gain KP* of the speed regulator expressed as a % of Speed P base when feedback from the tachogenerator or the encoder is changed in speed feedback (Enable fbk bypas = Enabled). Proportional gain KI* of the speed regulator expressed as a % of Speed I base when feedback from the tachogenerator or the encoder is changed in speed feedback (Enable fbk bypas = Enabled). Proportional gain KP* of the flux regulator expressed as a % of FluxP base. Integral gain KI* of the flux regulator expressed as a % of Flux I base. Proportional gain KP* of the excitation voltage regulator expressed as a % of Voltage P base. Integral gain KI* of the excitation voltage regulator expressed as a % of Voltage I base. Proportional gain KP0 of the speed regulator in A/rpm (base value).
Speed I bypass
Flux P Flux I Voltage P Voltage I Speed P base
5/45
5 - Main functions
5.10 Reg parameters
REG PARAMETERS
Speed I base Flux P base Flux I base Voltage P base Voltage I base Speed P in use Speed I in use Integral gain KI0 of the speed regulator in A/rpmxms (base value). Proportional gain KP0 of the field excitation current regulator in A/Vs (base value). Integral gain KI0 of the field excitation current regulator in A/Vs (base value). Proportional gain KP0 of the field excitation voltage regulator in A/Vs (base value). Integral gain KI0 of the field excitation voltage regulator in A/V x ms (base value). Displays the active proportional gain of the speed regulator as a % of Speed P base. Displays the active integral gain of the speed regulator as a % of Speed I base.
The maximum value of the regulator parameters is defined by the base values. Possible adjustments depend on the size of the DC drive. It is possible to optimise regulator function by changing the % (values marked with a *). The resulting gains for the regulator are calculated as follows: KP = KP0 KP* / 100 % Example of speed regulator: Speed P base = 12 ( = KP0 ) Proportional gain Speed P = 70 % ( = KP* ) KP = 12 70 % / 100 % = 8.4 KI = KI0 KI* / 100 %
The base values ... base are also the absolute reference point for using variable gains. When the variable gains function is enabled, (Enable spd adap = Enabled), the parameters Speed P and Speed I have no effect. However, they keep their value and work again once the function is disabled. The Speed P in use and Speed I in use parameters indicate gains during use of the speed regulator. This is the case when the variable gains function is enabled.
5/46
5 - Main functions
5.11 Configuration
CONFIGURATION
Mode of operation, feedback type, scaling, default allocation, communication, password
5.11.1 Choice of mode of operation
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
CONFIGURATION Main commands Digital Terminals Control mode Bus Local 253 U16 0 1 252 U16 0 1 Term. (0) Local (0) Yes R/Z 1 0 R/Z 1 0 -
Yes
Main commands
This parameter defines where the Enable drive, Start and Fast stop should be issued. Terminals Digital The above commands are only taken into account on the terminal block. The commands must be selected simultaneously by the terminal block and the digital channel (keyboard or RS485 or bus, depending on Control mode). If, for example, a DC drive stop has been caused by de-activating the Start command on terminal 13, the voltage on terminal 13 and the command via digital channel are required to be able to restart it. This also applies to an interruption of the Fast stop command. If, however, the Stop command is requested via the digital channel, the digital Start command will suffice to restart the DC drive.
Changing the control mode of the drive from digital commands to the terminal block (Terminals) can only be done when terminals 12 (Enable) and 13 (Start) are disconnected. By passing the commands from Digital to Terminals with the terminals enabled, the message Change input will appear, indicating that this is impossible. Control mode This parameter defines whether the digital channel is the keyboard/ RS485 or a bus system (CANopen option). Local Bus The digital channel is the keyboard or the RS485 serial interface The digital channel is a bus system (Optional)
5/47
5 - Main functions
5.11 Configuration
CONFIGURATION
The following tables show the different modes of operation possible.
Parameters Main commands Terminals Digital Local Local Control mode
Assignment of: Enable drive Start Fast stop terminals terminals or keyboard RS485 keyboard/ RS485 keyboard/ RS485 keyboard* RS485* or Bus Change Control mode
Acknowledgement failures (Failure reset) terminals or keyboard terminals or keyboard terminals or keyboard* or Bus terminals or keyboard* RS485* or Bus
Save parameters (Save parameters) keyboard/ RS485 keyboard/ RS485 keyboard/ RS485 or Bus keyboard/ RS485 or Bus
T6125f-en
Terminals
Bus
terminals
Digital
Bus
terminals and Field Bus
keyboard* RS485* or Bus
Parameters Command mode Control mode Terminals
Options to access via Keyboard/RS485 Bus
Terminal
Local
Access to everything assigned to the programmable I/Os
Access to all parameters not assigned to the programmable I/Os
none
Keyboard
Local
none
Terminal
Bus
- read all - save parameters - fault acknowledgments* - control mode selection* - read all - save parameters - fault acknowledgments* - control mode selection*
Keyboard
Bus

T6130f-en
* Access via keyboard or RS485 serial interface protected in this configuration by Password level 1
Note!
Write access to the Bus by Process Data Channel is not affected by the Control Mode.
5/48
5 - Main functions
5.11 Configuration
CONFIGURATION
5.11.2 Base values and maximum armature voltage

Keyp. RS Term D/P
CONFIGURATION
Speed base value Full load curr [A]
45 179
U32*** Float Float I16
1 0.1 20 0
16383 IdN 999 1
1500 IdN 400 0
Yes Yes Yes Yes
R/Z R/Z R/Z R/Z 1 0
R -
Max out voltage [V] 175 Ok relay funct 412 Ready to Start Drive healthy
Speed base value
Speed base value is defined in the units specified by the factor function. It is the benchmark value for all speed values (reference values, adaptive speed regulator...), given as a %. It corresponds to 100% of the total speed range. This parameter can only be changed if the DC drive is locked (Enable drive = Disabled). Speed base value does not define the maximum speed possible, which can be obtained by adding certain base values. It is defined by Speed max amount The Full load curr parameter is defined in A. It is the rated motor current and 100% of T current lim. The current limits and the overload function are based on this value. Maximum armature voltage. When defined in the Flux reg mode Voltage control, Max out voltage function, it corresponds to the voltage at which the field weakening stage starts. This parameter affects the armature overload detection threshold Overvoltage.
Full load curr
Max out voltage
5.11.3 Configuration of the OK relay (terminals 35, 36)
Ok relay func
This parameter defines the conditions under which the relay output closes. Drive healthy The relay closes when the drive is supplied with control voltage and when there are no error messages. Ready to start The relay closes when the following conditions are met: - The DC drive is supplied with control voltage - No error message - The DC drive is enabled with the Enable drive signal.
5/49
5 - Main functions
5.11 Configuration
CONFIGURATION
5.11.4 Configuration of speed feedback circuit

Keyp. RS Term D/P
Factory
CONFIGURATION \ Speed fbk Motor max speed [rpm] Speed fbk sel Encoder 1 Encoder 2 Tacho Armature Encoder 1 state Encoder ok Encoder Fault Enable fbk contr Enabled Disabled Enable fbk bypas Enabled Disabled Flux weak speed [%] Speed fbk error [%] Tacho scale Speed offset Encoder 1 pulses Encoder 2 pulses Refresh enc 1 Enabled Disabled Encoder 2 state Encoder ok Encoder Fault Refresh enc 2 Enabled Disabled Enable ind store Enabled Disabled Ind store ctrl Index storing 162 414 Float * U16 0 0 6553 3 1500 1 Yes Yes R/Z R/Z 0 1 2 3 R 1 0 R/Z 1 0 R/Z 1 0 R/Z R/Z R/W R/W R/Z R/Z R/W 1 0 R 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W R R R
648
U16
QD
457
U16
Enabled (1) Disabled (0) 100 22 1.00 0 1024 1000 Disabled (0)
Yes
R 1 0 -
458
U16
Yes
456 455 562 563 416 169 649
U16 U16 Float Float Float * Float * U16
0 0 0.90 -20.00 600 150 0
100 100 3.00 +20.00 9999 9999 1
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
R R R -
651
U16
QD
652
U16
Disabled (0) Disabled (0) 0 0
Yes
R 1 0 -
911
U16
Yes
R/W
912 913
U16 U32
0 0
65535 +232-1
R/W R
Note!
The encoder or the tachogenerator must be in regulation mode Flux reg mode Voltage control and External control.
5/50
5 - Main functions
5.11 Configuration
CONFIGURATION
Output voltage Speed fbk sel Armature Max. out voltage 500 V
Motor
A H
CEMF
Tach generator
Enable fbk bypass Disabled
+
Tacho
Tacho scale 1
Speed fbk sel Tacho
Armature Fbk Bypass
Speed offset 0
XE1 connector
5 6
A+ AB+ BC+ C0V

Encoder 1 pulses 1024 Refresh enc 1 Disabled Encoder 1 state Enc 1 speed Speed fbk sel Encoder 1
Speed
Actual spd (d)
Encoder 1 Sinusoidal Encoder 1 Digital
8 1 3 4 7 9
5V XE2 connector A+
Encoder 2 state
5 6 8 1 3 4 7
Enable ind store Disabled
APD output PID
B+
Speed fbk sel
Index Storing
BC+ C0V 24
Encoder 2 pulses 1024 Refresh enc 2 Disabled
Encoder 2
Figure 5.11.4.1: speed feedback circuits.
Motor max speed
Maximum motor speed. Used to convert the values issued by Encoder 2 from the tachogenerator and armature voltage in tr/mn. In the case of armature voltage feedback, the Max out voltage parameter is considered equivalent to Motor max speed. This parameter must be programmed. Selection of type of feedback to be used. Encoder 1 Use of a sinusoidal encoder connected to XE1 connector. Encoder 2 Use of an incremental encoder connected to XE2 (standard) connector. Tacho Use of a tachogenerator connected to + and terminals. Armature The internal value of the armature voltage is used. No external connections are required.
Speed fbk sel
5/51
5 - Main functions
5.11 Configuration
CONFIGURATION
Enable fbk contr Validation of speed feedback control. Enabled Control enabled Disabled Control disabled This function controls speed feedback coherence, comparing armature voltage and the speed value read by the encoder or the tachogenerator. When a deviation higher than the value fixed using the Speed fbk error parameter is detected, the message Speed fbk loss displays. This function is automatically disabled when speed feedback is performed using armature voltage. (Speed fbk sel = Casing). Validation of automatic change-over to armature feedback when the error message Speed fbk loss begins. Enabled automatic change-over enabled Disabled automatic change-over disabled After automatic change-over to armature feedback, the speed regulator works using the Speed P bypass and Speed I bypass parameters from the REG PARAMETERS/Percent values/Speed regulator menu, and the part diverted from the speed regulator is automatically disabled. Please remember that speed regulator gains are considerably reduced in armature feedback mode. The error message Speed fbk loss should be configured to correspond to Activity=Warning. Change-over is only possible with a fixed DC field excitation current. Speed value as a % of Motor max speed at which the field weakening stage begins. The Flux weak speed parameter, when speed feedback control is enabled (Enable fbk contr = Enabled), is used to take into account the fact that, during field weakening, armature voltage and speed feedback signal are not proportional. If the motor is working with a constant torque over the entire range of regulation (Flux reg mode = Direct Current), the factory setting of 100% must be entered. For example, if field weakening is 2 a value of 50% should be entered in this parameter. Maximum error allowed, as a % of maximum output voltage (Max out voltage). By using E max Voltage, Flux weak speed and Motor max speed, a ratio between motor speed and armature voltage can be obtained. If there is a difference above Speed fbk error, a Speed fbk loss failure is detected and indicated. Fine calibration of the tachogenerator (Speed fbk sel = Tacho): return from the feedback product TD calculated as S4 switch divided by the actual TD feedback value at maximum speed. Offset calibration of the speed feedback circuit. Number of pulses per revolution of the sinusoidal encoder connected to XE1 connector. Number of pulses per revolution of the incremental encoder connected to XE2 connector. Encoder 2 pulses and Motor max speed torque should be within the zone authorised as per fig. 5.11.4.2.
Enable fbk bypas
Flux weak speed
Speed fbk error
Tacho scale
Speed offset Encoder 1 pulses Encoder 2 pulses
5/52
5 - Main functions
5.11 Configuration
CONFIGURATION
Vmax motor = f (encoder resolution)
10000
Vmax motor
6000 5000
4000 3000 2000
Al
lo
we
d ar ea
1000 900 800 700 600 500 400 300 200
100 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
900
1000
2000
3000
4000
Figure 5.11.4.2
Encoder 2 pulses
Refresh enc 1
Enables encoder 1 surveillance (XE1 connector). Enabled The sinusoidal encoder is controlled Disabled The sinusoidal encoder is not controlled In case of anomaly, the message Speed fbk loss will display. Status can be read by the Bus and the serial link via Encoder 1 state. The control is enabled by selecting the parameter Enable fbk contr=Enabled. Enables encoder 2 surveillance (XE2 connector). Enabled The incremental encoder is controlled Disabled The incremental encoder is not controlled In case of anomaly, the message Speed fbk loss will display. Status can be read by the Bus and the serial link via Encoder 2 state. The control is enabled by selecting the parameter Enable fbk contr=Enabled. Indicates the status of the connection between encoder 1 and XE1. The indication is enabled using Refresh enc 1. Indicates the status of the connection between encoder 2 and XE2. The indication is enabled using Refresh enc 2.
Refresh enc 2
Encoder 1 state Encoder 2 state
Note!
The parameters Tacho scale and Speed offset are used for the tachogenerator to perform accurate calibration of the speed feedback circuit. When the parameters set at the factory are loaded (Load default), these two parameters are not changed, so new calibration is not required.
The following parameters allow the user to determine absolute zero on the machine and to perform a position control using the optional DCVS5W04 application development and programming board. Enable ind store This parameter allows the user to read absolute zero pulse on the encoder (Top zero or zero cam signal) used in systems when performing position control. Enabled This adjustment enables Top Zero read-out. Disabled This adjustment disables Top Zero read-out. Encoder zero pulse control log. Data and function status log.
Ind store ctrl Index storing
5/53
5 - Main functions
5.11 Configuration
CONFIGURATION
Parameter Ind store ctrl [912]
Access (Read/Write) R/W -
Bit. No. 0-1 2 3
Name -
Description
Failure 0 -
4-5
6 7 8-9
Not used Indicates the polarity of the zero cam of the digital encoder (can): POLNLT 0 = Positive-going transition 1 = Negative-going transition Not used Indicates the level of the qualification signal which activates the read of the zero cam: 0 = OFF ENNQUAL 1 = OFF 2 = Passing signal = 0 3 = Passing signal = 1 Indicates the encoder to which the values of this parameter belong (from board Enc target DCVS5W04): 0 = the operations requested must be carried out on Encoder 1 Num 1 = the operations requested must be carried out on Encoder 2 Not used Controls the read function of the zero cam: 0 = OFF, function completely disabled ENNLT 1 = Once, activates only the first transition of the zero-cam 2 = Continuous, activates continuous read of the zero cam:
0 R/W 0
A6126fA
Parameter Index storing [913]
Bit. No.
Name
Description
Access (Read/Write) R
Failure
23
16-31
Indicates the encoder to which the values of this parameter belong (of the Enc source drive): 0 = the data contained in the parameter relating to encoder 1 Num 1 = the data contained in the parameter relating to encoder 2 Indicates the actual value of the qualifier signal in the Vecon input: MP_IN 0 = qualifier signal for low voltage rating 1 = qualifier signal for high voltage rating Status of acquisition function: 0 = OFF STATNLT 1 = Once, the acquisition has not yet been executed 2 = Once, the acquisition has already been executed 3 = Continuous Value of position counter corresponding to the zero cam. CNTNLT This value has a direction only when STANLT equals 2 or 3
0
A6126fB
5/54
5 - Main functions
5.11 Configuration
CONFIGURATION
5.11.5 Selection of Standard/American, Version SOFTWARE

Keyp. RS Term D/P
Factory
CONFIGURATION \ Drive type Drive size [A] 2B + E ON OFF Size selection 464 U16 0 1 American Standard Software version 331 Drive type 300 DCV94 DCV104 465 201 U16 U16 0 0 S 1 S OFF (0) S Yes Yes R R/Z 1 0 R/Z 1 0 R R 10 11 R -
Yes
Text U16
10
11
Yes -
R 10 11
Drive size
Displays DC drive armature current in amperes (encoded by switch S15 on the control board). The value given will depend on the Size selection parameter. Selection of DCV94 configuration +external field excitation. Only applies to DCV94-type DC drives. The function allows the DC drive to work with an external field excitation regulator. When the parameter is set to On the Ramp/Speed/T current references and speed measurements behave in exactly the same fashion as those of the DCV104 DC drive. By selecting Standard the DC drive can provide continuous rated current under normal environmental conditions with no overload. In America rated current is defined by taking into account a 1.5-times overload for a duration of 60 seconds. This implies a rated current reduction of the DC drive for the same type of device. Standard The DC drive can provide continuous rated current IdN. It is indicated as Drive size. No overload function is programmed. American Rated current is reduced and indicated in Full load current and in Drive size. The overload function is automatically enabled (FUNCTION\Overload control). It is programmed as follows:
Enable overload = ON Overload mode = Limited Overload time = 60s Full load current=American Pause time = 540s T current lim = 150% Overload current=150% T current lim+ = 150% Base current = 100% T current lim - = 150%
2B + E
Size selection
If American is selected, the Overcurrent thr [584] parameter is set to 160%.
5/55
5 - Main functions
5.11 Configuration
CONFIGURATION
Note! If the DC drive is reconfigured to Standard, these parameters and the rated current limit will automatically take up the values corresponding to this configuration (overload not in use) and the Overcurrent thr [584] parameter value will be 110%. Displays DC drive software version information. Displays the type of drive: 2B (2 quadrants) or 4B (4 quadrants).
Software version Drive type
5.11.6 Factor function (Dimension factor, Face value factor)

Keyp. RS Term D/P
CONFIGURATION \ Dimension fact Dim factor num Dim factor den Dim factor text Face value num Face value den 50 51 52 54 53 I32*** I32*** Text I16 I16 1 1 1 1 65535 +231 -1 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes R/Z R/Z R/Z R/Z R/Z R R R R
rpm CONFIGURATION \ Face value fact +32767 +32767 1 1
The factor function refers to two factors, the dimension factor and the face value factor. The two factors are defined as fractions. The dimension factor is used to specify DC drive speed in a measurement which is in relation to the associated machine, e.g. kg/h or m/min. The face value factor is used to increase resolution. Please see below some examples of calculations. Dim factor num Dim factor den Dim factor text Dimension factor numerator Dimension factor denominator Unit of the dimension factor (5 characters). This text appears on the display to specify the reference value. Characters allowed: / % & + , - . 0...9 : < = > ? A...Z [ ] a...z Face value factor numerator Face value factor denominator
Face value num Face value den
The reference value given, multiplied by the dimension factor and the face value factor defines motor speed in tr/mn
Dimension factor Face value factor
User defined variable
Dim factor num 1
Face value num 1
Control variable
X
Dim factor den 1
X
Face value den 1
Dim factor text rpm
Figure 5.11.6.1: Calculation using the Dimension and Face Value factors.
5/56
5 - Main functions
5.11 Configuration
CONFIGURATION
Example 2 of dimension factor calculation DC drive speed is given in m/s. The conversion rate is 0.01 m per revolution of the motor (Note: Face value factor = 1). The dimension factor is calculated on the basis of
output (tr/mn) Dimension factor = Input (here: m/s)
0.01 m refers to 1 revolution of the drive shaft 0.01 m/min (i.e. 0.01m / 60s) refers to 1 revolution motor/min
1 60s 6000 1 s Dimension factor = min 0.01 m 1 min m
When calculating the dimension factor, the units should not be reduced (1 min is not reduced to 60s) Dim factor num 6000 Dim factor den 1 Dim factor text m/s
Example 2 of dimension factor calculation The reference value for a bottling unit is given in bottles per minute. One revolution of the motor refers to the filling of 0.75 bottles. This corresponds to a dimension factor of 4/3 (1 / [3/4]) . The speed limitation and the ramp function are also given in bottles per minute.
output (tr/mn) Dimension factor = Input (here: bottles/s)
3/4 of a bottle corresponds to 1 revolution of the drive shaft

1 4 min Dimension factor = min 3 bottles 4 1 min 3 min bottles
Units should not be shortened to calculate the dimension factor. Dim factor dum 4 Dim factor den 3 Dim factor text bt/mn (bottles per minute)
Example of face value factor In principle, the reference value is a resolution of1 tr/mn. To increase resolution, the face value factor is used. The speed range of the motor required is, e.g. 0 ... 1500 rpm. A more accurate resolution can be obtained (e.g. a resolution of 1/20) by setting the face value factor to 1/20. Face value num 1 Face value den 20
5/57
5 - Main functions
5.11 Configuration
CONFIGURATION
5.11.7 Programmable faults
DCV series DC drives have extended monitoring functions. The effect of faults on the behavior of the DC drive is defined in the PROG ALARMS sub-menu. Save fault status Behaviour of the DC drive in the event of a fault Indication via the relays, earth terminals 35 and 36 (central alarm). The operational conditions of the relays may be defined using parameter Ok relay func in the CONFIGURATION menu. Automatic restart Fault acknowledgement
For certain alarms, the behavior of the DC drive can be configured separately. All alarms can be assigned to a programmable digital output.
Factory Alarm Failure Supply Undervoltage Overvoltage Heatsink Overtemp motor External fault Brake error I2t overload Overcurrent Field loss Speed fbk loss Opt 2 failure Bus loss Hw Opt 1 failure Enable seq err N. Activity Disable drive Disable drive Ignore Disable drive Disable drive Disable drive Disable drive Disable drive Ignore Disable drive Disable drive Disable drive Disable drive Disable drive Disable drive Latch ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Open OK relay ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Hold off time [ms] 0 0 100 0 0 8 0 Restart time [ms] 1000 0 0 0 0 0 T6160
Standard Dig. Outp.7* Dig. Outp.6* * * * * * Output.8* * * * * *
* This function can be assigned to one of the programmable digital outputs.
If the serial interface or system bus is used, the alarms may be differentiated using parameter Malfunction Code. The parameters required to configure the alarm are given in the table in Chapter 8 of this guide. Activity Warning Disable drive The fault does not cause the DC drive to go into safety mode. A warning signal can be assigned to a digital output. The fault cause the DC drive to lock immediately and the brake control relay to drop out if the Lifting function is enabled. The motor stops in freewheel mode if it is not fitted with brakes. If a fault occurs, the drive stops progressively according to the ramp determined in the RAMP / QUICK STOP menu. The DC drive is then locked and if the lifting function is enabled, the brake control relay drops out. If a fault occurs, the DC drive stops gradually according to the determined ramp. The DC drive is then locked and if the lifting function is enabled, the brake control relay drops out. When an alarm occurs, the DC drive brakes with the maximum possible current and if the Lifting function is enabled, the brake control relay drops out simultaneously. The DC drive is then locked when the motor stops.
Quick stop
Normal stop
Curr lim stop
5/58
5 - Main functions
5.11 Configuration
CONFIGURATION
Ignore The fault message is displayed only. No other action is possible. The fault is acknowledged via RESET.
Note!
No fault can cause a controlled shutdown of the drive.
The following table shows the options (Activity) available for dealing with each fault.
Alarm Failure Supply Undervoltage Overvoltage Heatsink Overtemp motor External fault Brake fault I2t overload Overcurrent Field loss Speed fbl loss Opt 2 failure Bus loss Hw Opt 1 failure Enable seq err
Ignore Warning Disable drive Quick stop Normal stop Curr lim stop
X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X -
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X -
X X X X X X X -
X X X X X X X T6165
Latch
ON
OFF
Ok relay open
ON OFF
The fault is put into memory. Programmed actions are executed (e.g. open the OK relay) The status remains in memory even after the fault has been corrected. A fault acknowledgement command is required before the DC drive can be restarted. The fault is not put into memory. Programmed actions are executed (e.g. open the OK relay) When the fault disappears, an acknowledgement is not required and the DC drive tries to restart by itself if its validation commands are present. If a fault appears with Latch = OFF, the display flashes. A fault causes the relay to drop out (earth terminals 35 and 36). A fault does not cause the OK relay to drop out.
Failure supply
fault on the control circuit power supply. Indicates a fault in the internal power supply of the regulation circuit. The Failure supply message is displayed if there is no voltage at control circuit earth terminals U2 and V2 even if the DC drive is enabled. A digital output can be assigned to this fault. Normal acknowledgement may be carried out. Undervoltage on the power circuit supply. When grid undervoltages occur, if the DC drive is locked (Enable drive = Enabled), the message Undervoltage appears. The DC drive is immediately locked. The undervoltage detection threshold is defined by means of the parameter Undervolt thr. If the fault is not held in memory (Latch = OFF), when the grid returns, the DC drive tries to restart automatically. If the Auto capture function in the ADD SPEED FUNCT menu is active, the output from the ramp is fixed at the value corresponding to the actual speed allowing the motor to be restarted on the fly. This avoids a sudden possibly large speed jog on the motor and the associated system.
Undervoltage
5/59
5 - Main functions
5.11 Configuration
CONFIGURATION
Overvoltage Armature overvoltage The fault appears when the armature voltage exceeds 20% of the value determined using parameter Max out voltage. The Auto capture function, with its restrictions can also be applied in this case. By default, this fault is ignored (Ignore). If management of this fault is enabled, the setting of Max out voltage must be checked. Heatsink temperature too high This fault always locks the DC drive 10 seconds after it is detected (Latch=ON) An external controller (API etc.) can read this fault via a programmable digital output, RS485 serial link or Bus and can carry out a controlled shutdown in under 10 seconds. Motor temperature too high (connection of a PTC probe: earth terminals 78/79). External fault (no voltage on terminal 15) Mechanical brake fault. - The DC drive has not managed to establish the selected torque within the time specified by the Brake max time parameter - The brake feedback has not been received within the allotted time - The brake feedback remains for 1 second after the closure order has been given to it. This fault becomes active when the I2t accumulator parameter reaches 100%. If this is configured so as to lock the DC drive, then the armature current is not reduced when the type of overload control is configured in I2t mode. Overcurrent (short-circuit / ground fault). The fault appears when the armature current exceeds the threshold set using parameter Overcurrent thr. Energizing current too low. The fault appears when the energizing current is below 50% of the value set using parameter Flux current min. This alarm message is only enabled when the DC drive is unlocked (Enable drive = Enabled). Speed feedback absent. When Activity = Warning in the CONFIGURATION/Speed fbk menu is chosen, parameter Enable fbk bypass must be configured as Enabled, otherwise the motor reaches an uncontrolled speed. Time delay between the detection of a fault and the activation of the programmed action. This parameter works like a filter. If the fault is still present when the time has elapsed, the programmed action is carried out. If Latch=Off and the fault situation it still there, even after the time defined by parameter Restart time, the fault is put into memory and it is not possible to carry out a restart. Note! To acknowledge a fault in command mode, the validation and startup terminals on the terminal block must be at zero . The appearance of a fault is displayed on the keyboard. In mode Latch = ON, an acknowledgement command is required. This may be obtained by pressing the CANCEL key. If a second fault occurs before the first has been acknowledged, the text Multiple failures is displayed. In this
Heatsink
Overtemp motor External Fault Brake fault
I2t overload
Overcurrent
Field loss
Speed fbk loss
Hold off time
Restart time
5/60
5 - Main functions
5.11 Configuration
CONFIGURATION
case, acknowledgement can only be carried out using parameter Failure reset in the SPEC FUNCTIONS menu. Acknowledgement can then be carried out by pressing the ENT key with the DC drive locked. Opt2 failure Bus loss Hw opt1 failure Enable seq err Fault on Option 2 board. Fault in the connection to the field bus (only with the optional CANopen board). Fault on Option 1 board. Incorrect DC drive startup sequence. The correct sequence is as follows: Case a: Main command = Terminal block 12345Power up the DC drive control: terminal 12 (Enable drive) in any state Initialise DC drive: maximum time 5 seconds. End of initialization. Terminal 12 must be at zero. Time during which the Enable terminal must at zero: 1 sec. Unlock DC drive. Terminal 12 is in state 1.
If at the end of the initialization of the DC drive (phase 3) or during the 1 sec delay, terminal 12 is at state 1, an error is detected.
Reg. board power up
Drive Init
Enable drive terminal 12
H L
min 1 s
t [s]
Figure 5.11.7.1: DC drive unlocking sequence: Main command= terminals.
Case b: Main command = Digital Power up the DC drive control: borne 12 (Enable drive) in any state. 2Initialise DC drive: maximum time 5 seconds. 3End of initialization. 4Time during which terminal 12 must at zero and Enable Drive [314] = Disabled (State 0): 1 sec. During this time Process Data Channel is initialized. 5Unlock DC drive: Terminal 12 is in state 1 and Enable Drive [314] = Enabled (State 1). If at the end of the initialization of the DC drive (phase 3) or during the 1 sec delay, terminal 12 (Enable) is at state 1 and Enable drive [314] = Disabled (0), an error is detected. 1-
5/61
5 - Main functions
5.11 Configuration
CONFIGURATION
Reg. board power up
Drive init.
Proc.data ch. init.
Logic status terminal 12
1 0
min 1 s
t [s]
Figure 5.11.7.2: DC drive unlocking sequence: Main command = Digital.
In the event of a fault, the reset sequence is as follows: Case a: Latch = ON 1234Force terminal 12 to zero Force Enable drive [314] = Disable (0) If Mains command = Terminals, force terminal 13 (Start/Stop) to zero Carry out an acknowledgement command. The fault is acknowledged and the DC drive can work normally.
Case b: Latch = OFF 1Force terminal 12 to zero and Enable Drive [314] = Disabled (State 0) for at least 30 ms. The fault is automatically acknowledged.
Note! In the event of a fault, the OK relay is influenced only if OK relay funct = Drive healthy. If OK relay funct= Ready to start, the DC drive will, however, be locked.
5/62
5 - Main functions
5.11 Configuration
CONFIGURATION
5.11.8 Serial communication configuration (set serial comm)

Keyp. RS Term D/P
CONFIGURATION \ Set serial comm Device address Ser answer delay Ser protocol sel SLINK3 MODBUS RTU JBUS Ser baudrate sel 19200 9600 4800 2400 1200 319 408 323 U16 U16 U16 0 0 0 255 900 2 0 0 SLINK3 (0) Yes Yes Yes R/Z R/W R/W 0 1 2 R/W 0 1 2 3 4 -------
326
U16
9600 (1)
Yes
--
---
Note:
SLINK3 is the default communication protocol for the DC drive enabling communication with the optional DCVCNF100 implementation and configuration software. The baud rate is fixed at 9600 for SLINK3.
The configuration modes of the serial communication are defined in the Set serial comm submenu. Note! A change in protocol is only recognised by the DC drive when its control circuit is powered on again (Init) and the new protocol saved beforehand using the Save parameters command. The address of the DC drive is accessible if it is connected by means of the RS485 interface. Setting of the minimum delay between reception of the last byte by the DC drive and the start of its response. This delay avoids conflicts on the serial link if the RS485 interface of the master is not configured for automatic Tx/Rx switching. The parameter is only relevant with the RS485 standard serial link. if the Tx/Rx switching delay for the master is set to the maximum of 20ms, the setting of parameter Ser answer delay will become slightly greater than 20ms: 22ms. Serial protocol selection. Choice of transmission speed (baudrate) - except SLINK3
Device address Ser answer delay
Example:
Ser protocol sel Ser baudrate sel
5/63
5 - Main functions
5.11 Configuration
CONFIGURATION
5.11.9 Password
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Factory
CONFIGURATION Pword 1 85 I32 0 99999 Yes W -
Passwords are available to the user to protect unauthorized access to parameters. Pword 1 Protects the parameters entered by the user from unauthorized changes. It allows failure resets (Failure reset) and changes to the keyboard of the Control mode even if bus mode operation was selected (Control mode= Bus). The password can be freely defined by the user as a combination of 5 digits.
Activation of Pword 1: - Select Pword 1 in the CONFIGURATION menu - Indicates if the password is active (Enabled) or not (Disabled) - If not, press ENT and enter the password (see commissioning). - Press ENT a second time. The keyboard indicates that the password is enabled (Enabled). - The password change must be saved using the Save parameters command. Proceed as follows to unlock Pword 1: - Select Pword 1 in the CONFIGURATION menu - Indicates if the password is active (Enabled) or not (Disabled) - If it is enabled, press ENT and enter the digit combination which forms the password - press ENT again. The fact that the password is disabled is now displayed. (Disabled) - This configuration must be saved using the Save parameters command so that the password remains disabled while the DC drive control is powered off then subsequently powered on. When an incorrect password is entered, the message Password wrong is displayed. When the DC drive signals a EEPROM fault, the password is deleted. This happens on the first recommissioning after a version change to the DC drive software. When delivered, by default the Service menu of the DC drive is protected by password Password 2. No Pword 1 has been entered. The user has access to all parameters. Password 2 cannot be disabled. Note! If password Pword 1 has been forgotten it can be disabled using the universal password 51034. This password is activated in the same way as described above.
5/64
5 - Main functions
5.12 I/O configuration
I/O CONFIGURATION
2 1
Assignment of digital, analog and encoder inputs and outputs
20 19
Sortie analogique 3 Commun sortie analog. 3 Sortie analogique 4 Commun sortie analog. 4 Com. sortie TOR (DCVS5V62) Sortie TOR 5 Sortie TOR 6 Sortie TOR 7 Sortie TOR 8 Alim. sorties TOR (DCVS5V62) Entre TOR 5 Entre TOR 6 Entre TOR 7 Entre TOR 8 Commun entre TOR (DCVS5V62)
XB
DCVS5V62
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Analog input 2
Figure 5.12.1: disposition of programmable inputs and outputs.
DCV DC Drives give the option of assigning the input and output terminals to preselected functions. Apart from the earth terminals whose functions cannot be changed; the following terminal functions can be changed: Enable drive (12), Start (13) , Fast stop (14) and External fault (15) This can be carried out using the keyboard, the optional DCVCNF100 implementation software or by using the optional CANopen DCVS5Z27 communication board The programmable inputs/outputs are factory-set to the most commonly required functions. However, these can be changed to the users requirements. Inputs/outputs are distributed on the DC drive as follows: 3 Differential analog inputs (1...3) 2 Analog outputs (1 and 2) with common reference point 4 Digital outputs (1...4) with common reference point and common voltage supply 4 Digital outputs (1...4) with common reference point. When in addition to these, other digital and/or analog inputs/outputs are required, the optional DCVS5V62 board must be used and inserted into the DC drives control board. Only one DCVS5V62 board may be installed per DC drive (see figure): Optional DCVS5V62 board: 2 Analog outputs (3 and 4) with common reference point 4 Digital outputs (5...8) with common reference point and common voltage supply 4 Digital outputs (5...8) with common reference point. Note! If a parameter is assigned to a particular input, the value of the parameter (e.g. speed reference value) may not be input using the keyboard or by communication.
Analog input 1
Analog input 3
ENC 1
ENC 2
Sortie analogique 1 Commun sortie analog. 1 Sortie analogique 2 Commun sortie analog. 2 Com. sortie TOR Sortie TOR 1 Sortie TOR 2 Sortie TOR 3 Sortie TOR 4 Alim. sorties TOR Entre TOR 1 Entre TOR 2 Entre TOR 3 Entre TOR 4 Commun entre TOR
integrated
5/65
5 - Main functions
I/O CONFIGURATION
5.12.1 Analog Outputs
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
I/O CONFIG \ Analog outputs \ Analog output 1 Select output 1 66 U16 0 93 Actual speed Yes R/Z -
Scale output 1 Select output 2 (Select like output 1) Scale output 2 Select output 3 (Select like output 1) Scale output 3 Select output 4 (Select like output 1) Scale output 4
62 67 63 68 64 69 65
Float U16 Float U16 Float U16 Float
-10.000 +10000 0 I/O CONFIG \ Analog outputs \ Analog output 2 0 93 Motor current (16)
R/W R/Z R/W R/Z R/W R/Z R/W
-10.000 +10000 0 I/O CONFIG \ Analog outputs \ Analog output 3 0 93 Flux (27) (F)
-10.000 +10000 0 I/O CONFIG \ Analog outputs \ Analog output 4 0 -10.000 93 +10000 Output voltage (20) 0 (F)
(F) = Optional DCVS5V62 board must be present.
Select output XX
Assigned parameter selected as variable to the corresponding analog output. The following assignments may be made:
OFF 1) [0] Speed ref 1 1) [1] Speed ref 2 1) [2] Ramp ref 1 1) [3] Ramp ref 2 1) [4] Ramp ref 1) [5] Speed ref 1) [6] Ramp Output 1) [7] Actual speed (rpm) 1) [8] T current ref 1 2) [9] T current ref 2 2) [10] T current ref 2) [11] Speed reg out 2) [15] Motor current 2) [16] Output voltage 3) [20] Analog Input 1 4) [24] Analog Input 2 4) [25] Analog Input 3 4) [26] Flux current 5) [27] Pad 0 6) [31] Pad 1 6) [32] Pad 4 6) [33] Pad 5 6) [34] Flux reference 7) [35] Pad 6 6) [38] PID Output 6) [39] Out vlt level 3) [79] Flux current max 5) [80] F act spd (rpm) 1) [81] F T curr (%) 2) [82] Spd draw out 9) [84] Output power 10) [88] Roll diameter [89] Act tension ref [90] Torque current [91] W reference [92] Actual comp [93] Brake current [94]
5/66
5 - Main functions
I/O CONFIGURATION
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
With a calibration factor of 1, the output provides 10V when the reference value or speed corresponds to the value defined by Speed base value. With a calibration factor of 1, the output provides 10V when the reference or the current corresponds to the rated armature current IdN. With a calibration factor of 1, the output provides 10V when the voltage corresponds to the value in volts defined in the parameter Max out voltage. With a calibration factor of 1, the output provides 10V when the voltage reaches 10V on the analog input (where the scaling factor and Tune value of the input = 1). See figure 5.12.1.1 With a calibration factor of 1, the output provides 10V when the energizing current corresponds to Nom flux curr. With a calibration factor of 1, the output provides 10V when the value of the word is 2047. With a calibration factor of 1, the output provides 10V when the energizing current reference corresponds to Nom flux curr. For maximum full scale values, refer to Chapter 5.16.3 Function PID. With a calibration factor of 1, the output provides 10V when the value of Speed ratio is equal to 20000. With a calibration factor of 1, the output provides 5V to the rated power given by: Full load current * Max out voltage.
Scale output XX
Calibration of the analog output concerned
Control card analog outputs
DCVS5V62 card analog outputs

D A AO3 C 1 ACOM
Scale output 3 1
1 2
Select output 1 Actual spd (rpm)
D A AO1 C 1 ACOM
Scale output 1 1
1 2
Select output 3 Flux current
Select output 2 Motor current
D A AO2 C 2 ACOM
Scale output 2 1
3 4
Select output 4 Output voltage
D A AO4 C 2 ACOM
Scale output 4 1
3 4
Figure 5.12.1.1: Functional diagram of analog outputs.
Example of estimation of calibration factor Scale output xx You have a device with a digital display showing you the drive speed. The instrument has a measuring range from 0 to 2 V. This means that at maximum speed, a maximum voltage of 2V is required at the DC drives analog output. A calibration factor of 1 provides 10V (see note 1). Calibration factor = 2 V / 10 V = 0.200 Note! Using a DCV104 DC drive (4 quadrants), the analog output provides a dual polarity voltage of +/- 10V
5/67
5 - Main functions
I/O CONFIGURATION
5.12.2 Analog Inputs
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
I/O CONFIG \ Analog inputs \ Analog input 1 Select input 1 An in 1 target Not assigned Assigned Input 1 type -10V ... + 10 V 0...20 mA, 0...10 V 4...20 mA Input 1 sign Positive Negative Scale input 1 Tune value inp 1 Auto tune inp 1 Auto tune Input 1 filter [ms] Input 1 compare Input 1 cp error Input 1 cp delay Input 1 cp match Input 1=thr.val. Input 1 not thr.val. Offset input 1 70 295 U16 U16 0 0 31 1 Ramp 0 Term. 1/2 Yes Yes R/Z R/W 1 0 R/Z 0 1 2 R/W 1 0 R/W R/W C/W 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R 1 0 R/W ID H L R/W 1 0 -
71
U16
10 V
Yes
389
U16
(E)
Yes
72 73 259 792 1042 1043 1044 1045
Float Float U16 U16 I16 U16 U16 U16
-10.000 0.100
10.000 10.000
1.000 1.000
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
QD H L ID L H -
R/W 1 0 R/W R
0 -10000 0 0 0
1000 +10000 10000 65000 1
0 0 0 0 -
(D)
74
I16
U16 U16
-32768 +32767 0 I/O CONFIG \ Analog inputs \ Analog input 2

0 0 31 1 OFF (0) 0 Term. 3/4
Yes
Yes Yes
R/W 0 1 -
Select input 2 75 (Select like Input 1) An in 2 target 296 Assigned Not assigned Input 2 type 76 -10V ... + 10 V 0...20 mA, 0...10 V 4...20 mA Input 2 sign 390 Positive Negative Scale input 2 77 Tune value inp 2 78 Auto tune inp 2 260 Auto tune Offset input 2 79
R/Z R/W 0 1 R/Z 0 1 2 R/W 1 0 R/W R/W C/W 1 R/W
U16
10 V
Yes
U16
(E)
Yes
Float Float U16 I16
-10.000 0.100
10.000 10.000
1.000 1.000
Yes Yes Yes Yes
R/W 1 0 -
-32768
+32767
5/68
5 - Main functions
I/O CONFIGURATION
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Factory
I/O CONFIG \ Analog inputs \ Analog input 3 Select input 3 80 (Select like Input 1) An in 3 target 297 Not assigned Assigned Input 3 type 81 -10V ... + 10 V 0...20 mA, 0...10 V 4...20 mA Input 3 sign 391 Positive Negative Scale input 3 82 Tune value inp 3 83 Auto tune inp 3 261 Auto tune Offset input 3 84 U16 U16 0 0 31 1 OFF (0) 0 Term. 5/6 Yes Yes R/Z R/W 1 0 R/Z 0 1 2 R/W 1 0 R/W R/W C/W 1 R/W ID H L R/W 1 0 -
U16
10 V
Yes
U16
(E)
Yes
Float Float U16 I16
-10.000 0.100
10.000 10.000
1.000 1.000
Yes Yes Yes Yes
R/W 1 0 -
-32768
+32767
(D) = This parameter can be assigned to a programmable digital output. (E) = This parameter may be assigned to a programmable digital input.
Select input XX
Select parameter whose value is to be assigned to an analog input. The following assignments may be made:
OFF 1) [0] Jog reference 1) [1] Speed ref 1 1) [2] Speed ref 2 1) [3] Ramp ref 1 1) [4] Ramp ref 2 1) [5] T current ref 1 2) [6] T current ref 2 2) [7] Adap reference 1) [8]
1)
T current limit 2) [9] T current lim + 2) [10] T current lim - 2) [11] Pad 0 3) [12] Pad 1 3) [13] Pad 2 3) [14] Pad 3 3) [15] Load comp [19] PID Offset 0 4) [21]
PI central v3 4) [22] PID feed-back 4) [23] Flux current max [25] Out vit level [26] Speed ratio [28] Tension red [29] Tension ref [30] Preset 3 [31] Brake ref [32]
An in XX target Input XX type
With a calibration factor of 1 and Tune value inp XX = 1, 10 V or 20 mA on the input, corresponds to Speed base value. 2) With a calibration factor of 1 and Tune value inp XX = 1, 10 V or 20 mA on the input, corresponds to maximum possible armature current. 3) With a calibration factor of 1, 10V or 20 mA on the input, corresponds to the word value of 2047. 4) For maximum full scale values, refer to Chapter 5.16.3 Function PID. 5) With a calibration factor of 1.0 and Tune value inp XX = 1, 10 V or 20 mA corresponds to Speed ratio = 20000. Enables the assignment of the analog input. Selects input type (input current or voltage)
5/69
5 - Main functions
I/O CONFIGURATION
The jumpers on the control board must be adapted according to the nature of the input signals used. The analog inputs of the DC drive are factory-configured for voltage signals. ON = jumper installed OFF = no jumper
Input signal Analog input Analog input 1 Analog input 2 Analog input 3 -10 V ... + 10 V 0 - 10 V S9 = OFF S10 = OFF S11 = OFF 0 - 20 mA 4 - 20 mA S9 = ON S10 = ON S11 = ON
T6185f-en
-10 V...+10 V
A maximum voltage of 10 V is applied to the analog input concerned. If the signal is used as a reference value, a reverse polarity can be used to reverse the direction of rotation of the drive (only with DCV104 DC drives). DCV94 DC drives only accept positive speed references. Negative references are not recognized and the DC drive does not start up. A maximum voltage of 10 V or a current signal of 0...20 mA is applied to the analog input concerned. This signal must be positive. If the signal is used as a reference value for DCV104 DC drives, the direction of rotation may be reversed using the Input XX sign + and Input XX sign - parameters. A current signal of 4...20 mA is applied to the analog input concerned. This signal must be positive. If the signal is used as a reference value for DCV104 DC drives, the direction of rotation may be reversed using the Input XX sign + and Input XX sign - parameters.
0-10V, 0-20mA
4-20 mA
Input XX sign Input XX sign +
Selects direction of rotation using the serial link or CANopen bus for DCV104 four-quadrant DC drives. Selects clockwise rotation by command to the terminal block for DCV104 DC drives when the reference value is only given with one polarity. State 1 Clockwise direction selected Status 0 Clockwise direction not selected. Selects anti-clockwise rotation by command to the terminal block for DCV104 DC drives when the reference value is only given with one polarity. Status 1 Anticlockwise direction selected Status 0 Anti-clockwise direction not selected. Calibration of the corresponding analog input Example: The reference value of the speed of an DC drive is defined using an external voltage of 5V. With this value, the DC drive should reach the maximum allowed speed (implemented using Speed base value).
Input XX sign -
Scale input XX
5/70
5 - Main functions
I/O CONFIGURATION
With the Scale input XX parameter, the calibration factor has the value 2 (10V: 5V). Tune value inp XX Precise setting of the input when the maximum signal does not correspond exactly to the fixed value. See the example below. Example: An external analog reference only reaches a maximum of 9.8V instead of 10V. With the Tune value inp XX parameter, the calibration factor has the value 1,020 (10V: 9.8V). The same result can be obtained using the Auto tune inp XX function described below. Suitable parameters having been entered in the menu using the keyboard, the maximum analog value (in this case 9.8V) being present on the earth terminals with a positive polarity. When the function is enabled using the ENT key, the input is self-tuned.
Auto tune inp XX
Input 1 filter Offset inp XX
Automatic precise setting. If this command is given, Tune value inp XX is automatically selected such that the input signal corresponds to the maximum variable value such as Speed base value. Two conditions are required for precise automatic calibration: - Input voltage greater than 1V or input current greater than 2mA - Positive polarity The value found is automatically calculated for the anti-clockwise direction for DCV104 DC drives. Note: The value calculated automatically can be, if necessary changed manually using Tune value inp XX. Filters on the measurement from analog input 1. If the analog signal has an offset or if the variable assigned to the input already has a value in spite of the absence of an input signal, this can be compensated by Offset inp XX.
The DC drive is factory-set with the following analog values: +10V/-10V. If a parameter is already assigned internally, (e.g. if Speed ref 1 is automatically connected to the output ramp when the ramp is enabled) it will no longer be shown in the List of parameters able to be assigned to an analog input. Parameters Input XX sign + and Input sign - cannot be sent via a serial link!
5/71
5 - Main functions
I/O CONFIGURATION
Digital reference
Select input 1 Ramp ref 1 Input 1 type -10V ... +10V
Tune value inp 1 1
Auto tune inp 1 0
Ref_1+
F HW input type
1 2 Ref_1-
+ -
Volts
Select input 1 Ramp ref 1 Input 1 cp error 0
An in 1 target
Scale input 1 1
Input 1 filter 0 ms
Window comparator
Offset input 1 0
Input 1 compare 0
Input 1 cp match
Select input 2 OFF Input 2 type -10V ... +10V Tune value inp 2 1 Auto tune inp 2 0 Input 1 cp delay 0 ms
Ref_2+ 3 4 Ref_2HW input type
Digital reference
+ -
Volts
F
Scale input 2 1 Offset input 2 0 An in 2 target
Select input 2 OFF
Digital reference
Select input 3 OFF Input 3 type -10V ... +10V Ref_3+ Tune value inp 3 1 Auto tune inp 3 0 Select input 3 OFF
5 6 Ref_3-
HW input type
+ Offset input 3 0
Volts
F
An in 3 target
Scale input 3 1
Figure 5.12.2.1: Analog inputs.
Hysteresis comparator on Analog Input 1. This function is used to associate the variable Input 1 cp match to a reference value detection window on analog input window 1. Input 1 compare Input 1 cp error Input 1 cp delay Comparison threshold. Tolerance range around Input 1 compare. Adjustable time delay in milliseconds for Input 1 cp match moving from status 0 to status 1.
5/72
5 - Main functions
I/O CONFIGURATION
Input 1 cp match The reference is within the tolerance range. This parameter can be read using the serial link or digital output assigned to this parameter. Status 1 The value of Analog input 1 is inside the tolerance range. Status 0 The value of Analog input 1 is outside the tolerance range.
Input 1 cp error 0
Window comparator
Input 1 compare 0
Input 1 cp match
Input 1 cp delay 0 ms
Figure 5.12.2.2: Window comparator.
Note!
The values of parameters Input 1 compare and Input 1 cp error are calculated as follows: Input 1 compare = (Comparison value) * 10000 / (Total value of field) Input 1 error = (Half of the tolerance value) * 10000 / (Total value of the field)
Example 1: Select analog input 1 = Ramp ref 1 Speed base value =1500 [rpm] 10 Volt or 20 mA on Analog Input 1 (Ramp ref 1= Speed base value). The application requires a signal at 700 [rpm] through a digital output with a tolerance equal to 100 [rpm]. Input 1 cp match assigned to a programmable digital output. Input 1 compare = 700 * 10000 / 1500 = 4667 Input 1 cp error = 100 * 10000 / 1500 = 666 Example 2: Select analog input 1 = Ramp ref 1 Speed base value =1500 [rpm] 10 Volt or 20 mA on Analog Input 1 (Ramp ref 1= Speed base value). The application requires a signal at -700 [rpm] through a serial link with a tolerance equal to 100 [rpm]. Input 1 compare = -700 * 10000 / 1500 = -4667 Input 1 cp error = 100 * 10000 / 1500 = 666
5/73
5 - Main functions
I/O CONFIGURATION
Example 3: Select analog input 1 = Pad 0 10 Volt or 20 mA on Analog Input 1 corresponds to Pad 0= 2047. The application requires a signal at 700 [points] through a digital output with a tolerance equal to 50 [points] Input 1 cp match assigned to a programmable digital output. Input 1 compare = 700 * 10000 / 2047 = 3420 Input 1 cp error = 50 * 10000 / 2047 = 244 Example 4: Select analog input 1 = PID feedback 10 Volt or 20 mA on Analog Input 1 corresponds to PID feedback= 10000 [points]. The application requires a signal at 4000 [points] through a digital output with a tolerance equal to 1000 [points] Input 1 cp match assigned to a programmable digital output. Input 1 compare = 4000 * 10000 / 10000 = 4000 Input 1 cp error = 1000 * 10000 / 10000 = 1000 Example 5: Select analog input 1 = T current lim 10 Volt or 20 mA on Analog Input 1 corresponds to T current lim = 100 [%] The application requires a signal at a value of 50[%] through a digital output with a tolerance equal to 2 [%] Input 1 cp match assigned to a programmable digital output. Input 1 compare = 50 * 10000 / 100 = 5000 Input 1 cp error = 2 * 10000 / 100 = 200
5/74
5 - Main functions
I/O CONFIGURATION
5.12.3 Digital Outputs
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
I/O CONFIG \ Digital outputs Digital output 1 Inversion out 1 145 1267 U16 U16 0 0 61 1 Ramp + Disabled Yes Yes R/Z R/W 1 0 R/Z -
Enabled Disabled Digital output 2 146 (Select like output 1) Inversion out 2 1268 Enabled Disabled Digital output 3 147 (Select like output 1) Inversion out 3 1269 Enabled Disabled Digital output 4 148 (Select like output 1) Inversion out 4 1270 Enabled Disabled Digital output 5 149 (Select like output 1) Inversion out 5 1271 Enabled Disabled Digital output 6 150 (Select like output 1) Inversion out 6 1272 Enabled Disabled Digital output 7 151 (Select like output 1) Inversion out 7 1273 Enabled Disabled Digital output 8 152 (Select like output 1) Inversion out 8 1274 Enabled Disabled Relay 2 629 (Select like output 1) Inversion relay 2 1275 Enabled Disabled U16 U16 0 0 61 1
(0) Ramp (9) Disabled (0) Spd thr. (2) Disabled (0) Overld avail. (6) Disabled (0) Curr lim. State (4) Disabled (0) Overvolt (12) Disabled (0) Undervolt(11) Disabled (0) Overcurr (14) Disabled (0) Stop ctrl (23) Disabled (0)
Yes Yes
U16 U16
0 0
61 1
Yes Yes
R/W 1 0 R/Z R/W 1 0 R/Z R/W 1 0 R/Z R/W 1 0 R/Z R/W 1 0 R/Z R/W 1 0 R/Z R/W 1 0 R/Z R/W 1 0
U16 U16
0 0
61 1
Yes Yes
U16 U16
0 0
61 1
Yes Yes
U16 U16
0 0
61 1
Yes Yes
U16 U16
0 0
61 1
Yes Yes
U16 U16
0 0
61 1
Yes Yes
U16 U16
0 0
61 1
Yes Yes
5/75
5 - Main functions
I/O CONFIGURATION
Control card digital outputs
26
Digital output 1 Ramp + Inversion out 1
DCVS5V62 card digital outputs

Digital output 5 Curr limit state
6
Inversion out 5
D01 COM_DO
25
D05 COM_DO
27
Digital output 2 Ramp Inversion out 2
D02 COM_DO
Digital output 6 Overvoltage
7
Inversion out 6
25
D06 COM_DO
Digital output 3 Spd threshold
28
Inversion out 3
D03 COM_DO
Digital output 7 Undervoltage
8
Inversion out 7
25
D07 COM_DO
Digital output 4 Overld available
29
Inversion out 4
D04 COM_DO
Digital output 8 Overcurrent
9
Inversion out 8
25
D08 COM_DO
Control card relay outputs

75
Inversion relay 2 Relay 2 Stop control
R2NO R2COM
76
35
Ok relay func. Drive healthy
R1NO R1COM
36
Figure 5.12.3.1: Digital outputs.
Digital output XX
Selection of parameter which is assigned to the digital output concerned. The following assignments may be made:
OFF [0] Speed zero thr [1] Spd threshold [2] Set speed [3] Curr limit state [4] Drive ready [5] Overld available [6] Overload state [7] Ramp + [8] Ramp - [9] Speed limited [10] Undervoltage [11] Overvoltage [12] Heatsink [13]
*)
Overcurrent [14]] Overtemp motor [15] External fault [16] Failure supply [17] Pad A bit [18] Pad B bit [19] Virt dig input [20] Torque sign [21 Stop control [23] Field loss [24] Speed fbk loss [25]] BUS loss [26] Hw opt1 failure [28] Opt2 failure [29]
Encoder 1 state [30] Encoder 2 state [31] Enable seq err [35] Diameter calc st *) [38] Input 1 cp match [49] Diam reached [58] Spd match compl [59] Acc state [60] Dec state [61] Brake command [62] Brake failure [63] ChangeSetup [64] Ovrld prealarm[65] I2t ovrld failure [66]
= See Chapter 5.16.3 PID Function
Inversion out XX
With these parameters, it is possible to reverse the logic of the digital outputs. Selection of parameters which can be assigned to relay 2 (ground terminals 75 and 76).
Relay 2
Note!
With regard to the retrieval logic on relay failures: Output = Relay contact down and open: Output = Relay contact up and closed: Failure No failure
5/76
5 - Main functions
I/O CONFIGURATION
5.12.4 Digital Inputs
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
I/O CONFIG \ Digital inputs Digital input 1 137 U16 0 83 OFF Yes R/Z -
Inversion in 1 Enabled Disabled Digital input 2 (Select like input 1) Inversion in 2 Enabled Disabled Digital input 3 (Select like input 1) Inversion in 3 Enabled Disabled Digital input 4 (Select like input 1) Inversion in 4 Enabled Disabled Digital input 5 (Select like input 1) Inversion in 5 Enabled Disabled Digital input 6 (Select like input 1) Inversion in 6 Enabled Disabled Digital input 7 (Select like input 1) Inversion in 7 Enabled Disabled Digital input 8 (Select like input 1) Inversion in 8 Enabled Disabled
1276
U16
Disabled (0) OFF (0) Disabled (0) OFF (0) Disabled (0) OFF (0) Disabled (0) OFF (0) Disabled (0) OFF (0) Disabled (0) OFF (0) Disabled (0) OFF (0) Disabled (0)
Yes
138 1277
U16 U16
0 0
83 1
Yes Yes
R/W 1 0 R/Z R/W 1 0 R/Z R/W 1 0 R/Z R/W 1 0 R/Z R/W 1 0 R/Z R/W 1 0 R/Z R/W 1 0 R/Z R/W 1 0
139 1278
U16 U16
0 0
83 1
Yes Yes
140 1279
U16 U16
0 0
83 1
Yes Yes
141 1280
U16 U16
0 0
83 1
Yes Yes
142 1281
U16 U16
0 0
83 1
Yes Yes
143 1282
U16 U16
0 0
83 1
Yes Yes
144 1283
U16 U16
0 0
83 1
Yes Yes
5/77
5 - Main functions
I/O CONFIGURATION
Control card digital inputs
31 11
DCVS5V62 card digital inputs
*
DG1+ 35 DG132 DG2+
Inversion DI1 DI1 OFF
*
DG5+ 15 DG512
DG6+
35 DG233 DG3+
15 DG613
DG7+
35 DG334 DG4+
15 DG714
DG8+
35 DG4-
15 DG8-
Figure 5.12.4.1: Digital inputs.
Digital input XX
Selection of parameter assigned to the digital input concerned. The following assignments may be made:
OFF [0] Motor pot reset [1] Motor pot up [2] Motor pot down [3] Motor pot sign +[4] Motor pot sign - [5] Jog +[6] Jog - [7] Failure reset [8] Torque reduct [9] Ramp out = 0 [10] Ramp in = 0 [11] Freeze ramp [12] Lock speed reg [13] Lock speed I [14] Auto capture [15] Input 1 sign +1) [16] Input 1 sign - 1) [17] Input 2 sign +1) [18] Input 2 sign - 1) [19] Input 3 sign + 1) [20] Input 3 sign - 1) [21] Zero torque [22] Speed sel 0 [23]
1)
Speed sel 1 2) [24] Speed sel 2 2) [25] Ramp sel 0 3) [26] Ramp sel 1 3) [27] Field loss [29] Enable flux reg [30] Enable flux weak [31] Pad A bit 0 [32] Pad A bit 1 [33] Pad A bit 2 [34] Pad A bit 3 [35] Pad A bit 4 [36] Pad A bit 5 [37] Pad A bit 6 [38] Pad A bit 7 [39] Forward sign [44] Reverse sign [45] An in 1 target [46] An in 2 target [47] An in 3 target [48] Enable droop [49] Enable PI PID 4) [52] Enable PD PID 4) [53] PI integral freeze 4) [54]
PID offs. Sel 4) [55] PI central vs0 4) [56] PI central vs1 4) [57] Diameter calc 4) [58] Diam reset [68] Diam calc Dis [69] Torque winder EN [70] Line acc status [71] Line dec status [72] Line fstp status [73] Speed match [74] Diam inc/dec En [75] Wind/unwind[76] Diam preset sel0 [77] Diam preset sel1 [78] Taper enable [79] Speed demand En [80] Winder side [81] Enable PI-PD PID [82] Jog TW enable [83] Brake fbk [84] Setup1/Setup2 [85]
Inversion in XX
Parameters Input xx sign + and Input XX sign - can only be used together. 2) Parameters Speed sel 0, Speed sel 1 and Speed sel 2 can only be used together. (see 5.14.3). 3) Parameters Ramp sel 0 and Ramp sel 1 can only be used together. (see 5.14.4). 4) See paragraph 5.16.3 PID Function. With these parameters, it is possible to reverse the logic of the digital inputs.
5/78
5 - Main functions
I/O CONFIGURATION
5.12.5 Speed reference from an encoder (Tach. feed. function)

Keyp. RS Term D/P
I/O CONFIG \ Encoder inputs Select enc 1 OFF Speed ref 1 Speed ref 2 Ramp ref 1 Ramp ref 2 Select enc 2 OFF Speed ref 1 Speed ref 2 Ramp ref 1 Ramp ref 2 Encoder 1 pulses Encoder 2 pulses Refresh enc 1 Enabled Disabled Refresh enc 2 Enabled Disabled 1021 U16 0 5 1020 U16 0 5 OFF (0) Yes R/Z 0 2 3 4 5 R/Z 0 2 3 4 5 R/Z R/Z R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 -
OFF 0
Yes
416 169 649
Float* Float* U16
600 150 0
9999 9999 1
1024 1024 Disabled (0) Disabled (0)
Yes Yes Yes
R R -
652
U16
Yes
Encoder 2 XE2 connector

5 6 8 1 7
Encoder 1 XE1 connector

5 6 8
Select enc 2 OFF
A+ AB+ B0V
A+ AB+ B0V
Select enc 1 OFF
1 7 9
24
Figure 5.12.5.1: Encoder reference.
5V
This configuration enables the Encoder inputs to be used as speed reference. Compared to an analog-type input, these inputs show a resolution and immunity to a high interference levels. When using encoder inputs (connectors XE1 or XE2), it is necessary to define the destination of the reference speed with which they are to be associated (Ramp ref 1, Speed ref 1, etc.).
5/79
5 - Main functions
I/O CONFIGURATION
Notes! When the encoder is used as speed feedback, it is not possible to use the encoder input as speed reference. The same reference speed selection cannot be configured on the encoder input and an analog input at the same time. When the encoder input is not configured as speed feedback, this input can still not be used as speed reference. The allowable configurations are listed in the following table:
Speed fbk sel [414] Encoder 1 Encoder 2 Tacho Armature Encoder 1 as reference Not available Available Not available Available Encoder 2 as reference Not available Not available Available Available
T0727f-en
WARNING!
The DC drive accepts all configurations. The user must comply with the configurations shown in this table. Choice of destination parameter to which encoder inputs 1 or 2 refer. The OFF state indicates that the encoder is not used as speed reference and that it can therefore be used as speed feedback (menu CONFIGURATION/Speed fbk sel). The choice of the destination of the speed reference must be made in compliance with the DC drive configuration (for example Speed ref 1 cannot be used with an active ramp). Number of pulses per revolution for encoders 1 or 2. Note! Take care not to exceed a frequency of 150 KHz on encoder inputs! Activation of the test which notes the presence of signals A, B, Aneg, Bneg on encoder 1 or 2.
Select enc 1 (2)
Encoder 1 (2) pulses
Refresh enc 1 (2)
5/80
5 - Main functions
5.13 Add speed function
ADD SPEED FUNCTION
Auto Capture, Adaptive spd reg, speed thresholds

The Auto capture function allows the DC drive to restart a motor on the fly.
5.13.1 Auto capture
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
ADD SPEED FUNCT Auto capture ON OFF 388 U16 OFF 0

(E)
Yes
R/W 1 0
ID H L
Auto capture
ON
When the DC drive is switched on, the motor speed is measured and the ramp output automatically adjusted accordingly. The DC drive then runs to the set reference value. OFF When the DC drive is switched on, the ramp starts from zero. Main uses: - Connection of the DC drive to a motor that is already turning due to its load (e.g. pumps). - Restarting after a failure. If the speed reference is defined with the ramp and Auto capture = ON, it starts at a reference value corresponding to the speed of the motor.
Note!
If the Auto capture function is not enabled, ensure that the motor is not turning when the DC drive is switched on. Otherwise, this can cause sudden deceleration of the motor due to current limitation.
5/81
5 - Main functions
ADD SPEED FUNCTION
5.13.2 Adaptive spd reg

Parameter No.
The adaptive speed regulator function allows different speed regulator gains, depending on the speed or another variable (Adap reference). This allows optimal adaptation of the speed regulator to the application.
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Factory
ADD SPEED FUNCT \ Adaptive spd reg Enable spd adap Enabled Disabled Select adap type Adap reference Speed Adap reference Adap speed 1 [%] Adap speed 2 [%] Adap joint 1 [%] Adap joint 2 [%] Adap P gain 1 [%] Adap I gain 1 [%] Adap P gain 2 [%] Adap I gain 2 [%] Adap P gain 3 [%] Adap I gain 3 [%] 181 U16 0 1 Disabled (0) Speed (C) Yes R/Z 1 0 R/Z 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W -
182
U16
Yes
183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193
I16 Float Float Float Float Float Float Float Float Float Float
-32768 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
+32767 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00
1000 20.3 40.7 6.1 6.1 10.00 1.00 10.00 1.00 10.00 1.00
IA -
R/W -
Enable spd adap
Enabled Disabled
Adaptive speed regulator function enabled. Function not enabled. The regulator operates with the parameters set in the REG PARAMETERS menu. The parameters of the regulator are modified according to the speed. The parameters of the regulator are modified according to the Adap reference parameter.
Select adap type
Speed Adap reference
Adap reference
Value of the parameter according to which the speed regulator parameters are modified (only where Select adap type = Adap reference). The first set of parameters (Adap P gain 1, Adap I gain 1) is valid below the Adap speed 1 threshold, the second set of parameters (Adap P gain 2, Adap I gain 2) is valid above this threshold. The transition behaviour between the values is defined by the Adap joint 1 parameter. The definition is expressed as a % of Speed base value or the maximum value of Adap reference. The second set of parameters (Adap P gain 2, Adap I gain 2) is valid below the Adap speed 2 threshold. The third set of parameters (Adap P gain 3, Adap I gain 3) is valid above this threshold. The transition between the values is defined by the Adap joint 2 parameter. The definition is expressed as a % of Speed base value or the maximum value of Adap reference. Defines a range around Adap speed 1 where there is a linear change in gains from set 1 to set 2 to avoid jogging of the speed regulator.
Adap speed 1
Adap speed 2
Adap joint 1
5/82
5 - Main functions
ADD SPEED FUNCTION

Adap joint 2 Adap P gain 1 Adap I gain 1 Adap P gain 2 Adap I gain 2 Adap P gain 3 Adap I gain 3 Defines a range around Adap speed 2 where there is a linear change in gains from set 2 to set 3 for the same reasons. Proportional gain of the range, from zero to Adap speed 1. Defined as a % of Speed P base. Integral gain for the range, from zero to Adap speed 1. Defined as a % of Speed I base. Proportional gain of the range, from Adap speed 1 to Adap speed 2. Defined as a % of Speed P base. Integral gain of the range, from Adap speed 1 to Adap speed 2. Defined as a % of Speed I base. Proportional gain of the range above Adap speed 2. Defined as a % of Speed P base. Integral gain of the range above Adap speed 2. Defined as a % of Speed I base.
To enable the adaptive speed regulator function, it must be enabled using the Enable spd adap parameter. In the majority of cases, the adaptive speed regulator function is linked to the speed of the motor. However, it can be varied by another variable, defined by the Adap reference parameter. This must be selected with the Select adap type parameter. The Adap speed 1 and Adap speed 2 parameters are used to define the three ranges with different gains. The Adap joint 1 and Adap joint 2 parameters ensure a smooth transition between the different sets of parameters. The transition ranges must be defined in such a way that Adap joint 1 and Adap joint 2 do not overlap. When the adaptive speed regulator function is enabled, (Enable spd adap = Enabled) the Speed P and Speed I parameters have no effect. Nonetheless, they retain their value and are restored whenever the adaptive speed regulator function is disabled. Note! When the motor is not enabled, the gains of the speed regulator are determined by speed zero logic. See Chapter 5.7.2
Adap joint 1 6.1 %
Adap joint 2 6.1 %
Adap P gain 1 10 %
Adap I gain 1 1 %
Adap P gain 2 10 %
Adap I gain 2 1 %
Adap P gain 3 10 %
Adap I gain 3 1 %
Adap speed 1 20.3 %
Adap speed 2 40.7 %
Adap reference 1000 rpm
Figure 5.13.2.1: Adaptive speed regulator function.
5/83
5 - Main functions
ADD SPEED FUNCTION
5.13.3 Speed control
This function is used to handle and signal two cases: 1) When a specific adjustable speed is not exceeded. 2) When the speed corresponds to the set reference value.
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Parameter
No.
Factory
ADD SPEED FUNCT \ Speed control Spd threshold + Spd threshold Threshold delay [ms] Spd threshold Speed not exceeded Speed exceeded Set error Set delay [ms] Set speed Speed = ref. val. Speed not ref. val. 101 102 103 393 U16 U16 U16 U16 1 1 0 0 32767 32767 65535 1 1000 1000 100 Dig. Output 3 (D) 100 100 (D) Yes Yes Yes R/W R/W R/W R 1 0 R/W R/W R 1 0 QD H L QD H L R 1 0 R 1 0
104 105 394
U16 U16 U16
1 1 0
32767 65535 1
Yes Yes -
Case 1 Spd threshold + Spd threshold Threshold delay Spd threshold Maximum speed threshold for clockwise rotation of the drive, in the unit defined by the factor function. Maximum speed threshold for anti-clockwise rotation of the drive, in the unit defined by the factor function. Sets a delay in milliseconds for enabling the Spd threshold variable when the speed falls below the set threshold. Indication that the threshold has been exceeded via a programmable digit output. Status 1 Speed not exceeded Status 0 Speed exceeded
Case 2 Set error Set delay Set speed Defines a tolerance range around the speed reference in the unit defined by the factor function. Sets a delay in milliseconds for enabling of the Set speed variable when the speed is in the tolerance ranged set by Set error. Indication via a programmable digital output Status 1 When the speed corresponds to the reference value Status 0 When the speed does not correspond to the reference value
5/84
5 - Main functions
ADD SPEED FUNCTION
Spd threshold + 1000 rpm
Actual spd (rpm) Spd threshold
Spd threshold 1000 rpm
Threshold delay 100 ms
Speed ref Set error 100 rpm
Set speed
Actual spd (rpm)
Set delay 100 ms
Figure 5.13.3.1: Indication of Speed not exceeded (above) and Speed corresponds to the reference value (below).
Note:
The use of a digital output assigned to the Spd threshold variable permits detection of motor overspeed. However, this information is not regarded as a failure by the DC drive and does not, under any circumstances, rule out installation of appropriate overspeed detection devices, as required by the EC Machinery Directive. The message Speed corresponds to the reference value refers to the total reference value of the Speed ref speed regulator or Ramp Ref ramp when this is selected. When reference values are below 1%, the signal is always at Status 0!
5/85
5 - Main functions
ADD SPEED FUNCTION
5.13.4 Speed zero
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
ADD SPEED FUNCT \ Speed zero Speed zero level 107 Speed zero delay [ms] 108 Speed zero thr 395 Drive rotating Drive not rotating U16 U16 U16 1 0 0 32767 65535 1 10 100 (D) Yes Yes R/W R/W R 1 0 QD H L R 1 0
Speed zero level
Speed zero detection threshold. The value refers to both rotation directions for DCV104 DC drives. Defined by the unit specified by the factor function. Sets a delay in milliseconds, when speed zero is reached. Indication of non-zero speed via a programmable digital output Status 1 Motor running Status 0 Motor off
Speed zero delay Speed zero thr
Speed Speed zero level [107]
Speed zero thr [395]
Speed zero delay [108]

Figure 5.13.4.1: Speed zero.
Note:
The LED n = 0 is lit up on the display when the motor is not running. The use of a digital output assigned to the Spd zero thr variable permits detection of speed zero of the motor. However, this information is not sufficient to guarantee individual safety in the event of sudden motor movement. It is the users responsibility to protect against this risk by installing devices appropriate for the required level of safety.
5/86
5 - Main functions
5.14 Functions
FUNCTIONS
Motorised Motor potentiometer, jog, multi-speed, multi-ramp, slip, overload control, stop modes, l armature based on the speed
5.14.1 Motor potentiometer

Parameter No.
The motor potentiometer function permits motor speed adjustment at the touch of a key. The speed is increased or decreased according to the set ramp time.
Format min Value max Factory Standard Configurat. Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
FUNCTIONS \ Motor pot Enable motor pot Enabled Disabled Motor pot oper Motor pot sign Positive Negative Motor pot reset Motor pot up Acceleration No acceleration Motor pot down Deceleration No deceleration 246 I16 0 1 Disabled (0) 247 248 I16 0 1 Positive (1) (G) Yes Yes Yes R/Z 1 0 R/W 1 0 Z/C(1) R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 -
ID
249 396
U16 U16
(E) (E)
Yes
397
U16
(E)
ID (H) ID H L ID H L
R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0
(G) = This parameter can only be accessed through a programmable digital input.
Speed limited
Min Speed Limit
Speed min amount 0 rpm Ramp ref 1 0 rpm Speed min pos 0 rpm
Ramp Reference + +
Enab motor pot Ramp output (d)
F
Enab multi spd

F
Speed min neg 0 rpm

Multi speed function
Motor potentiometer function Speed t
Ramp ref 2
0 rpm
Ramp ref (d)
Motor pot down No Decrease
Motor pot up No Increase
Motor pot sign +
Drive
Motor pot sign -
Motor pot reset
DCVS5V62
35
31
32
33
34
15
19
+24V
0V 24
18
Digital input 1
Digital input 2
Digital input 3
Digital input 4
Down
Sign+
Figure 5.14.1.1: Example of external activation of motor potentiometer function.
Reset
Up
Sign-
Digital input 1
COM D I/O
11
5/87
5 - Main functions
5.14 Functions
FUNCTIONS
If a single rotation direction is sufficient, the + sign and - sign signals are not necessary. Enable motor pot Enabled Disabled Motor pot oper Enabling of the motor potentiometer function. The ramp receives its analog reference value from the motor potentiometer function. The motor potentiometer function is disabled.
The + and - keys on the display keyboard can be used to accelerate or decelerate the motor. + Accelerate Decelerate This parameter can only be accessed using the keyboard, the serial interface or the CANopen board. When the DC drive is operated from the terminal block, the parameters Motor pot sign + and Motor pot sign - must be used. For DCV94 DC drives, the Positive function must be selected. Positive Clockwise rotation selected Negative Anti-clockwise rotation selected Only for DCV104. Selection of clockwise rotation when the operating from the terminal block. The Motor pot sign + parameter is linked to the Motor pot sign - parameter by a XOR function. This means that the command (+24V) must only be given to one of the two terminals. Status 1 Clockwise rotation selected Status 0 Clockwise rotation not selected Only for DCV104. Selection of anti-clockwise rotation when operating from the terminal block. The Motor pot sign - parameter is linked to the Motor pot sign + parameter by a XOR function. This means that the command (+24V) must only be given to one of the two terminals. Status 1 Anti-clockwise rotation selected. Status 0 Anti-clockwise rotation not selected. When the reset command of the motor potentiometer is activated and the DC drive is switched off, it restarts at speed zero. This command is only possible when the DC drive is switched off. The motor is accelerated according to the preselected ramp. This command is issued either from the terminal block, the serial interface, or the CANopen board. The motor is decelerated according to the preselected ramp. This command is issued either from the terminal block, the serial interface, or the CANopen board.
Motor pot sign
Motor pot sign +
Motor pot sign -
Motor pot reset
Motor pot up
Motor pot down
When the motor potentiometer function is enabled (Enable motor pot), the current speed analog reference value is displayed in the Motor pot submenu. The speed can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the Motor pot up command, and from 100 to 0% using the Motor pot down command. If the command is issued when the DC drive has already stopped, it will not restart in the opposite direction. If the Motor pot up and Motor pot down commands are given at the same time, the speed analog reference value will not change. The last speed reference is memorised when the DC drive is blocked, or if there is a failure. When restarted, it accelerates to this speed reference according to the ramp set. If the Motor pot reset command is given when the DC drive is switched off, the speed analog reference value is erased and the DC drive restarts at speed zero. If the Motor pot sign command is changed during operation, the motor will slow down and then reverse its direction of rotation, according to the specified ramp times. To use the motor potentiometer function, the ramp must be enabled and the Start command will be necessary for starting.
5/88
5 - Main functions
5.14 Functions
FUNCTIONS
5.14.2 Jog function

Keyp. RS Term D/P
Factory
FUNCTIONS \ Jog function Enable jog Enabled Disabled Jog operation Jog selection Ramp input Speed input Jog reference Jog + Forwards jog No jog forwards Jog Backwards jog No backwards jog 265 375 U16 0 1 244 I16 0 1 Disabled (0) 0 Yes R/Z 1 0 R/Z 1 0 R/W R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 -
Yes Yes
266 398
I16 U16
0 0
32767 1
(C) (E)
Yes
399
U16
(E)
IA ID H L ID H L
R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0
(C) = This parameter may be assigned to a programmable analogue input. (E) = This parameter may be assigned to a programmable digital input.
Start/Stop Stop drive Enable jog Enabled Jog selection Speed Input Speed ref 1 0 rpm Start/Stop Stop drive Enable jog Enabled Jog selection Speed Input
Speed ref 1 (%)

Speed ref (d) Percent ref var
Ramp Ramp ref (rpm) F F
Speed limits
Speed Regulator
Jog reference 100 rpm Speed ref 2 0 rpm
Speed ref 2 %
Speed ref Speed ref (d) Speed ref (%)
Jog + No Forward Jog Jog No Backward Jog
DRIVE
+24V 0V 24
COM D I/O
19
18
35 31
Digital input 1
32 33
Digital input 2 Digital input 3
34
Digital input 4
Figure 5.14.2.1: Example of external Jog without ramp activation.
Jog +
Jog -
5/89
5 - Main functions
5.14 Functions
FUNCTIONS
Enable jog Enabled Disabled Jog operation Enabling of Jog function (this selection is only possible if the DC drive is blocked). The Jog function is disabled
The + key on the keyboard is used to give commands for jogging the motor in a clockwise rotation direction. On DCV104 DC drives, the anti-clockwise direction command is given by pressing the - key. + Jog, clockwise rotation Jog, anti-clockwise rotation Analog reference value for Jog function. Defined by the unit specified by the factor function. This parameter determines whether the Jog function reference goes through the ramp or whether it is sent directly to the speed regulator. Speed input The jog reference is not ramped. Ramp input The jog reference is sent through the set ramp. Status 1 Status 0 Clockwise jog when the Jog function is enabled and no Start command is present. Disabled Anti-clockwise jog for the DCV104 when the jog function is enabled and no Start command is present. Disabled
Jog reference Jog selection
Jog +
Jog -
Status 1 Status 0
Note:
The following signals are necessary for the Jog function, in addition to the Jog + and Jog - commands: - Enable drive - Fast Stop - External fault
The jog speed corresponds to the value defined by the Jog reference parameter. In this case, the ramp is not used. The jog analog reference value can only be enabled by the Jog + or Jog - command, if there is no Start command present and if the output voltage of the DC drive is zero. If the Start command is given as well as the Jog +- and Jog - commands, the jog mode will be aborted and the DC drive will respond to the Start command. When using the keyboard, the + and - keys can be used in the Jog function menu (for DCV104 only). For this, select Jog operation in the menu. Warning! Note! If the correction value Speed ref 2 is not zero, it is also enabled when operating in Jog mode. If the Stop control function is enabled, the Jog stop control parameter must be set to ON (1) to enable Jog function.
5/90
5 - Main functions
5.14 Functions
FUNCTIONS
5.14.3 Multi speed function

Parameter No.
The multi speed function allows the programming of up to seven internally-stored speed analog reference values, using a combination of three digital input statuses.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
FUNCTIONS \ Multi speed fct Enab multi spd Enabled Disabled Multi speed 1 Multi speed 2 Multi speed 3 Multi speed 4 Multi speed 5 Multi speed 6 Multi speed 7 Speed sel 0 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 400 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 U16 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 0 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 1 153 I16 0 1 Disabled (0) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Dig. input 5 (E) Dig. input 6 (E) Dig. input 7 (E) 0 Yes R/Z 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W -
Value 2 0 selected Value 2 0 not selected Speed sel 1 401 Value 2 1 selected Value 2 1 not selected Speed sel 2 402 Value 2 2 selected Value 2 2 not selected Multispeed sel 208
ID H L ID H L ID H L ID
R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W
U16
U16
U16
Yes
5/91
5 - Main functions
5.14 Functions
FUNCTIONS
Speed limited
Min Speed Limit
Speed min amount 0 rpm Ramp ref 1 0 rpm Speed min pos 0 rpm Enab motor pot
Ramp Reference Ramp output (d) + +
Enab multi spd F
Ramp ref 1
Multispeed function
Speed min neg 0 rpm Ramp ref 2 0 rpm Ramp ref (d)
Ramp ref 2
Motor potentiometer function

Speed sel 2 Bit 2 Not Selected
DCVS5V62
11
19
18
12
15
13
Digital input 7
Digital input 5
20
Figure 5.14.3.1: Multi speed.
Enab multi spd Multi speed 1 Multi speed 2 Multi speed 3 Multi speed 4 Multi speed 5 Multi speed 6 Multi speed 7
Digital input 6
21 22
Digital input 8
COM D I/O
0V 24
+24V
14
Enabled Disabled
Multi speed function enabled Multi speed function disabled
Analog reference value 1. Defined in the unit specified by the factor function. Analog reference value 2. Defined in the unit specified by the factor function. Analog reference value 3. Defined in the unit specified by the factor function. Analog reference value 4. Defined in the unit specified by the factor function. Analog reference value 5. Defined in the unit specified by the factor function. Analog reference value 6. Defined in the units specified by the factor function. Analog reference value 7. Defined in the unit specified by the factor function.
5/92
5 - Main functions
5.14 Functions
FUNCTIONS
Speed sel 0 Selection of analog reference value with bit weight 20 (=1). This parameter can only be used with Speed sel 1 and Speed sel 2. Status 1 20 (=1) Status 0 0 Selection of analog reference value with bit weight 21 (=2). This parameter can only be used with Speed sel 0 and Speed sel 2. Status 1 21 (=2) Status 0 0 Selection of analog reference value with bit weight 22 (=4). This parameter can only be used with Speed sel 0 and Speed sel 1. Status 1 22 (=4) Status 0 0 This is the word representing the three parameters Speed sel 1 (bit0), Speed sel 2 (bit1) and Speed sel 3 (bit2). It is used to change the speed reference selection by changing a single parameter instead of three. This allows the instantaneous selection of different speeds either through the serial link or the CANopen board.
Speed sel 1
Speed sel 2
Multi speed sel
The table and graph below illustrate the association between selection status and the corresponding analog reference value.
Speed sel 0 Bit 0 Not Selected Speed sel 1 Bit 1 Not Selected Speed sel 2 Bit 2 Not Selected
REFERENCE
Ramp ref 1 0 rpm + Ramp ref 2 0 rpm
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Multi speed 1 0 rpm
Multi speed 2 0 rpm
Multi speed 3 0 rpm
Multi speed 4 0 rpm
Multi speed 5 0 rpm Enable multi spd Disabled Multi speed sel. 0 Ramp ref (d) 0 rpm
Multi speed 6 0 rpm
Multi speed 7
Multi speed 0
Multi speed 6
2 1
Multi speed 1
Multi speed 2
Multi speed 3
Multi speed 4
Multi speed 5
6 0
Speed sel 0 Speed sel 1 Speed sel 2

Figure 5.14.3.2: Preselected Multi speed function
Multi speed 7
7
5/93
5 - Main functions
5.14 Functions
FUNCTIONS
The multi speed function must be enabled by the Enab multi spd parameter before it can be used. The analog reference values are selected using the keyboard, the serial interface or with the setup and programming software. The analog reference values are signed so that they can be defined for a particular direction of motor rotation. For DCV94 DC drives, the polarity of the reference must be positive. When the multi speed function is enabled, Multi speed 0 is defined by the addition of the reference values Ramp ref 1 and Ramp ref 2.
5/94
5 - Main functions
5.14 Functions
FUNCTIONS
5.14.4 Multi ramp function

Parameter No.
The Multi ramp function allows the programming of up to four different ramps using a combination of two digital inputs. The acceleration and deceleration times can be defined separately.
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Factory
FUNCTIONS \ Multi ramp fct Enab multi rmp Enabled Disabled Ramp selector Acc delta speed0 Acc delta time 0 [s] S acc t const 0 [ms] Dec delta speed0 Dec delta time 0 [s] S dec t const 0 [ms] Acc delta speed1 Acc delta time 1 [s] S acc t const 1 [ms] Dec delta speed1 Dec delta time 1 [s] S dec t const 1 [ms] Acc delta speed2 Acc delta time 2 [s] S acc t const 2 [ms] Dec delta speed2 Dec delta time 2 [s] S dec t const 2 [ms] Acc delta speed3 Acc delta time 3 [s] S acc t const 3 [ms] Dec delta speed3 Dec delta time 3 [s] S dec t const 3 [ms] Ramp sel 0 202 659 660 665 661 662 666 23 24 667 31 32 668 25 26 669 33 34 670 27 28 671 35 36 672 403 U16 U32 U16 Float U32 U16 Float U32 243 I16 0 1 Disabled Yes R/Z 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 -
(0) 0 3 0 FUNCTIONS \ Multi ramp fct \ Ramp 0 \ Acceleration 0 100 232-1 0 65535 1 100 3000 300 FUNCTIONS \ Multi ramp fct \ Ramp 0 \ Deceleration 0 0 100 232-1 0 65535 1 100 3000 300 FUNCTIONS \ Multi ramp fct \ Ramp 1 \ Acceleration 1 0 0
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
ID ID H L ID H L
R/W R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0
100 232-1 U16 0 65535 1 Float 100 3000 300 FUNCTIONS \ Multi ramp fct \ Ramp 1 \ Deceleration 1 100 232-1 U16 0 65535 1 Float 100 3000 300 FUNCTIONS \ Multi ramp fct \ Ramp 2 \ Acceleration 2 U32 0 100 232-1 U16 0 65535 1 Float 100 3000 300 FUNCTIONS \ Multi ramp fct \ Ramp 2 \ Deceleration 2 U32 0 100 232-1 U16 0 65535 1 Float 100 3000 300 FUNCTIONS \ Multi ramp fct \ Ramp 3 \ Acceleration 3 U32 0 U32 U16 Float U32 U16 Float U16 100 232-1 0 65535 1 100 3000 300 FUNCTIONS \ Multi ramp fct \ Ramp 3 \ Deceleration 3 0 0 0 100 0 232-1 65535 3000 1 100 1 300 (E)
Value 2 0 selected Value 2 0 not selected Ramp sel 1 404 Value 2 1 selected Value 2 1 not selected
U16
(E)
(E) This parameter can be assigned to a programmable digital input.
5/95
5 - Main functions
5.14 Functions
FUNCTIONS
Reference Ramp
Ramp inp
Ramp out
Enab multi rmp
Single ramp
Speed
Multi Ramp Function
Ramp sel 0 Bit 0 Not Selected
Ramp sel 1 Bit 1 Not Selected
DCVS5V62
15
+24V 19
0V 24 18
COM D I/O
11
12
DI7
13
DI5
Figure 5.14.4.1: Selection of different ramps on the terminal block.

Reference Ramp
DI6
DI8
14
Enab multi rmp Linear
Single ramp
Ramp shape selection
Ramp shape F Acc delta speed 3 100 rpm Acc delta speed 2 100 rpm Acc delta speed 1 100 rpm Acc delta speed0 100 rpm t S dec t const 0 300 ms S dec t const 1 300 ms S dec t const 2 300 ms S dec t const 3 300 ms Acc delta time 0 1 s Acc delta time 1 1 s Acc delta time 2 1 s Acc delta time 3 1 s Dec delta time 0 1 s Dec delta time 1 1 s Dec delta time 2 1 s Dec delta time 3 1 s Speed Multi Ramp Function Dec delta speed 3 100 rpm Dec delta speed 2 100 rpm Dec delta speed 1 100 rpm Dec delta speed0 100 rpm
S-shape
S acc t const 0 300 ms S acc t const 1 300 ms S acc t const 2 300 ms S acc t const 3 300 ms
Figure 5.14.4.2: Choice of different ramps using the keyboard or serial interface.
5/96
5 - Main functions
5.14 Functions
FUNCTIONS
Enab multi rmp Ramp selector Enabled Disabled Multi ramp function enabled. Multi ramp function disabled.
This is the word representing the two parameters Ramp sel 0 (bit0), Ramp sel 1 (bit1). It is used to change the ramp selection by changing a single parameter instead of two. This allows the instantaneous selection of different ramps either through the serial interface or through the CANopen board. Selection of ramp with bit weight 20 (=1). This parameter can only be used together with Ramp sel 1. Status 1 20 (=1) Status 0 0 Selection of ramp with bit weight 21 (=2). This parameter can only be used together with Ramp sel 0. Status 1 21 (=2) Status 0 0 Increase in acceleration speed of ramp 0. Defined by the unit specified by the factor function. Increase in acceleration time of ramp 0. Defined in seconds. Defines the acceleration curve for S-shaped ramp 0. Defined in ms. Decrease in deceleration speed of ramp 0. Defined by the unit specified by the factor function. Increase in deceleration time of ramp 0. Defined in seconds. Defines the deceleration curve for S-shaped ramp 0. Defined in ms. Increase in acceleration speed of ramp 1. Defined by the unit specified by the factor function. Increase in acceleration time of ramp 1. Defined in seconds. Defines the acceleration curve for S-shaped ramp 1. Defined in ms. Decrease in deceleration speed of ramp 1. Defined by the unit specified by the factor function. Increase in deceleration time of ramp 1. Defined in seconds. Defines the deceleration curve for S-shaped ramp 1. Defined in ms. Increase in acceleration speed of ramp 2. Defined by the unit specified by the factor function. Increase in acceleration time of ramp 2. Defined in seconds. Defines the acceleration curve of S-shaped ramp 2. Defined in ms. Decrease in deceleration speed of ramp 2. Defined by the unit specified by the factor function. Increase in deceleration time of ramp 2. Defined in seconds. Defines the deceleration curve of S-shaped ramp 2. Defined in ms.
Ramp sel 0
Ramp sel 1
Acc delta speed 0 Acc delta time 0 S acc t const 0 Dec delta speed 0 Dec delta time 0 S dec t const 0 Acc delta speed1 Acc delta time 1 S acc t const 1 Dec delta speed1 Dec delta time 1 S dec t const 1 Acc delta speed 2 Acc delta time 2 S acc t const 2 Dec delta speed 2 Dec delta time 2 S dec t const 2
5/97
5 - Main functions
5.14 Functions
FUNCTIONS
Acc delta speed 3 Acc delta time 3 S acc t const 3 Dec delta speed 3 Dec delta time 3 S dec t const 3 Increase in acceleration speed of ramp 3. Defined by the unit specified by the factor function. Increase in acceleration time of ramp 3. Defined in seconds. Defines the acceleration curve of S-shaped ramp 3. Defined in ms. Decrease in deceleration speed of ramp 3. Defined by the unit specified by the factor function. Increase in deceleration time of ramp 3. Defined in seconds. Defines the deceleration curve for S-shaped ramp 3. Defined in ms.
The table below illustrates the correspondence between selection status and the corresponding ramp.
Ramp sel 0 Ramp 0 Ramp 1 Ramp 2 Ramp 3 Status 0 Status 1 Status 0 Status 1
Ramp sel 1 Status 0 Status 0 Status 1 Status 1

T6242f
The Multi ramp function must be enabled by the Enab multi rmp parameter before use. The ramp values are selected using the keyboard, the serial interface or with the set-up and commissioning software.
5/98
5 - Main functions
5.14 Functions
FUNCTIONS
5.14.5 Speed Draw
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
FUNCTIONS \ Speed draw Speed ratio Speed draw out (d) Speed draw out (%) 1017 1018 1019 I16 I16 Float 0 -32768 -200.0 +32767 +32767 +200.0 +10000 (C) (A) Yes Yes Yes R/W R R IA QA R/W R/W -
(A) This parameter can be assigned to a programmable analog output. (C) This parameter can be assigned to a programmable analog input.
Speed ratio 10000
From Ramp output
Enable ramp T
Speed ratio 10000
To Max speed limits
+
Speed ref 2 0 rpm
Speed ref 1 0 rpm
Speed draw out
Figure 5.14.5.1: Speed draw function
This function allows application of a configurable speed ratio (Speed ratio) to the main reference Speed ref 1. The Speed ratio value can be set from 0 to 32767 if defined in digital form. It can be set from 0 to 20000 (0 to +10V) if assigned by an analog input. This function is useful in sectional systems when a draw value is required between the different motors used (see example in Figure 5.14.5.2). The resulting speed reference value can be read through the Spd draw out parameter through a programmable analog output. Speed ratio This parameter defines the value of the speed ratio. This setting can be carried out through the serial interface, the CANopen board, or through an analog input. Output speed value of the function specified by the factor function. Output speed value of the function as a % of Speed base value.
Spd draw out (d) Spd draw out (%)
5/99
5 - Main functions
5.14 Functions
FUNCTIONS
E.g.: Cross-section
Master = 1000 rpm
1050 rpm
1100 rpm
Drive A
An. input 1
Drive B
An. input 1 2 1
Drive C
An. input 2
Line speed ratio 1 = +5%
Line speed ratio 2 = +10%
+
Speed Ratio = 5.25V (10500 count)
+
Speed Ratio = 5.5V (11000 count)
+
Line speed
Figure 5.14.5.2: Cross-section.
DC drive A (master) Set analog input 1 = Ramp ref 1 DC drive B Slip 1 = Line Spd Ref + 5% Set analog input 1 = Ramp ref 1 Set analog input 2 = Speed ratio Set Speed ratio parameter = 10500 DC drive C Slip 2 = Line Spd Ref + 10% Set analog input 1 = Ramp ref 1 Set analog input 2 = Speed ratio Set Speed ratio parameter = 11000
5/100
5 - Main functions
5.14 Functions
FUNCTIONS
5.14.6 Overload control
Overload control permits an overload higher than the rated current of the DC drive, for a limited time only. It is used to allow a transient overtorque during acceleration or braking (DCV104 only), or to provide the peak torques needed with piston loads. So as not to exceed the heat loss capacity (power Imt) of the DC drive and connected material (circuit-breaker, inductors, switch, ...), the limits in Chapters 2.2.2 and 2.2.3 of this guide must be observed for setting the Overload control function parameters.
No. Format min Value max Standard Configurat. Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Parameter
Factory
FUNCTIONS \ Overload contr Enable overload 309 Enabled Disabled Overload mode 318 Curr limited Curr not limited I2t Overload current [%] 312 313 Base current [%] Overload time [s] Ovrld prealarm I2t accumulator Pause time [s] Overld available Overload possible Overload not possible Overload state Current > limit value Current limit value 310 1289 655 311 406 U16 0 1 I16 0 1 Disabled (0) Curr limited (0) Yes Yes R/Z 1 0 R/W 0 1 2 R/W R/W R/W R R R/W R 1 0 R 1 0 -
U16 U16 U16 U16 Float U16 U16
P313 0 0 0 0 0 0
200 P312 < 100 65535 1 100.00% 65535 1
100 80 30 300 Dig. Output 4 (D) (D)
QD H L QD H L
R 1 0 R 1 0
407
U16
(D)This parameter can be assigned to a programmable digital output.
Enable overload Overload mode
Enabled Disabled Curr limited
Overload control enabled Overload control disabled The armature current is managed by the Overload control within the set limits for the duration and amplitude of the overload. The armature current is not managed by the Overload control.
Curr not limited Overload current Base current Overload time Pause time
Armature current (Ip) authorised during the overload (set by Overload time). The maximum value is 155% of Full load curr. Current in set system (Io) authorised during idle periods (set by Pause time). The % refers to Full load curr. Maximum time for which Overload current is authorised. Minimum idle period between two overload cycles. Base current is authorised during this time.
5/101
5 - Main functions
5.14 Functions
FUNCTIONS
Overld available Information indicating whether a new overload is possible without exceeding the heat capacity of the DC drive. Status 1 Overload authorised Status 0 Overload not authorised If Overload mode has been configured so that the armature current is not handled by Overload Control, the parameter Overload state provides information indicating whether or not the current is within the set limits. Status 1 The induction current exceeds the set limits Status 0 The induction current does not exceed the set limits
Overload state
Overload control is enabled for the Enable overload parameter. Warning! When the current exceeds the value set by Base current, countdown begins by the time set by Overload time. Once completed, the current is again limited to Base current, regardless of the amplitude and duration of the overload. Ensure that this is compatible with the application (reduction in available torque). New overloads are not authorised before the end of the time set by Pause time. If Overload mode is enabled on Curr not limited, the current is not limited, but Overload state will indicate whether the current is outside the set range. Erroneous values can result in damage to the DC drive.
Overload time [310] Overload current [312] Pause time [311] Overload time [310] Pause time [311] Waiting time Overload time [310]
Warning!
Warning!
Limits
Base current [313] T current
Time Overld available [406]
Overload state [407]
Figure 5.14.6.1: Overload control (Overload mode = Curr limited).
5/102
5 - Main functions
5.14 Functions
FUNCTIONS
Overload time [310] Overload current [312] Pause time [311] Overload time [310] Pause time [311] Waiting time Overload time [310]
Limits
Base current [313] T current
Time Overld available [406]
Overload state [407]
Figure 5.14.6.2: Overload control (Overload mode = Curr not limited).
Note!
The % of Overload current and Base current relate to the Full load curr value, not to the rated current of the DC drive.
5/103
5 - Main functions
5.14 Functions
FUNCTIONS
5.14.7 Stop control
This function allows the DC drive to control the line contactor. Relay 2 (terminals 75 and 76) is assigned to this function by default, but any other digital output would be suitable, so long as an appropriate interface is set up with the line contactor. When the DC drive receives the Start command, relay 2 closes the line contactor and the DC drive starts up the motor. When the DC drive is stopped, the motor speed drops. When speed zero is reached, the DC drive is disabled after a delay set by the Spd 0 trip parameter. After the delay set by the Trip cont delay parameter, relay 2 opens to cut off the line-contactor coil.
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
FUNCTIONS \ Stop control Stop mode 626 U16 0 3 Stop & Speed 0 OFF Stop & speed 0 Fast stp & spd 0 Fst / stp & spd 0 Spd 0 trip delay [ms] 627 Trip cont delay [ms] 628 Jog stop control 630 ON OFF (D) Relay 75/76 Yes R/Z 0 1 2 3 R/W R/W R/Z 1 0 -
U16 U16 U16
0 0 0
40000 40000 1
0 0 OFF (0)
Yes Yes Yes
(D)This parameter can be assigned to a programmable digital output.
Speed zero level 10 rpm Spd 0 trip delay 0 ms Digital Commands
From external seguence or digital commands
Enable drive
Start/Stop
Stop mode OFF
Dig input term 12
Dig input term 13 Stop mode Fast stp & spd 0 Fast Stop Enable / Disable Drive management
Dig input term 14
Stop mode Fst stp & spd 0
Stop mode OFF
Figure 5.14.7.1: Management.
5/104
5 - Main functions
5.14 Functions
FUNCTIONS
Stop mode OFF Stop & Speed 0 Line contactor control function is disabled. The line contactor is closed when the Start (0>1) command is given, either from the terminal strip or digitally. When the Start command is disabled (1->0) and after speed zero is reached, the DC drive is blocked after a time delay set by Spd 0 trip delay. The contactor opens following a time delay set by Trip cont delay. The line contactor is closed on the Start command from either the terminal block or serial link. When the Fast Stop command is disabled (Status 0 of terminal 14), and after speed zero has been reached, the DC drive is blocked following a time delay set by Spd 0 trip delay. The contactor opens following a time delay set by Trip cont delay. The line contactor is closed when the Start (0>1) or Fast Stop (Status 1 of terminal 14) commands are given. When the Start (1->0) or Fast Stop commands are disabled (Status 0 of terminal 14) and once speed zero has been reached, the DC drive is blocked following a time delay set by Spd 0 trip delay. The contactor opens following a time delay set by Trip cont delay.
Fast stp & spd 0
Fst / stp & spd 0
Spd 0 trip delay Trip cont delay Jog stop control
Delay in ms between the detection of speed zero and locking of the DC drive. Delay in ms between locking and the opening of the contacts 75 and 76 (or connected logic output) for the line-contactor command. OFF ON The use of Stop mode to control the line contactor has no effect on Jog function. The use of Stop mode to control of the line contactor is enabled on the Jog function.
Note!
When Main commands = Keyboard, the parameter Enable drive = Enabled by the keyboard or bus must be selected.
5/105
5 - Main functions
5.14 Functions
FUNCTIONS
5.14.8 Lifting function
The Lifting function, also called vertical shift, is equipped with a base for DCV104 DC drives. Its purpose is to extend the possibilities of the DC drive system software by allowing a second possible setup for the motor and/or control logic for vertical shift of a mechanical brake (or by extension, any shift whose load eliminates a torque in the same direction, whatever the rotation of the motor).
5.14.8.1 Brake logic

The aim of the brake control logic is to ensure that the machine exerts a torque in the ascending direction, by Forward convention, able to retain the load during the transient brake release phase, whichever direction is controlled. It also checks that the DC drive and mechanical brake are working before each movement validation. During the transient brake release phase, regulation is also maintained at speed zero, after electrical braking, for a fixed period of 1s. Note! Warning! Do not use the DC drive in armature voltage speed feedback. The lack of precision of this type of adjustment is not compatible with the brake command.
Input/output assignment In the I/O CONFIG menu Brake fbk Brake command Brake error Brake Ref Assignment of a digital input to brake actuator feedback. Assignment of a digital output to the brake switch command by setting up a suitable interface or K2 relay (terminals 75-76). Assignment, where necessary, of a digital output in the absence of a brake switch response. Assignment of an analog input to the load weight. If this assignment is configured, it will no longer be possible to change its value on the keyboard. +10V corresponds to 100% of the rated motor current indicated in the MOTOR DATA menu. If it is necessary to change the retained current reference to a higher value, this can be done using the Scale input x parameter. It should not be changed to a value over the armature limitation current of the DC drive.
Settings In the FUNCTIONS/BRAKE CONTROL menu Torque command Closing speed Torque delay Torque proving Enabling of the Brake logic function. Adjustment of the speed at which the brake is reset. Time to apply brake lift current and actuator feedback. Value of retained current, as a % of the rated current. This should not be changed to a value over the armature limitation current of the DC drive. Actuator response time.
Actuator delay
5/106
5 - Main functions
5.14 Functions
FUNCTIONS
Note: If using a horizontal motion set-up, set: Torque proving to zero. The brake logic sequence does not begin until the Start order is received from the DC drive. If the DC drive is assigned to a directional command by the ascending descending logic orders, these three inputs should be wired and configured. Programming of Brake error default This default results in the opening of the DC drive safety relay (terminals 35-36) and logic output (or relay) assigned to the brake command, and is memorised. It is necessary to set the Speed zero level parameter to 2% of the Speed base value . Set the Speed zero delay [ms] timer to 1100ms to allow the DC drive to maintain the limitation current during brake-pad resetting.
5/107
5 - Main functions
5.14 Functions
FUNCTIONS
Time chart
RUN
START
Torque front monitoring time
Brake drop out speed detection
T = 1 sec
Induced current
Brake release current detection
Brake switch control
Brake switch feedback Actual opening of brake pads Ramp validation
Actuator delay time
Brake drop out threshold

Speed feedback Switch delayed feedback
Inverter locking
Mechanical brake fault Engaging fault Engaging fault
Diagram of control Functional diagram with minimal use of inputs and outputs. Specific assignments of this diagram: DI1: Fwd sign DI2 : Rev sign DI3: Brake fbk Ascending, conventionally Forward Descending, conventionally Reverse Brake contactor feedback
5/108
FUNCTIONS
1 1 3 4 3 4 Digital inputs Cotrol inputs
3 1
5 3
Q1 Q10
2 2 1 2 4
Q20
Q6
Q4
KM10
L1
U V
Relay 2:
KM1
Electromagnetic brakes: Provide an RC filter downline of KM10 (9)
F1
RS485 31 33 34 15 14 32 35 12 13 16
F6
5.14 Functions
(1)
(10)
U V2 35
81
82
U3
V3
31
32
U1
V1
U2
36
75
76
DI1
DI2
DI3
EXTERNAL FAULT
FAN CONTROL
ENABLE DRIVE
DCV104
FAST STOP
R1
R2
START
SA-SB (8)
DI4
A1
OK XS
KM10
Y1
K2 K3 K0
(6) (7)
K1
+24
19
Brake command
(3)
fans (4)
0V24
18
(3)
+10V -10V
0V10
AI1-
AI1+
AI2-
AI2+
AI3-
AI3+
AO1+
AO2+
DO1
DO2
DO3
DO4
5 - Main functions
COMAO
COMAO
XE1 7 8 GND 9 2 1 GND 4 3 6 5 22 21 GND
XE2
+ -
GND
78
79 GND
C1
D1
24
23
GND
26
27
28
29
30
25
(5)
F2
X-Y mA or + - 10 V Analog inouts X-Y mA or + - 10 V
(2)
1F1
1B1
2B2
PTC
S1
2F2
Potentiometer or Joystick
Analog outputs
Digital outputs
KM10 contactor command
M1
Sinusoidal encoder
Digital encoder
(1) Control board terminals Power interface board terminals
(6)
Input for fast stop (0 = fast stop)
Power terminals
(2)
DCV104 up to C65S DCV104 up toC65S
(7)
(3) (4) (5)
DCV104C77S to M27? DCV104M14Y to M27? Resistance of 1 KOhm in the absence of PTC probe
(8)
Input for external fault (0 = external fault) Control voltage selection DCV104/94C28S to M11S
(9) (10)
Or brake contact open DCV M14Y - M15S - M20? - M27? only
5/109
5 - Main functions
5.14 Functions
FUNCTIONS
Q1
OK
35
A1
36
Q4 Q6
FUSES (3) 81
K0 A1
82
KM1
K2
K3
K0
1 sec
Q10
CONTROL CIRCUIT 230V AC MAX , DIAGRAM TN
31
Q20
(3)
Fan (4)
A1
32
AT A.U
Brake 75
A1
76
S1/2
Joystick up
S1/3
Joystick down
S1/0
Zero Joystick
MA
K0 K3 K2
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
K0
A2
KM10
A2
K1
A2
K2
A2
K3
A2
KM1
A2
IEC/EN 60204-1 stop category 0
5.14.8.2 Double setting

Double setting allows the DC drive to be operated using two sets of different parameters. To select one of the sets of operating parameters (Setup 0 or Setup 1), the DC drive must be inoperative, locked and without failures to analyse the failure in the setup in which it appears. Input/output assignment In the I/O CONFIG menu Setup0/Setup1 Settings In the FUNCTIONS / DOUBLE SETUP menu Copy setup Load setup Actual setup Saves the list of parameters in setup 1 or 2 Loads the list of parameters in Setup 1 or 2 Indicates the loaded setup (1, 2 or 0 - none). Loads Setup 0 (Input status 0) or setup 1 (Status 1).
5/110
5 - Main functions
5.14 Functions
FUNCTIONS
List of parameters
Parameter No. P45 P21 P22 P29 P30 P179 P162 P175 P456 P280 P7 P715 P467 P468 P1 P2 P414 P562 P457 P481 P309 P318 P312 P313 P310 P311 P1014 P1015 P87 P88 P444 P91 P92 P493 P494 P18 P663 P664 P1016 P445 P446 P447 P696 P697 P698 P700 P699 P242 P453 P454 P469 P66 Description Speed base value Acc. delta speed Acc. delta time Dec. delta speed Dec. delta time Full load curr Motor max speed Max out voltage Flux weak speed Motor nom flux T current limit T curr lim type Flux current min Flux current max Speed min amount Speed max amount Speed fbk sel Tacho scale Enable fbk contr Undervolt Thr Enable overload Overload mode Overload current Base current Overload time Pause time Inertia Friction Speed P Speed I Prop. Filter Flux P Flux I Voltage P Voltage I Ramp shape S acc t const S dec t const Aux spd fun sel Speed up gain Speed up base Speed up filter Droop gain Droop filter Load comp Droop limit Enable droop Enable spd reg (1) Arm resistance Arm inductance Flux reg mode Select Analog output 1
5/111
5 - Main functions
5.14 Functions
FUNCTIONS
P67 P68 P69 P70 P75 P80 P145 P146 P147 P148 P137 P138 P139 P140 P141 P142 P143 P144 P101 P102 P103 P104 P105 P107 P108 P627 P243 P1265 P1295 P1262 P1293 P1294 P1266
Select Analog output 2 Select Analog output 3 Select Analog output 4 Select Analog input 1 Select Analog input 2 Select Analog input 3 Digital output 1 Digital output 2 Digital output 3 Digital output 4 Digital input 1 Digital input 2 Digital input 3 Digital input 4 Digital input 5 Digital input 6 Digital input 7 Digital input 8 Spd threshold + Spd threshold Threshold delay Set error Set delay Speed zero level Speed zero delay Speed 0 trip delay Enab multi rmp Enable Ramp in=0 Enable Torque pr Closing speed Torque delay Torque proving Actuator delay
(1) w amp. enab.: if this parameter is enabled, the DC Drive operates with the speed reference; otherwise, it operates with the torque reference.
5/112
5 - Main functions
5.14 Functions
FUNCTIONS
5.14.9 L/n curve
Using this function, the In use Tcur lim + / - current limits can be changed according to the motor speed with a six-segment curve; the parameters for defining the curve are I/n speed and I/n lim 0-1-2-3-4. The I/n speed parameter defines a speed range below which current limits are maintained at the value of I/n lim 0, while the speed range between I/n speed and 100% of the maximum speed is divided into four equal segments, in which the current limit decreases linearly from the value set in I/n lim n to the value set in I/n lim n+1. The set values must decrease from I/n lim 0 to I/n lim 4.
No. Format min Value max Standard Configurat. Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Parameter
Factory
FUNCTIONS \ I/n curve I/n curve Enabled Disabled I/n lim 0 [%] I/n lim 1 [%] I/n lim 2 [%] I/n lim 3 [%] I/n lim 4 [%] I/n speed [rpm] 751 752 753 754 755 756 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 0 0 0 0 0 0 200 200 200 200 200 P162 750 U16 0 1 Disabled (0) 0 0 0 0 0 0 Yes R/Z 1 0 R/Z R/Z R/Z R/Z R/Z R/Z -
In use Tcur lim
I/n lim 0
I/n lim 1 I/n lim 2 I/n lim 3 I/n lim 4
I/n speed
Motor max speed
Figure 5.14.9.1: L/n curve.
I/n curve I/n lim 0 I/n lim 1 I/n lim 2 I/n lim 3 I/n lim 4 I/n speed
Enabled Speed-based current limitation enabled Disabled Speed-based current limitation disabled Limitation of constant current up to the speed set by the I/n speed parameter. Limitation 1 for construction of the I/n curve. Limitation 2 for construction of the I/n curve. Limitation 3 for construction of the I/n curve. Limitation 4 for construction of the I/n curve. Speed threshold beyond which limitation commences.
5/113
5 - Main functions
5.15 Specific functions
SPECIFIC FUNCTIONS
Test generator, saving, factory settings, failures, signal adaptation, words
5.15.1 Test generator

Keyp. RS Term D/P
Factory
SPEC FUNCTIONS \ Test generator Generator access Not connected T current ref Flux ref Ramp ref Speed ref Gen frequency [Hz] Gen amplitude [%] Generator offset [%] 58 U16 0 5 Not conn. Yes R/Z 0 2 3 4 5 R/W R/W R/W -
59 60 61
Float Float Float
0.1 0 -200.00
62.5 200.00 +200.00
0.1 0 0
Yes Yes Yes
The Test generator function of the DC drive is used for manual calibration of the regulators. It consists of a square-wave signal generator whose frequency, offset and amplitude can be adjusted. The output signal of the Test generator can be assigned to a programmable analog output. Generator access Gen frequency Gen amplitude Gen offset Assigns the value of the generator output to the parameter concerned. Output frequency of the generator in Hz. Amplitude of the square-wave signal produced by the generator, as a %. Offset of the generator as a %.
The generator output consists of the sum of Gen amplitude and Gen offset.
Gen access Not Connected
Generator output
Gen amplitude 0 %
Gen offset
0 %
Time
Gen frequency 0.1 Hz
Figure 5.15.1.1: Test generator output.
5/114
5 - Main functions
SPECIFIC FUNCTIONS
5.15.2 Saving, loading default parameters, hour counter

Keyp. RS Term D/P
Factory
SPEC FUNCTIONS Save parameters Load default Life time [h.min] 256 258 235 U16 U16 Float Yes Yes Yes C/W(1) Z/C(1) R -
65535
Save parameters
Load default Life time
Saves the parameters. It is also possible to enable this command using the keyboard, even when the DC drive is controlled in Bus mode, in the Control mode parameter (CANopen option). Loads the default parameters (Default column of the parameter tables). Counter indicating the time the DC drive is powered (even if disabled).
The default parameter values are set at the factory. Note that any modification of and/or adjustments to parameters must be saved using the Save parameters command. Note! The Tacho scale and Speed offset parameters are used for accurate calibration of the speed feedback circuit. When the factory parameters are loaded (Load Default) these two parameters do not change so that further calibration is not required!
5/115
5 - Main functions
SPECIFIC FUNCTIONS
5.15.3 Fault register

Keyp. RS Term D/P
Factory
SPEC FUNCTIONS
Failure register Failure text Failure hour Failure minute Failure code Failure supply Undervoltage Overvoltage Overcurrent Heatsink Hardware DSP error Interrupt error Speed fbk External fault Overtemp motor Field loss Bus loss Hw opt 1 failure Opt2 Unknown Enable seq err Brake error I2t ovrld error Failure reset Failure reg del
330 327 328 329 417
U16 Text U16 U16 U16
1 0 0 0
10 65535 59 65535
10
Yes -
262 263
U16 U16
Yes Yes
R/W R R R R 5100h 3120h 3310h 2300h 4210h 5000h 6110h 6120h 7301h 9000h 4310h 3330h 8110h 7510h 7400h 1001h 9009h 9090h 7120h Z/C (1) C
ID (H) -
W -
Failure register
The fault register contains the last ten faults. It also contains information on the time of the fault, based on the DC drive operation counter (Life time), and information on the type of fault. This information can be accessed by pressing the ENT key on the keyboard when a fault is indicated. If different faults occur simultaneously, all faults are stored in the fault register until a fault occurs causing blockage of the DC drive (Latch = ON, see Programmable alarms). The contents of the fault register can also be read using the bus device (CANopen option) or serial interface. Resets the fault. When a fault is stored on the keyboard, it can be reset by pressing the CANC key. If, however, a number of faults occur in succession, these can only be reset using the general Failure reset command, by pressing ENT. When the DC drive is controlled by the bus system (Control mode =Bus), the keyboard can be used to turn off an alarm simply by entering the password Pword 1. To reset faults using a digital input, Status 1 must be used. Clears the fault register.
Failure reset
Failure reg del
5/116
5 - Main functions
SPECIFIC FUNCTIONS
To access information on the last ten faults using the serial line: - Set the Pointer parameter [330], to identify the fault in the register. For example, If set to 10, the last fault in the register will be indicated. - Reading: Failure text [327], Failure hour [328], Failure min[329]; these parameters indicate the type of alarm and the time it occurred.
5/117
5 - Main functions
SPECIFIC FUNCTIONS
5.15.4 Calculations (Link 1...Link 6)

Parameter N.
link1 link2 link3 link4 link5 link6
Format
min.
Value
max Factory keyp.
Access via
RS Term. D/P
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS \ Links \ Link 1 6 Source Destination Mul Gain. Div. Gain Input max Input min Input Offset Output offset link n. link n. link n. link n. link n. link n. link n. link n. 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 1218 1227 1236 1245 1219 1228 1237 1246 1220 1229 1238 1247 1221 1230 1239 1248 1222 1231 1240 1249 1223 1232 1241 1250 1224 1233 1242 1251 1225 1234 1243 1252 1226 1235 1244 1253 U16 U16 Float Float Float Float Float Float U16 0 0 65535 65535 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 OFF (0) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 0 -
-10000 +10000 -10000 +10000 -231 -2 -2

31 31 31
231-1 231-1 2 -1 2 -1 1
31 31
Input absolute link n. ON OFF
-2 0
Tpar link_0484_1253
The Link 1 to Link 6 functions are calculations that operate independently of each other to allow the adaptation of signals. The parameters with these links can be: - corrected - limited - multiplied by a factor - divided by a factor - equipped with an offset - processed as an absolute value Source Number of parameter used as an input value. To enter the source parameter number correctly, the value 2000H (8192 decimal) must always be added to it. For example, if the source parameter is Speed ref 1 (42), it should be given the value 8192 + 42 = 8234 Number of the parameter determining the output value. As above, always add +2000H (8192 decimal) to the chosen parameter number. For example, If the output value must be used as a T current ref 1 (39) torque reference, enter 8192 + 39 = 8231. The parameter numbers can be found in the list in Chapter 8 of this guide. Mul gain Div gain Input max Input min Input offset Multiplier factor of the input value after limitation. Result: 5 digits. Divisor to be used to divide the multiplied and limited input value. Result: 5 digits. Maximum limit of the input value. Result: 5 digits. Minimum limit of the input value. Result: 5 digits. Offset added to the input value. Result: 5 digits.
Destination
5/118
5 - Main functions
SPECIFIC FUNCTIONS
Output offset Inp absolute Offset added to the output value. Result: 5 digits. This parameter can be used to define input behaviour. OFF The polarity of the input value is processed. ON The absolute value of the input value is processed. It is possible to change polarity with the Mul gain and Div gain signs.
The calculations are executed in an approximate period of 20 ms. They should not be used for regulation purposes, but rather to assign and adapt parameters that are not directly accessible. The use of calculations can overload the DC drive CPU and reduce keyboard and display speed. Users should check that functionality suits their needs before embarking on major tasks. Note ! The parameters below cannot be used as destinations of calculations: Parameter No. 19 72 73 77 78 82 85 83 86 318 408 425 444 453 454 456 467 468 470 474 475 480 482 483 484 485 501 502 553 554 562 585 586 636
Any parameter that only has an R access code Any parameter that only has a Z access code Any parameter that only has an C access code All of the following parameters:
Parameter description S shape t const Scale input 1 Tune value inp 1 Scale input 2 Tune value inp 2 Scale input 3 Pword1 Tune value inp 3 Password 2 Overload mode Ser answer delay Enable OPT2 Prop. Filter [ms] Arm resistance [ ] Arm inductance [mH] Flux weak speed [%] Flux current max [%] Flux current min [%] Hold off time [ms] Restart time [ms] Hold off time [ms] Hold off time [ms] Hold off time [ms] Restart time [ms] Source Destination Restart time [ms] Hold off time [ms] Source Destination Tacho scale Restart time [ms] Hold off time [ms] Hold off time [ms]
5/119
5 - Main functions
SPECIFIC FUNCTIONS
637 649 652 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 776 785 786 792 1012 1013 1014 1015 1042 1043 1044
Input max 1 0
Restart time [ms] Refresh enc 1 Refresh enc 2 S acc t const S dec t con S acc t const 0 S dec t const 0 S acc t const 1 S dec t const 1 S acc t const 2 S dec t const 2 S acc t const 3 S dec t const 3 PI central V1 PI bottom lim PID source Input 1 filter [ms] Inertia c filter [ms] Torque const [N*m/A] Inertia [kg*m*m] Friction [N*m] Input 1 compare Input 1 cp error Input 1 cp delay
LINK 1
Source 1 0
+ +
X
Input min 1 0 Mul gain 1 1 Div gain 1 1
+ +
Destination 1 0
Output offset 1 0
Input absolute 1 Off Input offset 1 0
LINK 2
Input max 2 0
Source 2 0
+ +
X
Input min 2 0 Mul gain 2 1 Div gain 2 1
+ +
Destination 2 0
Output offset 2 0
Input absolute 2 Off Input offset 2 0
Figure 5.15.4.1: Synopsis of calculations.
5/120
5 - Main functions
SPECIFIC FUNCTIONS
5.15.5 Pads
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Factory
SPEC FUNCTIONS \ Pad Parameters Pad 0 Pad 1 Pad 2 Pad 3 Pad 4 Pad 5 Pad 6 Pad 7 Pad 8 Pad 9 Pad 10 Pad 11 Pad 12 Pad 13 Pad 14 Pad 15 Bitword pad A Pad A Bit 0 Pad A Bit 1 Pad A Bit 2 Pad A Bit 3 Pad A Bit 4 Pad A Bit 5 Pad A Bit 6 Pad A Bit 7 Pad A Bit 8 Pad A Bit 9 Pad A Bit 10 Pad A Bit 11 Pad A Bit 12 Pad A Bit 13 Pad A Bit 14 Pad A Bit 15 Bitword pad B Pad B Bit 0 Pad B Bit 1 Pad B Bit 2 Pad B Bit 3 Pad B Bit 4 Pad B Bit 5 Pad B Bit 6 Pad B Bit 7 Pad B Bit 8 Pad B Bit 9 Pad B Bit 10 Pad B Bit 11 Pad B Bit 12 Pad B Bit 13 Pad B Bit 14 Pad B Bit 15 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 65535 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 65535 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (A), (C) (A), (C) (C) (C) (A) (A) (A) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W IA, QA IA, QA IA IA QA QA QA ID*,QD* ID, QD ID, QD ID, QD ID, QD ID, QD ID, QD ID, QD ID, QD QD* QD* QD* QD* QD* QD* QD* QD* QD* QD QD QD QD QD QD QD QD QD* QD* QD* QD* QD* QD* QD* QD* R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R R R R R R -
(E), (D) (E), (D) (E), (D) (E), (D) (E), (D) (E), (D) (E), (D) (E), (D) (E), (D)
(H) (D) (D) (D) (D) (D) (D) (D) (D) (D)
(H)
5/121
5 - Main functions
SPECIFIC FUNCTIONS
(A) This parameter can be assigned to a programmable analog output. (C) This parameter can be assigned to a programmable analog input. (D)This parameter can be assigned to a programmable digital output. (E) This parameter can be assigned to a programmable digital output. (H) This parameter can be assigned to Relay 2
Pads are used to exchange data, they can be compared to internal variables of a PLC. Figure 5.15.5.1 illustrates the general system structure. Using Pads, it is possible to send information from a fieldbus to an option board. All PADs can be read and written. See the different possibilities for access in the list of all parameters in Chapter 8. Pad 0...15 16-bit words. Words 0 to 3 can be assigned to analog inputs. Words 0, 1, 4, 5 and 6 can be assigned to analog outputs. Bitmap of Pad A (B) bit 0, up to Pad A (B) bit 15. With a parameter, it is possible to read or write all bits inside a word. For example: Pad A bit 0 0 Pad A bit 1 1 = 21 =2 Pad A bit 2 0 Pad A bit 3 0 Pad A bit 4 0 = 32 Pad A bit 5 1 = 25 = 64 Pad A bit 6 1 = 26 Pad A bit 7 0 Pad A bit 8 0 Pad A bit 9 0 = 1024 Pad A bit 10 1 = 210 Pad A bit 11 0 = 4096 Pad A bit 12 1 = 212 Pad A bit 13 0 Pad A bit 14 0 Pad A bit 15 0 Bitword pad A = 2 + 32 + 64 + 1024 + 4096 = 5218 Word bits. Simple bits can be read and written. With Bitword Pad A (B) it is possible to process a word. Using word bits, it is possible to read the status of digital inputs 1 to 8 by assigning them to bits 0 to 7 respectively (word A only). It is also possible to assign digital outputs to the bitmap of word A or B: Output 1 Pad A (B) bit 0 (0001H , 1 decimal) Output 2 Pad A (B) bit 1 (0002H , 2 decimal) Output 3 Pad A (B) bit 2 (0004H , 4 decimal) Output 4 Pad A (B) bit 3 (0008H , 8 decimal) Output 5 Pad A (B) bit 4 (0010H , 16 decimal) Output 6 Pad A (B) bit 5 (0020H , 32 decimal) Output 7 Pad A (B) bit 6 (0040H , 64 decimal) Output 8 Pad A (B) bit 7 (0080H , 128 decimal) Relay 2 Pad A (B) bit 14 (4000H, 16384 decimal)
Bitword pad A (B)
Pad A (B) bit 0...15
5/122
5 - Main functions
SPECIFIC FUNCTIONS
MODBUS, etc.
RS 485
Keypad
Options (Bus Interface ....)
Pad 0
Pad 1
Pad 2
Pad 3
Pad 4
Pad 5
Pad 6
Bitword pad A 0000h
Bitword pad B 0000h
General PAD
Pad 7 Pad 8 Pad 9 Pad 10 Pad 11 Pad 12 Pad 13 Pad 14 Pad 15
input Analog
input Analog
output Analog
input Digital
output Digital
output Digital
output Analog
Figure 5.15.5.1: Data exchange between system components.
5/123
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS
PID, winder/unwinder
CANopen DCVS5Z27 communications board and DC drive interface menu. Using this menu, the DC drive parameters can be assigned to the virtual digital inputs and outputs (MONITOR menu\Virtual digital Inp-Out) and process channels (PDC) of the communications bus. If the communications board is not present, the OPT1 not present message is displayed. If the communications board used has not been updated for this management, the OPT1 old version message is displayed. For further information, please see the User Guide for the DCVS5Z27 board.
5.16.1 Option 1
5.16.2 Option 2
Keyp. RS Term D/P
OPTIONS \ Option 1 Accessible only with optional DCVS5Z27 CANopen card OPTIONS \ Option 2 Menu Enable OPT2 Enabled Disabled Accessible only with optional DCVS5W04 card 425 U16 0 1 Disabled (0) Yes R/Z 1 0 -
This menu allows access to the set of parameters of the programming and development board for DCVS5W04 applications. Menu The menu is only enabled if a DCVS5W04 board is installed. If you try to access the OPT2 menu when the optional board is not installed, the OPT2 not present message is displayed. For further information, please refer to the User Guide for the DCVS5Z27 board. Enabled When the DC drive is powered, the presence of the board is checked. If this board is present, the Menu parameters are enabled and it is possible to access the board parameters. When the DC drive is powered, the presence of the board is not checked. Therefore, the optional parameters are not taken into account, even if the board is present.
Enable OPT2
Disabled
Default setup = Disabled. To change the validation status: 1 - Change the value of Enable OPT2 2 - Save the new settings using Save parameters (BASIC MENU) 3- The DC drive only takes into account enabling or failure to enable after the power is reconnected to the DC drive control (Init) If parameter Enable OPT2 is enabled and the optional board DCVS5W04 is not installed, the error message OPT2 failure code 10098 or OPT2 failure code 100-96 is displayed. Note: When using an optional OPT2 board, all of the parameters in the list of parameters are accessible by automatic asynchronous D/P communication (see Chapter 8.1). The parameters in the List of hi-priority parameters (Chapter 8.2) can be accessed through the automatic synchronous communication system (see the User Guide for the DCVS5W04 board).
5/124
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS
5.16.3 PID function
5.16.3.1 General information

The PID function of the DCV DC drive has been specially designed for control of S blocks, winders and unwinders, and to control the pressure of pumps and extruding machines. Therefore, in addition to the PID regulator, the DC drive has other blocks of functions needed for optimum control. It is possible to use the main block as well as the generic PID The inputs (except for those of transducers) and outputs are configurable and can hence be assigned to various DC drive parameters. For example, the PID block output can be destined either the speed or current regulators. The analog inputs and outputs are sampled or updated every 2ms. The digital inputs and outputs are sampled or updated every 8ms. Note! Enabling of the optional DCVS5W04 board (Option 2) prevents use of the PID function.
5.16.3.2 Inputs/Outputs
Regulation inputs/outputs PID source PID feed-back PID regulator input reference (Feed-Forward) normally programmed on an analog input. Analog input of position/traction transducer (dancer/load cell). PID feed-back is normally programmed on analog input 1, which is equipped with a filter. Analog input added to PID feed-back. It can be used for centering the position of the dancer. Destination parameter associated with the regulator output. It is normally assigned to the speed reference of the DC drive. Regulator output. It can be used to create a cascade of references in multiple DC drive systems. Setting of initial value of the integral component of the regulator (corresponding to the initial diameter). This parameter can be assigned to an analog input that is connected, for instance, to an ultrasonic transducer used to measure the diameter of a winder/ unwinder.
PID offset 0 PID target PID output PI central v3
Command inputs (programmable on digital inputs) Enable PI PID Enabling of the PI (proportional - integral) part of the PID regulator. The switch from input Status 0 to Status 1 also causes automatic acquisition of the value of the integral component corresponding to the initial diameter. Enabling of the PD (proportional - derived) part of the regulator. Freezing of the current value of the integral component of the regulator. Selection of offset added to PID feed-back: Status 0 = PID offset 0, Status 1 = PID offset 1.
Enable PI PID PI integral freeze PID offset sel
5/125
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS
PI central v S0 and PI central v S1 Diameter calc Diameter calc st Selector for choosing between the initial PI central v parameter (corresponding to the initial diameter) using a binary combination. Enabling of the initial diameter calculating function. Calculation of the end diameter (digital output).
5.16.3.3 Feed Forward

Keyp. RS Term D/P
Factory
OPTIONS \ PID \ PID source PID source PID source gain Feed-fwd PID 786 787 758 U16 Float I16 0 -100.000 -10000 65535 +100.00 +10000 0 1.000 0 Yes Yes Yes R/W R/W R IA R
(C)
(C) This parameter can be assigned to a programmable analog input.
The Feed-Forward signal represents the main reference of the regulator. It is processed by the PID function inside the regulator before being sent to the output as a reference signal for the DC drive.
LEGEND:
PID source
Gain
I/O Parameter Parameter
PID source gain
Feed-fwd PID
Internal variable
Figure 5.16.3.1: Feed-Forward block description.
PID source
PID regulator input reference (Feed-Forward). PID source is not directly assignable. For the real address, +2000H (8192 decimal) must be added to the parameter number. Multiplier factor of the value of the PID source input. Display of the Feed-Forward value
PID source gain Feed-fwd PID
Using the PID source parameter, it is possible to select the variable in the DC drive to be read as the Feed-Forward signal; the selectable parameters are indicated in Chapter 8.2 List of highpriority parameters and the units of measurement are indicated in the notes at the end of the chapter. 1. Example of programming of ramp status output (Ramp out parameter) on PID source: Menu OPTION > PID > PID source > PID source = 8305 At PID source, select the number of the parameter to be assigned to the decimal number 113 from the list in Chapter 8.2 Ramp out. To obtain the real address, 8192 must be added: 8192 + 113 = 8305.
5/126
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS
When Feed-Forward is set to the analog input, since these are not directly inserted into the high-priority parameters, it is not necessary to go through an intermediate task word PAD 0... PAD 15. 2. Example of programming analog input 2 on PID source: 1) Assignment of input to a task word PAD Menu I/O CONFIG > Analog input > Analog input 2 > Select input 2 = PAD 0 2) Assignment of PAD 0 as Feed-Forward input: Menu OPTION > PID > PID source > PID source = 8695 From the same list of high-priority parameters in Chapter 8.2, PAD 0 to the decimal number 503. To obtain the real address, 8192 must be added: 8192 + 503 = 8695 The full scale of the Feed-Forward parameter is limited to the value +/- 10000, which means that regardless of the parameter set to PID source, it will be necessary to adjust the calibration using the PID source gain parameter. It is possible to read the Feed-Forward value using the Feed-fwd PID parameter. Calculation of the calibration gain of the PID source gain parameter: Taking up the two examples above: 1. Example of programming of ramp status output (Ramp out parameter) on PID source: - The maximum value taken by the ramp input references will be that set in Speed base value. - The DC drive works on and carries out these calculations internally, at a speed in RPM multiplied by 4 Thus, Feed - fwd PID = Speed base value x 4 x PID source gain If, with a maximum ramp reference Speed base value = 3000 RPM, and Feed - fwd PID = 10000 is not to be exceeded, set: PID source gain = 10000 / (3000 x 4) = 0.833 2. Example of programming analog input 2 on PID source: When an analog input is assigned to a PAD, this will have a maximum value of + / 2047. If, with a maximum analog reference, Feed - fwd PID = 10000 is required, set: PID source gain = 10000 / 2047 = 4.885. Note! For systems in which the regulator is to be used as a generic PID without the Feedforward function, the Feed-fwd PID function must be at its maximum value. For this, it is necessary to set PID source on a PAD and to set the latter with a value = 10000.
5/127
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS 5.16.3.4 PID function

The PID function is divided into three blocks: Feed-back input, PID reference submenu Proportional-integral control block, PI controls submenu Proportional-derivative control block, PI controls submenu
PID offset 0
PID err gain
Act tension ref
Figure 5.16.3.2: PID block description.
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
OPTIONS \ PID \ PID references PID error Act tension ref PID feed-back PID offs. Sel Offset 1 Offset 0 PID offset 0 PID offset 1 PID acc time PID dec time PID err gain [%] PID clamp 760 761 1046 1047 1254 757 I16 I16 Float Float Float I16 -10000 -10000 0.0 0.0 0.00 -10000 +10000 +10000 900.0 900.0 32.00 +10000 0 0 0.0 0.0 1 10000 (C) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 759 1194 763 762 I16 Float I16 U16 -10000 0.00 -10000 0 +10000 200.00 +10000 1 0 0 0 0 Yes Yes Yes Yes R R R/W R/W 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W IA ID R R R/W R/W
(C) (E)
IA -
R/W -
(C) This parameter can be assigned to a programmable analog input. (E) = This parameter may be assigned to a programmable digital input.
PID error Act tension ref
Error reading PID function input (below PID clamp block). Monitoring of torque reference as a reduced % of the Taper function % set using Tension red; if the Taper function is not enabled, Act tension ref corresponds to Tension ref. Reading of the feed-back value of the position (dancer) or traction (load cell) transducer.
PID feed-back
5/128
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS
PID offs. sel Selection of offset added to PID feed-back: Status 0 = PID offset 0, Status 1 = PID offset 1. This parameter can be set on a programmable digital input. Offset 0 added to PID feed-back. This parameter can be set on an analog input, for calibration of the feedback sensor, for example. Offset 1 added to PID feed-back. Ramp acceleration time in seconds after PID offset block. Ramp deceleration time in seconds after PID offset block. % of PID error gain. This clamp allows the smooth traction setting of a winder/unwinder system when the Initial diameter calculation function cannot be used. If, for instance, when the DC drive is enabled, the dancer is at its far point and PID error is at its maximum value, the motor may undergo a very sudden acceleration to reel the dancer back to its central working position. By setting PID clamp to a sufficiently low value, e.g. = 1000, on starting up the DC drive and after enabling Enable PD PID, the value of PID error is limited to 1000 until the signal from the dancer (PID feed-back) drops back down to this value. At this point, PID clamp is automatically taken back to its maximum value = 10000. The clamp is held at 10000 until the next time the DC drive or Enable PD PID parameter is locked.
PID offset 0 PID offset 1 PID acc time PID dec time PID err gain PID clamp
The feed-back input is designed for connection to an analog transducer as a dancer potentiometer or load cell. However, it is possible to use this input as a comparison between any two + / - 10V analog signals. Connection to a dancer with potentiometer connected between - 10 and + 10V. The potentiometer cursor can be connected to any of the analog inputs of the DC drive, though analog input 1 is normally used (terminals 1 and 2) since it is equipped with a filter. The input chosen for this connection should be programmed in the I/O CONFIG menu as PID feed-back and its value can be read in the PID feed-back parameter of the PID reference submenu. It is possible to centre the dancer position through PID offset 1 (or PID offset 0). Connection to a load cell 0... + 10V. This is connected and configured as indicated above. The traction setting can be connected at 0...-10V, to one of the remaining analog entries in the I/ O CONFIG menu, such as PID offset 0.
5/129
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS 5.16.3.5 Proportional-Integral (PI) control block
Feed-fwd PID Feed-fwd PID thr PI Steady state internal PI integral freeze PI steady delay Enable PI PID Enable PI PID CV PI P gain PID P init gain PID PI top lim PID PI bottom lim PID
thr
Gain
Feed-forward sign: positive gain = -1 negative gain = +1
PI output PID Real FF PID Internal PI integral freeze PI I gain PID PI integral freeze Central Value 0 1 2 3 PI output PID PI central v 1 PID PI central v 2 PID PI central v 3 PID
LEGEND: I/O Parameter PID error Parameter Internal variable
I init gain PID
Central v sel PID

Figure 5.16.3.3: PI block description.
The PI block receives input from the PID error parameter, which represents the error that must be dealt with by the regulator. The PI block uses proportional-integral regulation. After its output PI output PID has been adapted to the system to be controlled, it is used as a feed-forward multiplier factor (Feed-fwd PID), for obtaining the correct speed reference value for the DC drive (Real FF PID). Enabling/disabling The PI block is enabled by programming Enable PI PID = enable. If the Enable PI PID parameter has been assigned to a digital input, this must be returned to Status 1.
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Factory
OPTIONS \ PID Enable PI PID Enabled Disabled 769 U16 0 1 Disabled (0)
(E)
Yes
R/W 1 0
ID
R/W
Enable PI PID
Enabled Disabled
Enabling of Proportional-Integral block. Disabling of Proportional-Integral block.
5/130
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS
Control of PI block
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Factory
OPTIONS \ PID \ PI controls PI P gain PID PI I gain PID PI steady thr PID steady delay P init gain PID I init gain PID PI central v sel PI central v1 PI central v2 PI central v3 PI top lim PI bottom lim PI integr freeze ON OFF PI output PID Real FF PID 771 418 I16 I16 0 -10000 1000 x PI toplim +10000 765 764 695 731 793 734 779 776 777 778 784 785 783 Float Float I16 U16 Float Float U16 Float Float Float Float Float U16 0.00 0.00 0 0 0.00 0.00 0 PI bot lim PI bot lim PI bot lim PI bot lim -10.00 0 100.00 100.00 10000 60000 100.00 100.00 3 PI toplim PI toplim PI toplim 10.00 PI toplim 1 10.00 10.00 0 0 10.00 10.00 1 1.00 1.00 1.00 10.00 0.00 OFF (0) 1000 0 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 0 R R/W ID IA ID R/W R/W
(E)
(C)
(E)
Yes Yes
R R
(C) This parameter can be assigned to a programmable analog input. (E) = This parameter may be assigned to a programmable digital input.
PI P gain PID PI I gain PID PI steady thr
Proportional gain of PI block Integral gain of PI block Feed-Forward threshold. If Feed-fwd PID is lower than PI steady thr, the proportional gain acts according to the value set in P init gain PID. If Feed-fwd PID is higher than PI steady thr, the integral regulation component operates with the gain value regulated in I init gain PID. The PI block will then use the P init gain PID and I init gain PID gains for the time indicated on the PI steady delay timer . After this time, they will be returned to PI P gain PID and PI I gain PID, respectively. Time in milliseconds during which the P init gain PID and I init gain PID gains are operational after exceeding the PI steady thr threshold. The PI steady delay timer and hence the initial gains value changing function is also enabled when the Enable PI PID parameter is changed from Status 0 to Status 1. Initial proportional gain of PI block. Initial integral gain of PI block. Initial PI block output selector. PI central v sel (0...3) defines which of the 4 possible settings of the initial value of the integral component of the regulator (corresponding to the initial diameter) is used.
PI steady delay
P init gain PID I init gain PID PI central v sel
5/131
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS
PI central v S0 0 0 1 1 PI central v S1 0 1 0 1 PI central v sel 0 1 2 3
PI output PID memorised value PI central v 1 PI central v 2 PI central v 3 (assignable to an analog input)
PI central v sel can be set directly from the keyboard, serial link or two digital inputs programmed as PI central v S0 and PI central v S1. If PI central v sel = 0 is selected when the PI block is disabled (Enable PI PID = Disable), the last value of the integral component (corresponding to current diameter) is stored in the memory and can be displayed in PI output PID. When the PI block is re-enabled, regulation restarts with this value. The same functionality is used when it is necessary to cut off the power supply to the DC drive. By selecting PI central v sel = 1-2-3 when the PI block is disabled, the PI output PID value is set to that programmed in the corresponding parameter (x1000). When the variable speed drive is switched off and on again, the previously calculated value is automatically reloaded so long as the digital input assigned to Enable PI PID was at Status 1 when the DC drive was restarted. PI central v 1 Setting of the first initial value of the integral component of the regulator (corresponding to the initial diameter 1). The value of PI central v 1 must be within the limits of PI top lim PID and PI bottom lim PID. PI central v 1 is selected by setting the PI central v sel parameter to 1. Setting of the second initial value of the integral component of the regulator (corresponding to initial diameter 2). The value of PI central v 2 must be within the limits of PI top lim PID and PI bottom lim PID. PI central v 2 is selected by setting the PI central v sel parameter to 2. Setting of the third initial value of the integral component of the regulator (corresponding to initial diameter 3). The value of PI central v 1 must be within the limits of PI top lim PID and PI bottom lim PID. PI central v 3 is selected by setting the PI central v sel parameter to 3. Upper limit of PI correction. Lower limit of PI correction.
PI central v 2
PI central v 3
PI top lim PI bottom lim
The PI block output represents the Feed-Forward multiplier factor, whose value must be adapted by the regulator at the maximum limits of +10000 to -10000, and defined by PI top lim and PI bottom lim. The value of these parameters is defined according to the system to be controlled. For a better understanding of this topic, please refer to Application examples. PI integral freeze PI output PID Freezing of the current value of the integral component of the regulator. PI block output adapted to values between PI top limit and PI bottom limit. When the DC drive is enabled, PI output PID automatically acquires the value selected with PI central v sel multiplied by 1000.
Example: if PI central v 2 = 0.5 is selected, when enabled, PI output PID has the value 500.
5/132
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS
When Enable PI PID is enabled, the PI output PID output correlates with the input error, as its value is integrated up to the limits set with PI top limit or PI bottom limit multiplied by 1000. E.g.: PI top limit = 2, PI output PID max = 2000. The PI block output is also limited by saturation of the Real FF PID parameter (see description of this parameter). As described above, PI output PID is used as a multiplier factor of Feed-Forward to obtain the motor rpm reference. Therefore, in the event that the PID function is used to control a winder/ unwinder, its value is inversely proportional to the diameter of the winder. When winding at a constant peripheral speed, it is possible to write: 0 0 = 1 1 where: 0 = motor rpm at the minimum diameter 0 = minimum diameter 1 = motor rpm at the current diameter 1 = current diameter Thus, 1= 0 x (0/ 1) When the DC drive is set adequately, 0 corresponds to the maximum value of Feed-Forward. Therefore, PI output PID depends on 0/ 1. Taking into account the internal adjustment coefficients of the DC drive, it is possible to write: PI output PID = (0/ 1)x 1000 This formula can be used to check the precision of settings when the system is in operation or during the initial diameter calculation procedure. Real FF PID Represents the value of Feed-Forward recalculated according to the PI correction. Based on this formula, Real FF PID = (Feed-fwd PID / 1000) x PI output PID
The maximum value of Real FF PID is +/- 10.000. When this limit is reached during operation, any increase over PI output PID is blocked in order to prevent regulator saturation hazards. Example: Feed-fwd = + 8000, the positive limit of PI output PID is automatically set to 10000 / ( 8000 / 1000 ) = 1250.
5/133
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS 5.16.3.6 Proportional-derivative (PD) control block

PD P gain 1 PID PD P gain 2 PID PD P gain 3 PID
Real FF PID Enable PD PID
PID error
PD output PID LEGEND: I/O Parameter
PD D gain 1 PID PD D gain 2 PID PD D gain 3 PID
PD D filter PID
Parameter Internal variable
Figure 5.16.3.4: PD block description.
The PD block receives the PID error parameter at input, representing the error that needs to be corrected by the regulator. The PD block carries out proportional-derivative regulation and its output PD output PID is added directly to Real FF PID. Enabling/disabling The PD block is enabled by setting Enable PD PID = enable. If the Enable PI PID parameter has been assigned to a digital input, this must be set to Status 1.
Keyp. RS Term D/P
OPTIONS \ PID
Enable PD PID Enabled Disabled
770
U16
Disabled 0
(E)
Yes
R/W 1 0
ID
R/W
Enable PD PID
Enabled Disabled
Enabling of the proportional-derivative block Disabling of the proportional-derivative block
5/134
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS
Control of PD block
Keyp. RS Term D/P
OPTIONS \ PID \ PD control PD P gain 1 PID [%] PD D gain 1 PID [%] PD P gain 2 PID [%] PD D gain 2 PID [%] PD P gain 3 PID [%] PD D gain 3 PID[%] PD D filter PID [ms] PD output PID 768 766 788 789 790 791 767 421 Float Float Float Float Float Float U16 I16 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0 -10000 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 1000 +10000 10.00 1.00 10.00 1.00 10.00 1.00 0 0 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R -
The gains of the block can: - remain fixed and set, in this case, using the PD P gain 1 PID and PD D gain 1 PID parameters, - be changed according to speed or other variables, through the Adap spd reg function described in Chapter 5.13.2. In this case, the gains are from PD P gain 1-2-3 PID and PD D gain 1-2-3 PID. For example, it is possible to dynamically modify PD block gains according to speed, a regulation parameter internal to the variable speed drive or an analog input proportional to size. This will optimise regulator behaviour. Note: When the Adap spd reg function is enabled, it operates on both the PID function and the gains of the speed regulator. Therefore, it is necessary to set all relative parameters. If it is necessary to dynamically modify the gains of the speed regulator while keeping the gains of the PID function fixed, it is necessary to set the three proportional gains and derivatives of the PD block to the same value. This is also the case where PID gains must be modified and the speed regulator gains must remain fixed. Proportional gain of PD block* Derivative gain 1 of PD block* Proportional gain of PD block* Derivative gain 2 of PD block* Proportional gain of PD block* Derivative gain 3 of PD block* Time constant of the filter of the derivative part. PD block output.
PD P gain 1 PD D gain 1 PD P gain 2 PD D gain 2 PD P gain 3 PD D gain 3 PD D filter PID PD output PID
*selection depends on the possible enabling of the Adap spd reg function and its configuration.
5/135
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS 5.16.3.7 Output reference
LEGEND: I/O Parameter Parameter Internal variable PID output sign PID
PID output
Max PID output
Real FF PID
- Max PID output
Gain PID target
PD output PID
Figure 5.16.3.5: Output reference block description.
PID out scale
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
OPTIONS \ PID \ PD control
PID out sign PID Bipolar Positive PID output
772
U16
Bipolar (1) 0 (A)
Yes
774
I16
-10000
+10000
Yes
R/W 1 0 R
QA
(A) This parameter can be assigned to a programmable analog output.
PID out. sign PID PID output
Regulator output is bipolar or positive: 0= Positive, 1 = Bipolar. Regulator output display. It is possible to set this parameter to an analog output in order to perform a reference cascade in multiple DC drive systems.
Value max Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Parameter
No.
Format min
Factory
OPTIONS \ PID \ PID target PID target PID out scale 782 773 U16 Float 0 65535 -100.000 +100.000 0 1.000 Yes Yes R/W R/W -
PID target
Number of the parameter to which the regulator output signal is to be sent. To obtain the correct parameter number, the value 2000H (8192 decimal) must always be added to it. The selectable parameters are those indicated with write access (W or R/W) in Chapter 8.2 List of high-priority parameters. The units of measurement are those indicated in the notes at the end of the chapter.
5/136
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS
PID out scale Adjustment factor of PID output. The value depends on the parameter to which regulator output is to be sent.
Example of programming of speed reference 1 (Speed ref 1 parameter) on PID target: Menu OPTION > PID > PID target > PID target = 8234 For PID target, the number of the parameter to which it is assigned should be chosen from the list in Chapter 8.2. Speed ref 1 has the decimal number 42. To obtain the real address, 8192 must be added: 8192 + 42 = 8234. Note: When the ramp function is enabled, Speed ref 1 is automatically assigned to the ramp output. To ensure that Speed ref 1 is available, the Enable ramp = disable parameter must be set.
The Speed ref 1 parameter is calculated internally by the variable speed DC drive at RPM x 4. Taking into account the fact that PID output generates values between -10000 and +10000, the scale output value must be set through PID out scale. Calculation of PID out scale scale: If at its maximum value = 10000, PID output must correspond to speed reference = 2000 RPM, it is necessary to set: PID out scale = (2000 x 4) / 10000 = 0.8 It is possible to read the value of Speed ref 1 in the parameter of the INPUT VARIABLES \ Speed ref menu. Note: The value of PID out scale is defined according to the system to be controlled. For a better understanding of this topic, please see Application examples.
5/137
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS 5.16.3.8 Initial diameter calculation function

This function allows preliminary calculation of the diameter of a winder/unwinder before starting the line. This allows increased system control by avoiding unwanted dancer deviation. The calculation is based partly on the measurement of dancer movement from its lower limit switch to its central working position, and partly on the measurement of the angular movement of the winder during the initial winding phase. Note: The initial diameter calculation function can only be performed when the winder/ unwinder is controlled by the dancer (and not by a load cell) and when speed feedback is performed by an encoder (not by a tachogenerator).
The result of the calculation is assigned to the PI output PID parameter, thus representing the Feed-Forward multiplier factor, in order to obtain the motor rpm reference. Its value is inversely proportional to the winder diameter.
LEGEND: I/O Parameter Parameter Internal variable
PID feed-back after offset Diameter calc
Minimum diameter Gear box ratio Diameter calc st
Diameter calculation
Speed fbk sel Dancer constant
PI output PID Positioning spd
Encoder 1 position Encoder 2 position

Figure 5.16.3.6: Initial diameter calculation block description.
Max deviation
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
OPTIONS \ PID \ Diameter calc Diameter calc Enabled Disabled Positioning spd [rpm] Max deviation Gear box ratio Dancer constant [mm] Minimum diameter [cm] PI central vs0 PI central vs1 Diameter calc st 794 U16 0 1 Disabled (E) Yes Z/R 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R ID R/W
795 796 797 798 799 780 781 800
I16 I16 Float U16 U16 U16 U16 U16
-100 -10000 0.001 1 1 0 0 0
0 100 0 +10000 8000 1.000 1.000 10000 1 2000 1 OPTIONS \ PID 1 1 1 1 0 0 (D)
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
ID ID QD
R/W R/W R
(D)This parameter can be assigned to a programmable digital output. (E) = This parameter may be assigned to a programmable digital input.
5/138
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS
Diameter calc Enabling of the initial diameter calculating function: Diameter calc = enable. If Diameter calc has been assigned to a digital input, this must be adjusted to Status 1. Motor speed at which the dancer is required to be in its central working position during the initial diameter calculation phase. The value of the maximum shift permitted by the dancer, expressed in A/D converter points. This value is assigned to the start of dancer movement measurement during the initial diameter calculation phase.
Positioning spd Max deviation
Note:
During the preliminary phase of DC drive commissioning, it is necessary to conduct self-calibration of the analog inputs so that, regardless of the voltage of the dancer potentiometer seen through the analog input at its full-range position, it will take on the value of 10000 points. To guarantee a precise movement calculation, the Max deviation parameter must be set at a slightly lower value (by default, Max deviation = 8000). Ratio of reduction between the motor and the winder (< = 1). Expresses the measurement in mm of the accumulated length of band stored.
Gear box ratio Dancer constant
Winder/Unwinder
Dancer
Upper limit switch = +1000 count electrical 0

L
Dancer
Upper limit switch = +1000 count electrical 0

L
Central position of working Lower limit switch = -1000 count
Gear box ratio
One pitch dancer M

Dancer constant = ( L x 2) x 2
Two pitches dancer

Dancer constant = ( L x 2) x 2
Figure 5.16.3.7: Diameter calculation.
Measurement of dancer constant: With the dancer at its lower limit switch, carry out self-calibration of the analog input set as PID feed-back. Display the PID feed-back parameter on the keyboard. Measure and multiply by two the distance in mm between the lower limit switch and the position of the dancer when the PID feed-back parameter reaches the value 0 (electrical 0 position). Multiply this measurement by 2 if the dancer has 2 pitches, by 4 if it has 4, and so on. Minimum diameter Diameter calc st Value of the minimum diameter of the winder (coil core) expressed in cm. Completed initial diameter calculation.
5/139
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS 5.16.3.9 Initial diameter calculation procedure

The calculation is based partly on the measurement of the movement of the dancer from its lower limit switch to its central working position, and partly on the measurement of the angular movement of the winder during the initial winding phase. Therefore, the system band immediately below the unwinder or above the winder must be blocked. Even if the line has sections where the speed is controlled by dancers or load cells, it will first be necessary to carry out the initial phase of winder/unwinder traction alone. The PI central v sel parameter must be set to 0 to avoid PI output PID being automatically programmed to a preset value. The procedure is started by taking the digital input set to the Diameter calc parameter to Status 1 and starting up the DC Drive. During this phase, the Enable PI PID and Enable PD PID parameters are automatically disabled. The regulation verifies the signal from the dancer potentiometer; if this is higher than that set in Max deviation, the motor begins to turn according to the speed reference set in Positioning speed, so that the band winds on to the winder and sends the dancer to its central working position. If the signal from the dancer potentiometer is lower than that set in Max deviation, the motor begins to unwind the band at the speed reference set in Positioning speed, taking the dancer to the point indicated by Max deviation. At this point, the reference is inverted in order to send the dancer back to its central working position. In all events, the polarity of the reference assigned to Positioning speed (winder or unwinder) will be that of the one operating as a winder. When the dancer reaches its central position, the PI output PID parameter is set to a value inversely proportional to the diameter and the Diameter calc parameter is brought to Status 1, signalling the end of the initial diameter calculation phase. At this point, if Enable PI PID and/or Enable PD PID are enabled, the system is regulated automatically. Hence, the digital inputs assigned to Diameter calc, Enable PI PID and/or Enable PD PID can generally be enabled at the same time. Note: The Diameter calc st output signal can be used to reset the Diameter calc command (this command is enabled on the ascending edge of the input, since the DC drive is locked) when the initial diameter calculation phase has ended.
The PI output PID value is calculated using the following formula: PI output PID = (Min diameter x PI top lim) / value of calculated diameter The PI top limit and PI bottom limit parameters of the PI controls menu will be set according to the maximum and minimum diameter of the winder. For a better understanding of this section, see 5.16.3.10 Application examples.
5/140
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS 5.16.3.10 Application examples

Cross-section with dancer
Master Reverse Dancer Forward
Nip-roll
+10V 5Kohm
M -10V
DCV Drive Feed-back
DCV Drive
Feed-forward (Internal ramp master drive)
Line speed reference +10V Forward -10V Reverse

Figure 5.16.3.8: Traction control with dancer arm.
Machine data: Rated speed of slave motor Vn = 3000 RPM Speed of slave motor corresponding to max. line speed = 85% Vn = 2550 RPM Maximum correction given by the dancer = +/- 15% of the line speed, which is +/- 382.5 RPM The slave motor DC drive receives the line speed reference, the feed-back given by the dancer (-10V...+10V) and the commands enabling PID function. The output of the regulator will be sent to speed reference 1. DC drive settings: (only those relating to the PID function are described)
5/141
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS
Inputs/outputs Setting of Digital input 1 as enabling input for PI block of the PID Digital input 1 = Enable PI PID Setting of Digital input 2 as enabling input for the PD block of the PID Digital input 2 = Enable PD PID Setting of Analog input 1 as dancer potentiometer feed-back: Analog input 1 / Select input 1= PID Feed-back Setting of Analog input 2 as line reference input to PID source: Since it is not possible to directly assign PID source to Analog input 2, it is necessary to use an intermediate task word (PAD0...PAD3) ensuring that it has not already been used. 1) Analog input 2 / Select input 2 = PAD 0 2) Assign the PAD 0 parameter number to PID source, (see Chapter 8.2). PAD 0 has the decimal number 503. To obtain the real address, 8192 must be added: Hence, PID source = (8192 + 503) = 8695 Parameters Set Speed base value to the rated speed of the motor. Speed base value =3000 RPM Set PID source Gain so that Feed-fwd PID, in accordance with the maximum analog value on Analog input 2, reaches 85% of its maximum value: 10000 x 0.85 =8500. Warning: When an analog input is assigned to a word, the latter will have a maximum value of +/- 2047. Thus, PID source Gain = (max Feed-fwd PID x 85%) / max PAD 0 = (10000 x 0.85) / 2047 = 4,153
Set PID target as Speed ref 1 speed reference 1. As it is not possible to assign PID target directly to the Speed ref 1 parameter, PID target must be assigned the parameter number corresponding to Speed ref1 (number 42, see Chapter 8.2), to which 8192 must be added to obtain the real address: PID source = (8192 +42) = 8234 N.B.: When the ramp function is enabled, Speed ref 1 is automatically assigned to the ramp output. To make Speed ref 1 available, the Enable ramp parameter must be disabled. Set PID out scale so that Speed ref 1 is the same at 2550 RPM, in accordance with the maximum analog value on Analog input 2 (Feed-fwd PID = 8500), and with Enable PI PID and Enable PD PID = disable. Remember: The Speed ref 1 parameter is calculated internally by the DC Drive at RPM x 4. Taking into account that PID output generates values, in this case, between 8500 and +8500, the scale output value must be set through PID out scale. PID out scale = (2550 x 4) / 8500 = 1.2
5/142
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS
Set PI central v sel = 1. Set PI central v 1 = 1 In the absence of correction by the PI block of the regulator, the line speed reference (FeedForward) must be multiplied x 1 and sent directly to the speed regulator of the DC drive. In this application, the regulator generally carries out an exclusively proportional control. The correction will be a % of the line speed, from 0 to the maximum. Set PI top limit and PI bottom limit so that, with a maximum dancer shift (maximum value of analog input 1 = PID Feed-back), and setting of the proportional gain of the PI block at 15%, it corresponds to an equal proportional correction of line speed reference. Hence, set: PI top limit = 10 PI bottom limit = 0.1 PI: P gain PID = 15% PI: I gain PID = 0% With this type of setting and a correction exclusively proportional to line speed, the PI block is not able to position the dancer, when the machine is off. To intervene, the PD block must be enabled. Set PD P gain PID to a value that will enable positioning of the dancer without too significant variations. For example: PD P gain PID = 1% It is possible to use the derivative part as a damping component of regulation, by setting, for example: PD D gain PID = 5% PD D filter PID = 20ms If this is not necessary, leave these parameters at 0. If a cascade reference is required for another DC drive, set PID output on an analog output. For example: Analog output 1 / Select output 1= PID output (with Real FF PID = 10000 points, Analog output 1 = 10V).
5/143
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS
Cross-section with load cell
Line speed Master
Reverse Forward
Nip-roll
Load cell 0....+10V
E Tension set -10V
DCV Drive
Set Feed-back
DCV Drive
Feed-forward (Internal ramp master drive) Line speed reference +10V Forward -10V Reverse
Figure 5.16.3.9: Traction control with load cell.
Machine data: Rated speed of slave motor Vn = 3000 RPM Speed of slave motor corresponding to max. line speed = 85% Vn = 2550 RPM Maximum correction of load cell = +/- 20% line speed: +/- 510 RPM. The slave motor DC drive receives the line speed reference, the feed-back given by the load (0...+10V), the torque reference (0...-10V), and the commands enabling the PID function. The output of the regulator will be sent to speed reference 1. DC drive settings: (only those relating to the PID function are described)
5/144
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS
Inputs/outputs Setting of Digital input 1 as enabling input for block PI or PID Digital input 1 = Enable PI PID Setting of Digital input 2 as enabling input for PD block of the PID Digital input 2 = Enable PD PID Setting of Analog input 1 as load cell feed-back: Analog input 1 / Select input 1= PID Feed-back Setting of Analog input 2 as line reference input to PID source: Since it is not possible to directly assign PID source to Analog input 2 , an intermediate task word (PAD0...PAD3) must be used, having checked that it has not already been used. 1) Analog input 2 / Select input 2 = PAD 0 2) Assign the PAD 0 parameter number to PID source, (see Chapter 8.2). PAD 0 has the decimal number 503. To obtain the real address, 8192 must be added: Hence, PID source = (8192 + 503) = 8695 Setting of Analog input 3 as a torque reference (PID offset 0): Analog input 3 / Select input 3 / PID offset 0 Parameters Set Speed base value to the rated speed of the motor. Speed base value =3000 RPM Set PID source Gain so that Feed-fwd PID, in accordance with the maximum analog value on Analog input 2, reaches 85% of its maximum value: 10000 x 0.85 =8500. Warning: When an analog input is assigned to a word, the latter will have a maximum value of +/- 2047. Hence, PID source Gain = (max Feed-fwd PID x 85%) / max PAD 0 = (10000 x 0.85) / 2047 = 4,153
Set PID target as Speed ref 1 speed reference 1. As it is not possible to assign PID target directly to the Speed ref 1 parameter, PID target must be assigned the parameter number corresponding to Speed ref1 (number 42, see Chapter 8.2), to which 8192 must be added to obtain the real address: PID source = (8192 +42) = 8234 Note: When the ramp function is enabled, Speed ref 1 is automatically assigned to the ramp output. To make Speed ref 1 available, the Enable ramp parameter must be disabled. Set PID out scale so that Speed ref 1 is the same at 2550 RPM, in accordance with the maximum analog value on Analog input 2 (Feed-fwd PID = 8500), and with Enable PI PID and Enable PD PID = disable. Remember: The Speed ref 1 parameter is calculated internally by the DC drive at RPM x 4. Taking into account that PID output generates values, in this case, between 8500 and +8500, it is necessary to set the scale output value through PID out scale.
PID out scale = (2550 x 4) / 8500 = 1.2
5/145
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS
Set PI central v sel = 1. Set PI central v 1 = 1 In the absence of correction by the PI block of the regulator, the line speed reference (FeedForward) must be multiplied x 1 and sent directly to the speed regulator of the DC drive. With this application, the regulator generally carries out an exclusively proportional-integral control. The correction will be a % of the line speed, from 0 to the maximum. Set PI top limit and PI bottom limit to obtain a maximum PI block correction equal to 20% of the line speed. The PI top limit and PI bottom limit parameters can be regarded as the maximum and minimum multiplier factors, respectively, of the line reference (Feed-Forward). At the maximum line speed, it corresponds to 2550 RPM of the motor (max. Feed-Forward). Maximum correction = 2550 x 20% = 510 RPM 2550 + 510 = 3060 RPM > PI top limit = 3060 / 2550 = 1.2 2550 - 510 = 2040 RPM > PI bottom limit = 2040 / 2550 = 0.80 which corresponds to multiplying the setting of PI central v 1 (= 1) by + 20% (1.2) and - 20% (0.80). With this type of setting and a correction exclusively proportional to line speed, the PI block is not able to generate traction, when the machine is switched off. To intervene, the PD block must be enabled. The gains of the different regulators must be set with a loaded machine. Nonetheless, it is possible to begin tests with the following values (default values): PI: P gain PID = 10% PI: I gain PID = 10% PD: P gain PID = 10% It is possible to use the derivative part as a damping component of regulation, by setting, for example: PD: D gain PID = 5% PD: D filter PID = 20ms If this is not necessary, leave these parameters at 0. If a reference cascade is required for another DC drive, set PID output on an analog output. For example: Analog output 1 / Select output 1= PID output (with Real FF PID = 10000 points, Analog output 1 = 10V). Note: Where necessary to apply traction to the system with null error, even when the machine is switched off, please refer to Section 5.16.3.11: Generic PID.
5/146
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS
Winder/unwinder control with dancer
Winder/unwinder Dancer
Reverse Forward
Nip-roll
+10V 5Kohm
M -10V
DCV Drive Feed-back
DCV Drive
Feed-forward (Internal ramp master drive)
Line speed reference +10V Forward -10V Reverse

Figure 5.16.3.10: Winder/unwinder control with dancer arm
Machine data: Maximum line speed = 400m/min Rated speed of winder motor Vn = 3000 RPM Maximum unwinder diameter = 700mm Minimum unwinder diameter = 100mm Ratio of motor-unwinder reduction= 0.5 Two-pitch dancer Dancer shift from its lower range limit to electrical zero position = 160mm The winder/unwinder motor DC drive receives the line speed reference, the feed-back given by the dancer potentiometer (-10V...+10V) and the commands enabling PID function. The output of the regulator will be sent to speed reference 1. DC drive settings: (only those relating to the PID function are described)
5/147
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS
Inputs/outputs Setting of Digital Input 1 as enabling input for PI block of the PID Digital input 1 = Enable PI PID Setting of Digital Input 2 as enabling input for the PD block of the PID Digital input 2 = Enable PD PID Setting of Digital Input 3 as enabling input for the initial diameter calculation function. Digital input 3 = Diameter calc Setting of Digital Output 1 to signal completed initial diameter calculation phase. Digital output 1 = Diameter calc st Setting of Analog input 1 as dancer potentiometer feed-back: Analog input 1 / Select input 1= PID Feed-back Setting of Analog input 2 as line reference input to PID source: Since it is not possible to directly assign PID source to Analog input 2, an intermediate task word (PAD0...PAD3) must be used, having checked that it has not already been used. 1) Analog input 2 / Select input 2 = PAD 0 2) Assign the PAD 0 parameter number to PID source, (see Chapter 8.2). PAD 0 has the decimal number 503. To obtain the real address, 8192 must be added: Hence, PID source = (8192 + 503) = 8695 Parameters Set Speed base value to the rated speed of the motor. Speed base value = 3000 RPM Set PID source Gain and PID out scale so that, in accordance with the maximum analog value on Analog input 2 and in the absence of correction by the PID (Enable PI PID and Enable PD PID = disable), the peripheral speed of the winder at the minimum diameter (core) is equal to the maximum line speed. Calculation of motor speed in these conditions: Vp = x min x x R where, Vp = peripheral speed of the winder = line speed min = minimum diameter of the winder [m] = motor rpm R = ratio of motor-unwinder reduction = Vp / x min x R = 400 / ( x 0.1 x 0.5) = 2546 RPM, approximately 2550 RPM While maintaining a 15% margin in the regulator saturation limit (10000 points), PID source Gain must be regulated so that Feed-fwd PID, in accordance with the maximum analog value on Analog Input 2, reaches 85% of its maximum value, or 10000 x 0.85 =8500 Warning: When an analog input is assigned to a word, the latter will have a maximum value of +/- 2047. Hence, PID source Gain = (max Feed-fwd PID x 85%) / max PAD 0 = (10000 x 0.85) / 2047 = 4,153 The Speed ref 1 parameter is calculated internally by the DC drive at RPM x 4. Taking into account that PID output generates values, in this case, between 8500 and +8500, the scale output value must be set through PID out scale.
Remember:
PID out scale = (2550 x 4) / (10000 x 0.85) = 1.2
5/148
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS
Set PID target as Speed ref 1 speed reference 1. As it is not possible to assign PID target directly to the Speed ref 1 parameter, PID target must be assigned the parameter number corresponding to Speed ref1 (number 42, see Chapter 8.2), to which 8192 must be added to obtain the real address: PID target = (8192 + 42) = 8234 Note: When the ramp function is enabled, Speed ref 1 is automatically assigned to the ramp output. To make Speed ref 1 available, it is necessary to disable the parameter Enable ramp = disable. Set PI central v sel = 0. Once these settings have been made, it is possible to carry out the initial diameter calculation procedure, which is memorised after calculation. As described earlier, the procedure defines the theoretical multiplier factor (PI output PID) applied to Feed-Forward in proportion to the calculated diameter, in order to send the correct angular speed value to the DC drive. Note: When PI central v sel = 0 is selected and the PI block is disabled, the DC drive memorises or automatically reloads if switched off - the last calculated PI output PID value. If, however, the value must be set in such a way that an uncorrected reference is present at the PID regulator output and hence equal to Feed-Forward, it is possible to assign a digital input as the correction reset. To do so, set: Digital input 4 = PI central v S0 PI central v 1 = 1.00 When the input is changed to Status 1, the value of the PI output PID is reset. Set PI top lim and PI bottom lim according to the winder diameter ratio. The PI top lim and PI bottom lim parameters can be regarded as the maximum and minimum multiplier factors, respectively, of the Feed-Forward. Taking into account that the motor rpm and hence the corresponding reference varies inversely to unwinder/winder diameter, you must set: PI top lim = 1 PI bottom lim = min / max = 0.1 / 0.7 = 0.14 Explanation of these settings: Calculation of the motor rpm: max. = Vl / ( x min x R)
and
min = Vl / ( x max. x R)
where: max. = motor rpm in minimum diameter conditions [RPM] min = motor rpm in maximum diameter conditions [RPM] Vl = line speed min = minimum diameter of the winder [m] max. = maximum diameter of the winder [m] R = ratio of motor-unwinder reduction Hence, max. / min = max. / min hence, min = (min / max) x max.
taking into account that the PI top lim and PI bottom lim parameters can be regarded as the maximum and minimum multiplier factors, respectively, of the Feed-Forward. By multiplying the Feed-Forward by PI top lim = 1, we obtain the maximum speed reference for minimum diameter. By multiplying the Feed-Forward by PI bottom lim = 0.14, we obtain the minimum speed reference for maximum diameter.
5/149
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS
In this application, the regulator carries out exclusively proportional-integral control. The gains of the different regulators must be set with a loaded machine. Nonetheless, it is possible to begin tests with the following values: PI: P gain PID = 15% PI: I gain PID = 8% PD: P gain PID = 5% It is possible to use the derivative part as a damping component of the system, by setting, for ezample: PD: D gain PID = 20% PD: D filter PID = 20ms If a reference cascade is required for another DC drive, set PID output on an analog output. For example: Analog output 1 / Select output 1= PID output (with Real FF PID = 10000 points, Analog output 1 = 10V).
5/150
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS
Initial diameter calculation parameters: This function is always necessary to control a winder or when the initial diameter is not known. Set Positioning spd to the RPM value at which the dancer will be positioned initially. For example: Positioning spd = 15 RPM In all events, the polarity of the reference assigned to Positioning speed (winder or unwinder) will be that of the one operating as a winder. If, for instance, an unwinder is used whose speed reference in normal operation is positive, assign a negative value to Positioning spd. Set Max deviation to a slightly lower value than that corresponding to the maximum mechanical shift permitted by the dancer. During DC drive commissioning, it is necessary to self-calibrate the analog inputs, particularly analog input 1, which will have the value of 10000 points, regardless of the traction of the dancer potentiometer at its lower range limit, as seen through the analog input. To guarantee a precise shift calculation, the Max deviation parameter should be set to a slightly lower value. Max deviation = 8000 (default value) Set Gear box ratio to equal the ratio of reduction between the motor and the winder: Gear box ratio = 0.5 Set the Dancer constant parameter to the value in mm of the total accumulated length of the band stored:
Winder/Unwinder
Dancer
Upper limit switch = +1000 count
Electrical 0
Gear box ratio One pitch dancer
L = 160mm
Dancer constant = ( L x 2) x 2 = = (160 x 2) x 2 = 640mm
Figure 5.16.3.11: Dancer arm constant measurement.
Measurement of Dancer constant and setting of minimum diameter: With the dancer at its lower limit switch, carry out self-calibration of the analog input set as PID feed-back. Display the PID feed-back parameter on the keyboard. Measure and multiply by two the distance in mm between the lower limit and the position of the dancer when the PID feed-back parameter reaches the value 0 (electrical 0 position). Multiply this measurement by 2. In our case, set: Dancer constant = 640mm Minimum diameter Value of the minimum diameter of the winder (coil core) expressed in cm. =10cm
5/151
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS
Use with diameter sensor
Diameter sensor
Winder/unwinder Nip-roll
Dancer
+10V 5Kohm
M -10V
DCV Drive
Feed-back
DCV Drive
Feed-forward
Figure 5.16.3.12: Winder/unwinder control with dancer and diameter sensor.
The diameter sensor can be used with automatic change winders. In these cases, the initial diameter value is required to calculate the motor rpm reference, before inserting the new coil. The transducer must be calibrated to supply a voltage signal proportional to the unwinder diameter.
V 10V
5V
1V 90 Fmin
450
900 Fmax
Figure 5.16.3.13: Transducer signal and unwinder signal direction.
5/152
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS
Example : min = 90 mm max = 900 mm = 450 mm transducer output transducer output transducer output = 1V = 10V = 5V
The analog input connected to the sensor must be set as PI central V3. The PI central v sel parameter should be set to 3. When Enable PI PID = disable, the value of PI central V3 is indicated in PI output PID and used as a Feed-Forward multiplier factor. As indicated in other parts of the manual, the setting of PI output PID depends on the diameters ratio. Therefore, the voltage signal proportional to the diameter will automatically be recalculated using the formula: PI central V3 = (0 / 1) Where, 0 = minimum diameter of the winder 1 = actual diameter of the winder Result: 3 digits after the comma (even if the display does not have 2 digits after the comma). Note: During commissioning, the signal from the sensor must be checked to ensure that it is proportional to the diameter and that its maximum value is 10V (in all events, carry out self-calibration of the analog input).
Moreover, PI top lim and PI bottom lim must be checked to ensure that they have been set according to the diameter ratio as described in the examples above.
5/153
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS
Pressure control for pumps and extruders
Extruder
M Pressure transducer -10V Set Pressure setting 0... +10V
Feed-back
Feed-fwd
Drive
+10V Speed reference

Figure 5.16.3.14: Pressure control for pumps and extruders.
Machine data: Rated speed of extruder motor Vn = 3000 RPM Pressure transducer 0... +10V The extruder motor DC drive receives the speed reference, the feed-back given by the pressure transducer (0....+10V), the pressure reference (0...-10V), and the commands enabling the PID function. The output of the regulator will be sent to speed reference 1. DC drive settings: (only those relating to the PID function are described) Inputs/outputs Setting of Digital input 1 as enabling input for PI block of the PID Digital input 1 = Enable PI PID Setting of Digital input 2 as enabling input for the PD block of the PID Digital input 2 = Enable PD PID Setting of Analog input 1 as feedback from the pressure transducer: Analog input 1 / Select input 1= PID Feed-back Setting of Analog input 2 as speed reference input for the ramp: Analog input 2 / Select input 2 = Ramp ref 1 The ramp output must be used as a speed reference (feed-forward). Setting of Analog input 3 as pressure reference input (PID offset 0). Analog input 3 / Select input 3 / PID offset 0
5/154
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS
Parameters Set Speed base value to the rated speed of the motor. Speed base value =3000 RPM Set Ramp output to PID source: Assign the number of the Ramp output parameter to PID source (see Chapter 8.2). Ramp output has the decimal number 113. To obtain the real address, 8192 must be added: Hence, PID source = (8192 + 113) = 8305 Set PID source Gain so that Feed-fwd PID, in accordance with the maximum value of Ramp output (corresponding to the maximum value of analog input 2), reaches 100% of its value: 10000. The ramp reference and its output automatically take on the value declared as the Speed base value as their maximum value. It should be remembered that any parameter linked to motor speed is handled internally by the DC drive with a multiplier factor of 4 (RPM x4). Thus, PID source Gain = max Feed-fwd PID / (Speed base value x 4) = 10000 / (3000 x 4) = 0.833 Set PID target as Speed ref 1 speed reference 1. As it is not possible to assign PID target directly to the Speed ref 1 parameter, PID target must be assigned the parameter number corresponding to Speed ref1 (number 42, see Chapter 8.2), to which 8192 must be added to obtain the real address: PID source = (8192 +42) = 8234 Note: When the ramp function is enabled, Speed ref 1 is automatically assigned to the ramp output. To make Speed ref 1 available, it is necessary to disable the parameter Enable ramp = disable.
Set PID out scale so that, in accordance with the maximum analog value on Analog input 2 (Feed-fwd PID = 10000) and with Enable PI PID and Enable PD PID = disable, Speed ref 1 is equal to 3000 RPM. The Speed ref 1 parameter is set in RPM x 4. Hence, PID out scale = (3000 x 4) / 10000 = 1.2 Set PI central v sel = 1. Set PI central v 1 = 1 In the absence of correction by the regulator PI block, the line speed reference (Feed-Forward) must be multiplied by 1 and sent directly to the DC drive speed regulator. Set PI top limit and PI bottom limit for maximum correction of the PI block equal to 100% of the speed reference. The PI top limitand PI bottom limit parameters can be regarded as the maximum and minimum multiplier factors, respectively, of the Feed-Forward. PI top limit = 1 PI bottom limit = 0 For this application, the regulator carries out an exclusively proportional-integral control. The gains of the different regulators must be set with a loaded machine. Nonetheless, it is possible to begin tests with the following values (default values): PI: P gain PID = 10% PI: I gain PID = 20% PD: P gain PID = 10% It is possible to use the derivative part as a damping component of the system, by setting, for instance: PD: D gain PID = 5% PD: D filter PID = 20ms If this is not necessary, leave these parameters at 0.
5/155
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS 5.16.3.11 Generic PID

DC drive settings: (only those relating to the PID function are described) Inputs/outputs Setting of Digital input 1 as enabling input for PI block of the PID Digital input 1 = Enable PI PID Setting of Digital input 2 as enabling input for the PD block of the PID Digital input 2 = Enable PD PID Setting of Analog input 1 as feedback of the value to be set. Analog input 1 / Select input 1= PID Feed-back Setting of Analog input 2 as reference input for the value to be set (PID offset 0). Analog input 2 / Select input 2 =PID offset 0 Parameters When the regulator is to be used as a generic PID and hence independently of Feed-Forward, the Feed-fwd PID parameter must be set to its maximum value. To do so, it is necessary to go through an intermediate word (PAD), making sure that it has not already been used: Associate the number of the PAD 0 parameter to PID source (see Chapter 8.2). PAD 0 has the decimal number 503. To obtain the real address, 8192 must be added: Hence, PID source = (8192 + 503) = 8695 Set PAD 0 = 10000 Note: When PAD 0 = -10000, the regulator output polarity is reversed.
Set PID source Gain = 1 Set PID target with the number of the parameter to which the regulator output will be sent. To obtain the actual address, add 8192. The parameters assignable to the regulator output are those accessible in the lists in Chapter 8.2 Set PID out scale according to the min. and max. scale of the parameter to which regulator output is sent (Chapter 8.2). The speed parameters are expressed as [SPD], corresponding to the speed in RPM x 4. For all DC drive sizes, the rated current is equivalent to 2000 current points [CURR] (see the notes at the end of Chapter 8.2). Thus, to set the regulator output on the scale when, for instance, it is assigned to the T current ref 1 parameter: PID out scale = 2000 / max. PID output = 2000 / 10000 = 0.2 Note: If the regulator output is required to be set in such a way as to allow the DC drive to supply a current 1.5 times its rated current: PID out scale = 0.2 x 1.5 = 0.3 In this case, do not forget to enable the Overload contr overload control function by correctly setting the values for Overload current, Overload time, Base current and Pause time. The DC drive does not check the polarity of the value sent. Therefore, if the regulator output is to be sent to unsigned parameters (indicated by the letter U in the table, it is preferable to set the PID output in such a way that it can only be positive: PID out. sign PID = 0 (only positive output)
Warning!
5/156
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS
Set PI central v sel = 1. Set PI central v 1 = 0 With this configuration, when the PID regulator validation parameters are enabled, the regulator output starts at 0. When it is necessary to save the last calculated value, even when the machine has been switched off, a programmed digital input must be used, such as: Digital input xx = PI central v S0 PI central v 1 = 0 When the digital input is at Status 0, the last calculated value is stored in the memory. When it is changed to Status 1, the value is reset. Set PI top lim and PI bottom lim to obtain a correction of the PI block equal to 100% of its maximum value. PI top lim = 1 PI bottom lim = -1 With these settings, the PI block output can be positive or negative. By setting PI top lim to 0, the positive part is blocked. By setting PI bottom lim to 0, the negative part is blocked. The gains of the different regulators must be set with a loaded machine. Nonetheless, it is possible to begin tests with the following values: PI: P gain PID = 10% PI: I gain PID = 4% PD: P gain PID = 10% It is possible to use the derivative part as a damping component of the system, by setting, for example: PD: D gain PID = 5% PD: D filter PID = 20ms If this is not necessary, leave these parameters at 0.
5.16.3.12 Dynamic modification of the integral gain of the PI block

Normally, the integral gain of the PID is set to a lower value because the ratio of the winding diameters is high. Nonetheless, while too high a value offers good adjustment of regulation with small diameters, it produces significant system instability when the winder reaches a high diameter. Similarly, too low an integral gain value would, at a minimum diameter, result in a lack of precision in dancer position compared to its greater electric zero position as line speed increases. This is due to the fact that the loading and unloading time of the integral component is lower than diameter variation time. In the case of high ratio diameters, it may be necessary to dynamically modify the values of the integral component of the regulator (PI I gain PID parameter) to the actual value of the diameter. This is possible with the LINK (calculations) function in the Spec Functions menu. Example allowing control of a winder whose diameters are at a ratio of 1 to 10: The LINK 1 function will be used to connect the diameter to PI I gain PID. The behaviour of PI I gain PID must be inversely proportional to the diameter. Remember that the output value of PI output PID already follows this direction. In fact, it varies according to the 0 / act relationship. Where, 0 = minimum diameter of the winder act = current coil diameter The operation to be performed by the LINK is: PI output PID x KI = PI I gain PID
5/157
5 - Main functions
5.16 Options
OPTIONS
Where KI corresponds to the value of the integral component of the regulator at the minimum diameter.
Let us assume that tests performed at minimum diameter and maximum speed reveal that the dancer is stable at 0 position with a PI: I gain PID integral gain value of 40%. The LINK source must be assigned to PI output PID (parameter no. 771*): Source link 1 = 8192 + 771 = 8963 The LINK destination must be assigned to PI output PID (parameter no. 764*): Destination link 1 = 8192 +764 = 8956
* Do not forget to add 8182 to the parameter for correct assignment.
The calculation settings should be: Mul gain link 1 = 40 Div gain link 1 = 1000* Input max link 1 = 1000* Input min link 1 = 100** Input offset link 1 = 0 Output offset link 1 = 0 Input absolute link 1 = OFF
* The value 1000 is defined by PI top lim which, in this case, will be = 1 (corresponding to a maximum value of PI output PID = 1000). ** The value 100 is defined by PI bottom lim which, in this case, will be = 0.1 (corresponding to a minimum value of PI output PID = 100).
With this configuration, at minimum diameter, it will correspond to an integral gain = 40% and at maximum diameter, an integral gain = 4%. Between the two points, the gain will vary hyperbolically.
40%
1000
PI I gain PID =
act
) x KI
PI output PID
PI I gain PID
[KI = 40%]
500
20%
8%
200
4%
100 100
o
200
500
1000
max
Figure 5.16.3.15: Relation between PI I Gain PID and PI I Output PID.
The value of PI I gain PID will be displayed in the parameter of the PI controls submenu. Similarly, if necessary, it is possible to dynamically modify the proportional gain PI P gain PID, using LINK 2.
5/158
Feed-fwd PID
OPTIONS
Gain
PID out scale 0 ms 1
PI steady delay
PID source
thr Steady state Gain

0 PI P gain PID 10 % P init gain PID 10 % PID target
PID source gain
thr2
sign PID
Real FF PID 0
5.16 Options
PI top lim 10 PI output PID Enable PI PID
PID out. sign PID Bipolar
PID offset 0
PID offs. sel.
Offset 0
PID offset 1
+ S +
PI bottom lim 0 PI output PID PI central v1 1 PI central v2
Gain Feed fwd sign: pos gain = -1 neg gain = +1

ON T
PID output
PID acc time
5 - Main functions
0 s
PI I gain PID 10 % I init gain PID 10 % PI central v sel 1 Off PI integr freeze
Figure 5.16.3.16 General diagram of the PID regulator.

1
PID dec time
0 s
sign PID
PI central v3 10 % PD P gain 2 PID 10 % Enable PD PID PD P gain 3 PID 10 % PD output PID 1
Diameter calc st Diameter calc
PID feed-back PD P gain 1 PID
Enable drive Disable drive
+
T ON
x
+
Minimum diameter 1 cm Gear box ratio 1 Speed fbk sel Encoder 2 PI output PID
PID feed-back
PID clamp
PID error
10000
Act tension ref PD D gain 1 PID 1 % PD D gain 2 PID 1 % PD D gain 3 PID 1 % PD D filter PID 0 ms
0%
Calcul diamtre initial Encoder 1 position
Positioning spd 0 rpm Max deviation 8000 Dancer constant
PID error gain
Encoder 2 position
1 mm
5/159
5 - Main functions
Note:
5/160
6 - Winding/Unwinding function
The slaving function with the internal diameter to the DCV DC Drives is used to control the winders and unwinders whose tension regulation uses an open or closed loop. Besides the calculation functions for the torque, diameter and Taper tension compensations (reduction of tension with the diameter) the system also provides for the calculation of the speed reference for the motor. Such a function enables the drive to be used in the four regulation quadrants for controlling both the winders and the unwinders, and to control the motor with a peripheral speed proportional to the diameter in the event of a breakage in the material being wound. The torque is also regulated according to the flux of the motor which means that this system is suitable for controlling motors working in full flux mode (area with constant torque), as in field weakening mode (area with constant power). For closed loop regulation by strain gauge, an analogue input of 0-10 V, 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA is provided. The output from the diameter slaving function is sent directly to the current limits; the specific parameters T current lim +/- and the limits fixed by the programmable overload function are always active in order to protect both the power bridge and the motor; among the three possible limits, the lowest must be used. Input / Output Line spd source
Ref spd source
The value assigned to this parameter defines the assignment of the line speed. This speed is used exclusively for calculating the diameter. The speed threshold below for which the calculation is blocked Ref speed thr, refers to Ref line speed. Can be programmed as analog or encoder input. The value assigned to this parameter defines the assignment of the line reference. This is used exclusively for the following calculation: - of inertia compensations - of the line speed reference. Can be programmed as analog or encoder input. Reference as a % of the tension; 10 V (20 mA) = 100 %. Reduction as a % of the Taper tension; 10 V (20 mA) = 100%. Adjustment of the initial diameter; 10 V (20 mA) = max diameter. Actual diameter; 10 V = max diameter. Image of the tension reduced by the Taper %; 10 V = 100% Tension ref. Display of torque current; 5 V = I rated - permanent value for the DC drive. Image of angular speed 10 V = 100 % Base omega (max speed programmed for the minimum radius and maximum line speed). Display of active compensations (adds static and dynamic inertia friction values); 5 V = I rated - permanent value for the DC drive. Activates the diameter slaving function. Blocking of the diameter calculation. If activated and if the winder, the diameter calculated may not be decreased: if the unwinder, the diameter calculated may not be increased. Used to increase the stability of the system. Selection of winder/unwinder: 0 = winder, 1 = unwinder.
Analog inputs Tension ref Tension red Diam preset 3 Analog outputs Roll diameter Act tension ref Torque current W reference Actual comp Digital inputs Torque winder En Diam calc Dis Diam inc/dec En
Wind/unwind
6/1
Winder side Selection of winding/unwinding direction: 0 = up, 1 = down. Diam preset sel 0 LSB digital input; preselection of the initial diameter. Diam preset sel 1 MSB digital input; preselection of the initial diameter. Diam reset Reset calculated diameter. Taper Enable Activation of taper function. Speed match Commands the start phase of the reel for automatic change. Line acc status Line signalling input in acceleration phase. Line dec status Line signalling input in deceleration phase. Line fstp status Line signalling input in quick deceleration phase. These three last inputs, if entered by the control system, are used to pass from the internal line acceleration calculation. Speed demand En Closed loop En Digital outputs Diameter reached Spd match compl Activation of speed reference calculation. Activation of regulation in closed loop mode.
Signals diameter limit reached. Signals starting speed reached.
6/2
6.1 Diameter estimation
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
OPTIONS \ TORQUE WINDER \ Diam Calculatio Roll diameter [m] Line speed [%] Ref line speed [%] Diam calc Dis ON OFF Diam inc/dec En Enabled Disabled Wind/unwind Unwinder Winder Minimum diameter [mm] Maximum diameter [m] Line spd source Ref spd source Line speed gain Ref speed gain Base omega [rpm] Ref speed thr [%] Diam filter [ms] Diam init filter [ms] Diam stdy delay [ms] Diam reset Diam thr [%] Diam reached Diam preset sel Diam preset 0 [m] Diam preset 1 [m] Diam preset 2 [m] Diam preset 3 [m] 1205 U16 0 1 1154 1160 1286 1161 Float Float Float U16 0.000 0.00 0.00 0 32.000 200.00 200.00 1 (A) Yes Yes Yes Yes R R R R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/Z R/Z R/Z R/Z R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W QA ID R/W
ON (1) Enabled (0) Winder (0) 100 1000 0 0 0 0 1500 5 100 100 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0
(E)
(E)
Yes
ID
R/W
1187
U16
(E)
Yes
ID
R/W
799 1153 1204 1284 1156 1285 1163 1155 1162 1206 1207 1157 1158 1159 1168 1164 1165 1166 1167
U16 Float U16 U16 I16 I16 U16 Float U16 U16 U16 U16 Float U16 U16 Float Float Float Float
1 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
2000 32.000 65535 65535 32767 32767 8191 150.00 5000 5000 60000 1 150.00 1 3 32.000 32.000 32.000 32.000
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
ID QD ID IA
R/W R -
(E) (D) (E)
(C)
(A) This parameter can be assigned to a programmable analog output. (C) This parameter can be assigned to a programmable analog input. (D)This parameter can be assigned to a programmable digital output. (E) = This parameter may be assigned to a programmable digital input.
The diameter calculator receives the motor rpm and the line speed as inputs. The latter can be measured through an analog input from an encoder input. The value of the diameter calculated can be assigned to an analog output; using a discrete output, it is also possible to signal that a configurable threshold has been passed. It is possible to select four values of initial diameter one of which may come from an analog input. Roll diameter Line speed Diam calc Dis Display of the calculated diameter expressed in [m]. Display of the line speed expressed in [%]. Disabling of the diameter calculation (see also by. Line speed thr). If any function is temporarily disabled during operation, the system keeps the last calculated value in memory.
6/3
Diam inc/dec En
If activated and if the winder, the diameter calculated may not be decreased: if the unwinder, the diameter calculated may not be increased. Used to increase the stability of the system. Selection of winder/unwinder: Selection is made using an on-off signal: 0 V = winder, +24 V = unwinder. Value of minimum diameter expressed in [mm]. Value of maximum diameter expressed in [mm]. Line speed assignment parameter. To obtain the actual number to enter, +2000H (8192 in decimal) must be added to the value of the parameter. Example of assignment of Encoder 1 (connector XE1) to Line speed source: OPTION Menu > Torque winder > Diam calculation > Line speed source = 8619 Paragraph 10.4 List of high priority parameters shows that Enc 1 speed has the decimal value 427. To obtain the value to enter, 8192 in decimal must be added (fixed offset): 8192 + 427 = 8619. Example of assignment of analog input 2 to Line speed source: a) programming input to a PAD parameter I/O CONFIG Menu > Analog input > Analog input 2 > Select input 2 = PAD 0 b) adjustment of PAD 0 as line speed input: OPTION Menu > Torque winder > Diam calculation > Line speed source = 8695 Paragraph 10.4. List of high priority parameters shows that PAD 0 has the decimal value 503. To obtain the value to enter, 8192 in decimal must be added (fixed offset): 8192 + 503 = 8695
Wind/unwind Minimum diameter Maximum diameter Line spd source
Line speed gain
Value of calibration for line speed. This coefficient depends on the assignment parameter and gives Line speed = 100 % of the maximum line speed. Line speed gain must be carried out using the formula: [32768 x 16384 / (maximum value of assignment parameter x 8)] -1 Example of assignment of Encoder 1 (connector XE1) to Line speed source: If the rotation speed of the encoder is not known, the input value to Encoder 1 can be read in the MONITOR menu > Measurements > Speed > Speed in rpm > Enc 1 speed
6/4
Remember that the DC drive converts the speed in RPM x 4 internally to the drive, so supposing we have at the maximum Enc 1 speed = 1500 rpm : Line speed gain = [32768 x 16384 / (1500 x 4 x 8) - 1] = 11184 Example of assignment of analog input 2 to Line speed source: When an analog input is adjusted to a PAD parameter, its maximum value is + / - 2048, to give Line speed = 100 %: Line speed gain = [32768 x 16384 / (2048 x 8) - 1] = 32767 (To obtain fine tuning, it is necessary to carry out self-tuning on the analog input). Base omega Line speed thr Value in [rpm] corresponding to the maximum angular speed of the winder/unwinder (on the motor shaft). Line speed threshold expressed as a %. When Line speed is less than Line speed thr, the diameter calculation is blocked. The diameter is kept at a constant value. When Line speed exceeds the threshold, the diameter calculation is activated with an initial filter corresponding to Diam init filter for the adjusted time in Diam stdy delay. At the end of this time, the filter will be adjusted to Diam filter. Filter on the diameter calculation expressed in [ms]. Initial filter on the diameter calculation expressed in [ms]. Time in [ms] during which the value of Diam init filter is maintained active after Line speed thr has been exceeded. Reset to calculated diameter. When this parameter is enabled, the diameter takes a starting value selected with Diam preset sel. Programmable diameter threshold expressed as a % of Maximum diameter. The passing of the threshold is detected by Diam reached which can be sent to a discrete output. Signals the diameter threshold has been passed. initial diameter selector [0...3]. Diam preset sel can be adjusted directly using the keyboard or using the two discrete inputs configured as Diam preset sel 0 and Diam preset sel 1, the selection in this case being done using binary logic. initial diameter 0 expressed in [m]. The input value must lie between Minimum diameter and Maximum diameter. Initial diameter 1 expressed in [m]. The input value must lie between Minimum diameter and Maximum diameter. Initial diameter 2 expressed in [m]. The input value must lie between Minimum diameter and Maximum diameter. Initial diameter 3 expressed in [m]. The input value must lie between Minimum diameter and Maximum diameter. Can be assigned to an analog input. In this case 10V corresponds to Maximum diameter and the voltage relative to the minimum diameter will be = 10 x (Minimum diameter / Maximum diameter).
Diam filter Diam init filter Diam stdy delay Diam reset Diam thr
Diam reached Diam preset sel
Diam preset 0 Diam preset 1 Diam preset 2 Diam preset 3
6/5
6.2 Torque calculation
The torque calculator comprises three blocks: 1. Calculation of the torque as a function of the radius of the winder/unwinder and the adjusted tension: C = T x r 2. Calculation of static, dynamic and inertia compensations 3. If the Taper function is enabled, the tension curve is calculated as a function of the radius. The tension and Taper reduction references may be sent to an analog input, serial link or by means of the CAN open card. The calculation of angular acceleration, required for inertia compensations can be carried out using a suitable internal function or by declaring the line acceleration, deceleration and fast deceleration statuses using three digital inputs. The link to the PID function is also part of the compensations block. Such a link is required when tension is controlled in closed loop mode with a load sensor. The result of the calculation is sent directly to the current limits of the DC Drive and can be monitored using parameters In use Tcur lim + and In use Tcur lim - from the LIMITS menu. The standard parameters T current lim +/- and the limits fixed by the programmable overload function are active in any case in order to protect both the power bridge and the motor; among the three possible values, the lowest must be used. It is also possible to define a specific current limit for the starting function of the reel during an automatic change. The value of the resulting tension and that of the current corresponding to the calculated torque may be displayed on the analog outputs.
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Factory
OPTIONS \ TORQUE WINDER \ Torque calculat Tension ref [%] Tension scale [%] Act tension ref [%] Torque current [%] 1180 1181 1194 1193 Float I16 Float Float 0.00 0 0.00 0.00 199.99 200 199.99 200.00 0 100 (C) Yes Yes Yes Yes R/W R/W R R IA QA -
(A)
(A) This parameter can be assigned to a programmable analog input. (C) This parameter can be assigned to a programmable analog input.
Tension ref Tension scale
Tension reference expressed as a %. Current scale factor for the torque expressed as a %. This parameter is used when the value of the maximum winding torque must be limited or in the case of regulation in closed loop mode in order to adapt the value of the current for the torque to the actual tension on the material as measured by the load sensor. To set, please refer to paragraph Application example.
Act tension ref
Display of the tension reference as a % reduced to % Taper, defined by means of Tension red ; if the Taper function is not enabled, corresponds to Tension ref. Display of current required for the torque expressed as a %.
Torque current
6/6
6.2.1 Compensations and closure of the tension control loop

Keyp. RS Term D/P
OPTIONS \ TORQUE WINDER \ Torque calculat \ Comp calculat Int acc calc En Enabled Disabled Time acc/dec min [s] Acc/dec filter [ms] Line acc [%] Line dec [%] Line fast stop [%] Line acc status Line dec status Line fstp status Variable J comp [%] Constant J comp [%] Act var J comp [%] Act const J comp [%] Mat width [%] Static f [%] Dinamic f [%] Static f Zero Enabled Disabled Actual comp [%] Closed loop En Enabled Disabled Close loop comp 1183 U16 0 1 Enabled (1) 9.01 30 100 100 100 OFF OFF OFF 0 0 0 0 100 0 0 Disabled (0) 1213 1214 I16 U16 -200 0 +200 1 Disabled (0) 1208 I16 -32767 +32767 Yes
(E)
Yes
1182 1212 1184 1185 1186 1188 1189 1190 1171 1172 1192 1191 1173 1174 1175 1287
Float U16 Float Float Float U16 U16 U16 Float Float Float Float Float Float Float U16
0.15 0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0 0 0 0.00 -100.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0
300.00 5000 100.00 100.00 100.00 1 1 1 199.99 +100.00 200.00 200.00 100.00 199.99 199.99 1
(E) (E) (E)
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes
R/Z 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 0 R R/Z 1 0 R
ID ID ID -
R/W R/W R/W -
QD -
R/Z
Int acc calc En
Enable calculation of the reel acceleration. If enabled, this function calculates the angular acceleration internally. In this case, it is only necessary to adjust the value of Time acc/dec min. If it is disabled, it is necessary to fix parameters Line acc %, Line dec % , Fast stop % and Time acc/dec min and provide status information corresponding to the digital inputs. Time expressed in [s] corresponding to the smallest time values for acceleration, deceleration and fast deceleration. Filter expressed in [ms] on the internal acceleration calculation.
Time acc/dec min Acc/dec filter
6/7
Line acc %
Acceleration time expressed as a % of Time acc/dec min. Ex: Acceleration = line deceleration = 10 s Fast deceleration (fast stop) = 5 s Time acc/dec min = 5 s Line acc % = (5 / 10) x 100 = 50 % Deceleration time expressed as a % of Time Acc/dec min. Ex: Acceleration = line deceleration = 10 s Deceleration (fast stop) = 5 s Time acc/dec min = 5s Line dec % = (5 / 10) x 100 = 50 % Fast deceleration time expressed as a % of Time Acc/dec min. Ex: Acceleration = line deceleration = 10 s Fast deceleration (fast stop) = 5 s Time acc/dec min = 5 s Line fast stop % = (5 / 5) x 100 = 100 % Signalling input: line accelerating Signalling input: line decelerating Both signals are combined with outputs Acc state and Dec state (see fig. 6.2.1.1).
Line dec %
Line fast stop %
Line acc status Line dec status
Ramp output
Acc status
Dec status
Figure 6.2.1.1: Acceleration and deceleration signalling.
Line fstp status Variable J comp
Signalling input: line in process of fast deceleration Compensation of variable inertias due to the rolled material expressed as a % of the rated current of the DC Drive. For the setting, see paragraph Application example. Compensation of fixed inertias (motor, gearbox, chuck, shell, etc) expressed as a % of the rated current of the DC Drive. For the setting, see paragraph Application example.
Constant J comp
6/8
Act const J comp Act var J comp Mat width Static f Dinamic f Static f Zero
Display of the active compensation of the variable part expressed as a % of the rated current of the DC Drive. Display of the active compensation of the fixed part expressed as a % of the rated current of the DC Drive. Setting of the width of the rolled material expressed as a % of the maximum width. Compensation of static frictions expressed as a % of the rated current of the DC Drive. For the setting, see paragraph Application example. Compensation of dynamic frictions expressed as a % of the rated current of the DC Drive. For the setting, see paragraph Application example. By setting the parameter to Enabled, the friction compensation is fully enabled for all speeds. When it is set to Disabled, the compensation for static frictions is fully enabled with Ref line speed = 1.5%. Display of active compensations (addition of static and dynamic frictions and inertia) expressed as a % of the rated current of the DC Drive. Enabling of the tension loop closure (to be used with a load sensor). Display of the active compensation, output from the PID regulator used for closing the loop.
Act comp Closed loop En Closed loop comp
6/9
6.2.2 Taper function (tension reduction with diameter)

Keyp. RS Term D/P
OPTIONS \ TORQUE WINDER \ Torque calculat \ Taper function Taper enable Enabled Disabled Init diameter [m] Final diameter [m] Tension ref [%] Tension red [%] Act tension ref [%] 1176 U16 0 1 Disabled (0) 0.1 1 0 0 0 (E) Yes R/W 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R ID R/W
1177 1178 1180 1179 1194
Float Float Float Float Float
0.000 0.000 0.00 0.00 0.00
32.000 32.000 199.99 199.99 200.00
(C) (C) (A)
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
IA IA QA
(A) This parameter can be assigned to a programmable analog output. (C) This parameter can be assigned to a programmable analog input. (E) = This parameter may be assigned to a programmable digital input.
Act tension ref Tension ref
Tension ref x 1 -
Tension red 100 Min diameter Init diameter Roll diameter Max diameter Final diameter
Figure 6.2.2.1: relationship between parameters of the Taper function.
Taper Enable Init diameter Final diameter Tension ref Tension red Act tension ref
Activation of taper function. Diameter for the start of the Taper tension reduction expressed in meters. Diameter for the end of the Taper tension reduction expressed in meters. Tension reference expressed as a %. Reduction of the Taper tension expressed as a % of Tension ref. Display of the active tension reference expressed as a % of Tension ref.
6/10
6.3 Estimation of speed reference
The calculation and management of the motor rpm reference allows working in four quadrants and controls the motor with a peripheral speed proportional to the diameter in the event of a breakage in the rolled material. A program block such as this also contains management of the starting reference for the reel during the automatic change and tensioning phases of a stopped line. The output from the computer may be sent to one of the four possible speed references or to an analog output.
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Factory
OPTIONS \ TORQUE WINDER \ Speed demand Speed demand En Enabled Disabled Winder side Down Up W gain [%] Speed match ON OFF Spd match gain [%] Spd match acc [s] Spd match dec [s] Spd match compl Spd match torque [%] W offset [rpm] Offset acc time [s] W target W reference [rpm] Jog TW enable Enabled Disabled Jog TW speed [%] 1215 U16 0 1 Disabled (0) Up (0) 0 OFF (0) 100 83.88 83.88 (D) 100 0 83.88 0 Disabled (0) 0 (A) (E) Yes R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W R/W 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/Z R R/W 1 0 R/W R/W
1201
U16
(E)
Yes
ID
R/W
1202 1195
U16 U16
0 0
100 1
(E)
Yes Yes
ID
R/W
1200 1196 1197 1203 1216 1199 1198 1210 1217 1256
U16 Float Float U16 U16 I16 Float U16 I16 U16
0 0.30 0.30 0 0 0 0.30 0 -8192 0
150 300.00 300.00 1 200 1000 950.00 65535 +8192 1
QD QA ID
R R/W
1255
I16
100
Yes
(A) This parameter can be assigned to a programmable analog output. (D)This parameter can be assigned to a programmable digital output. (E) = This parameter may be assigned to a programmable digital input.
Speed demand En Winder side W gain
Activation of speed reference calculation. Selection of winding/unwinding direction: 0 = up, 1 = down. Adjustment of the speed reference gain used for saturating the loop. Parameter expressed as a % of the increase/decrease of the angular speed reference. Commands the start phase of the reel for automatic change. Adjustment of the speed reference during the starting phase, 100% corresponds to a peripheral speed equal to the line speed. Acceleration time of the motor during the startup phase, in [s]. Deceleration time of motor in [s] if, during the startup phase a stop command is given.
Speed match Spd match gain Spd match acc Spd match dec
6/11
Spd match compl Spd match torque
Signalling of startup ramp completed if this is assigned to a digital output, it can be used to indicate that the reel may be changed. Adjustment of the current for the torque during the startup and changeover phase. This parameter is expressed in the % of the rated drive current. Adjustment of the offset on the speed reference for tensioning the winder/unwinder when the line has stopped. This parameter is expressed in [rpm]. Adjustment of the material tensioning ramp when the machine has stopped. This parameter is expressed in [s]. It refers to Speed base value. Assignment of the speed reference. To obtain the actual number to enter, +2000H (8192 in decimal) must be added to the value of the parameter where the speed reference is addressed. 1. Example of addressing on the speed 2 reference: OPTION Menu > Torque winder > Speed demand > W target = 8235 Paragraph 8.2. List of high priority parameters shows that Speed ref 2 has the decimal value 43. To obtain the number to enter, 8192 in decimal must be added (fixed offset): 8192 + 43 = 8235. Display of the speed reference. Enabling of the Jog function (pulsed running). Jog speed reference. This parameter is expressed as a % of Line speed
W offset
Offset acc time
W target
W reference Jog TW enable Jog TW speed
6/12
Management of the speed reference To calculate the speed reference during the various operating phase of the machine, a logic state has been developed. The operational sequence of these states is shown in figure 6..3.1
Int acc time = 0 Int dec time = Spd match dec Int offset acc time = 0 Int w offset = 0
Status 1 (default)
Int acc time = 0 Int dec time = 0 Int offset acc time = Offset acc time Int w offset = W offset
ar St
th r
t( iv dr
Sp ee
Start (drive) = 1
e) = 1
Status 2
Status 5
Start (drive) = 0 Start (drive) = 0
Speed match = 1
Sta
rt ( dri
ve
)=
0
Status 3
Status 4
Speed match = 0 Int acc time = 0 Int dec time = 0 Int offset acc time = 0 Int w offset = W offset
Figure 6.3.1: Operational sequence of operational status.
Int acc time = Spd match acc Int dec time = 0 Int offset acc time = 0 Int w offset = 0
Status 1: Status 2:
Default status, the system is in this condition when the drive has stopped. The speed reference is zero. The system changes to this status when the Start command is given. When the line is stopped, the tensioning reference W offset is assigned with the ramp time Offset acc time. When the line has started, the motor speed reference follows its profile with a value of: W reference = Line speed x (Minimum diameter Roll diameter) (W gain % + W offset) The sign of: Line speed x (Minimum diameter Roll diameter) is positive if Wind/unwind = winder is negative if Wind/unwind = unwinder The sign of: (W gain % + W offset) is normally positive. It can only be reversed if, during the acceleration and deceleration phases, a torque inversion is requested. The polarity of W reference thus calculated will later be reversed if Winder side = 1 (winding/unwinding from the bottom). If during operation in status 1 the system receives a Stop (Start drive = 0) command, status 5 is imposed.
6/13
Status 3:
The system changes to this state if the command Speed match = 1 and the Start command are given. Starting from the Stop condition, if these commands are given, the motor speed reference is fixed with: W reference = [ Line speed x (Min dia Roll dia) (W gain % * W offset)] x Spd match gain Where W offset is forced to 0 with a ramp time fixed to Spd match acc. If during operation in state 3 the command Speed match goes to zero state 4 is imposed. If during operation in state 3 the system receives a Stop (Start drive = 0) command, state 5 is imposed. The system changes to this state if, starting from state 3, the command Speed match goes to zero. Normally this happens simultaneously with the cut command and reel changeover. In this state, the motor speed reference is fixed by: W reference = Line speed x (Minimum diameter Roll diameter) (W gain % + W offset) All the internal ramp times for the reference calculation are set to zero. If during operation in state 4 the system receives a Stop (Start drive = 0) command, state 5 is imposed. The system changes to this state from states 2, 3 and 4 if it receives a Stop command (Start drive = 0). This usually follows: a) after an automatic reel changeover to stop the reel from rotating. The speed reference is set to zero with the ramp time fixed by Spd match dec. The W offset parameter is immediately set to zero in order to slow the reel down from its current speed. b) After the line stops, if the tensioned material on the winder/ unwinder has to be removed (in this case, the DC Drive must be disabled). In any case, when the speed goes to 0, the system changes automatically to status 1.
Status 4:
Status 5:
Status 6:
The system changes to this state when the parameter Jog TW enable is enabled and the Start command has been given. The jog command is used on the unwinders to lead the material from the reel up to the first intake roller. See figure 6.3.2.
6/14
Int acc time = Spd match acc Int dec time = Spd match dec W reference = f (Jog T W speed, F)
Jog T W enable = 1 Start (drive) = 1 Status 1 (default) Jog T W enable = 1 Start (drive) = 0 Status 6
Int acc time = Spd match acc Int dec time = Spd match dec W reference = 0
Figure 6.3.2: Operation with Jog TW enabled.
Jog TW enable prepares the system for jogs; to allow the reel to rotate, the Start command must be given, a following Stop will force the reference speed to 0 (see paragraph Control logic). In state 6, the motor speed reference is fixed by: W reference = Jog TW speed x Minimum diameter Roll diameter It is possible to change the sign of the Jog speed by using the Winder side command. If when leaving state 6, Jog TW enable is disabled while maintaining the Start command, the system changes to status 2.
6/15
Winder side
Torque winder EN
Enable PI-PD PID
Diam reset
Diam preset sel0
Speed match
KM1
K0 (6) (7) K1
Digital inputs
F6
F1 (1)
U2 V2 35 36 75 76 11 12 13 14 15 31 32 33 34 35 12 13 14 15 16
(10)
81
82
U3
V3
31
32
U1
V1
DI5
DI6
DI1
DI7
DI2
DI8
DI3
EXTERNAL FAULT START
SA-SB (8) R1 CONTROL R2
DI4
A1 OK
Diam calc Dis
Diam preset sel1
FAN
ENABLE DRIVE
QUICK STOP
AI1-
AI1+
AI2-
AI2+
AI3-
AI3+
AO1+
AO2+
DO1
DO2
DO3
COMAO
78
79 GND
C1
D1
GND
22
21
GND
COMAO
24
23
GND
26
27
28
DO4
Tension ref
Tension red
1B1
2B2
2F2
Analog inputs
Diam reached
Spd match compl
Figure 6.4.1 Typical connection diagram for winder with automatic change and regulation of closed-loop tension
M1
Digital encoder
Sinusoidal encoder
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
DCV104/94 up to C65S DCV104 up to C65S DCV104/94C77S to M27. DCV104/94M14Y to M27. Resistance of 1 KOhm in the absence of PTC probe
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
Input for fast stop (0 = fast stop) Input for external fault (0 = external fault) Control voltage selection DCV104/94C28S to M11S DCV104 only DCV M14Y - M15S - M20? - M27? only
Power terminals Control board terminals Power interface board terminals
winder diameter 0...10V
PTC
Closed loop En
Analog outputs
Motor current -10...+10V
6/16
1 2 4 3
Q1
Q20
Q6
Q4
L1
Control inputs
DCVS5V62
+24
19
(3) XE1
6.4 Typical winder connection diagrams
(3)
fan (4)
DCV104
0V24
18
XE2
29
30
25
(5) 0V
F2
(2)
Digital outputs
1F1
6.5 Command logic
This chapter describes the most common logic sequences: 1. Diameter initialization 2. Tensioning 3. Automatic changeover 4. Stopping the reel 5. Jog function (pulsed running) Diameter initialization This sequence is carried out before the winder/unwinder is started either when tensioning the reel with the line stopped or in the automatic changeover phase. The value of the diameter fixed in Roll diameter depends on the parameters Diam preset 0, 1, 2, 3 and Diam preset sel. If 2 to 4 different initial diameter values have been set, a selection must be made using the programmed digital inputs such as Diam preset sel 0 and Diam preset sel 1, or by means of parameter Diam preset sel. If the initial diameter value is set using an analog input, enter Diam preset sel = 3. Enable parameter Diam reset for a time greater than 20 ms. Disable the state of the digital input before startup. Tensioning This sequence is carried out to tension the material with the line stopped.
Diam reset
Start (drive)
Torque winder En
Figure 6.5.1: material tensioning with line stopped.
Initialise the value of the diameter as shown above. Enable the tension control and give the start command to the DC Drive. If the speed reference calculation is carried out internally to the drive (Speed demand en = Enable), the material will be tensioned with the reference speed set by W offset and with the ramp time Offset acc time. Now the line can be started.
6/17
6.5 Command logic
Automatic changeover This sequence carries out an automatic changeover between two reels.
Diam reset
Torque winder En
Speed match
Start (drive)
Spd match compl (digital output)
Diam calc Dis
Figure 6.5.2: automatic changeover between two reels during a period of winding/unwinding.
a) Commands relating to a finished reel: While the reel is rotating, it is advised that the calculation of the diameter of the reel while working be disabled Diam calc dis = 1 in order to avoid errors in the calculation of the diameter. b) Commands relating to a new reel: Initialise the value of the diameter as shown above. Enable command Speed match, Torque winder en and give the start command to the drive. The motor will accelerate the reel until a peripheral speed is reached which corresponds to the line speed for Spd match gain with the fixed ramp Spd match acc. After this speed has been reached, the DC Drive signals the end of the starting phase using the parameter Spd match compl. At the same time as the reel changeover, disable command Spd match. Enable the diameter calculation: Diam calc dis = 0. Stop the finished reel: This sequence is used to stop the old reel after the automatic changeover has been completed. Diameter calculation Diam calc Dis disabled = 1 and stop command (Start = 0). The speed of the reel reduces to zero in the period defined by Spd match dec. At speed = 0 disable Torque winder en.
6/18
6.5 Command logic
Diam calc Dis
Start (drive) Speed = 0
Torque winder en
Figure 6.5.3: stopping the reel after the automatic changeover.
Jog function The sequence is used, for example, on the unwinders in the initialisation phase, leading the material from the reel up to the first intake roller.
Diam reset
Diam calc Dis
Jog T W enable
Start (drive)
Winder side
+
W reference
Figure 6.5.4: jog function to prepare the machine.
Initialise the value of the diameter as shown above. Disable the diameter calculation. Enable Jog TW enable. Use the Start/Stop command to run the machine in pulses. With the Start command, the motor accelerates the speed of the reel until the peripheral speed set in Jog TW speed is reached within ramp time Spd match acc. With the Stop command, the motor decelerates to 0 speed in ramp time Spd match dec. To reverse the direction of rotation, use command Winder side.
6/19
6.6 Application example
Open loop winder/unwinder control Nipp roll

Forward Reverse Up
Winder/unwinder
Down
R M
E
R M
Line speed (nip roll motor) +10V Tension setting
E
Drive
Drive
Wind/unwind Winder side (up/down) Diam reset +24V
(Internal ramp of the master drive) Line speed reference +10V Forward -10V Reverse
Machine features: Maximum line speed = 400 m/min Maximum processing speed of the winding motor, Vn=3000 rpm Maximum winder diameter = 0.7m Minimum winder diameter = 100 mm Motor gearbox ratio - winder = 0.5 Speed reference of 0-10V line of the roller motor. Acceleration/deceleration time of the line = 30 seconds Fast stop deceleration time = 15 seconds Winder/unwinder selection by means of a digital input. Winder direction (up/down) selection by means of a digital input. Tension adjustment by means of a digital input. The winder/unwinder drive receives analog signals for the speed of the line, the set tension, digital commands for winder/unwinder selection, winding direction (up/down) and diameter readjustment. Drive configurations and settings: (only adjustments for the Torque Winder function are described)
6/20
PROGRAMMING ANALOG INPUTS ANALOG INPUT 1 Tension ref Tension reference expressed as a %; 10 V (20 mA) = 100 % Menu I/O CONFIG > Analog input > Analog input 1 > Select input 1 tension ref: ANALOG INPUT 2 If the parameter Line spd source has to be adjusted on an analog input, this has to be done by passing a support parameter PAD0...PAD15 as this parameter is not shown in the list of high-priority parameters. Line spd source: 10 V (20 mA) = 100 % Programming of analog input 2 on PAD 0: Menu I/O CONFIG > Analog input > Analog input 2 > Select input 2 = PAD 0 ANALOG INPUT 3 If the parameter Ref spd source has to be adjusted on an analog input, this has to be done by passing a support parameter PAD0...PAD15 as this parameter is not shown in the list of high-priority parameters. Ref spd source: 10 V (20 mA) = 100 % Programming of analog input 3 on PAD 1: Menu I/O CONFIG > Analog input > Analog input 3 > Select input 3 = PAD 1 PROGRAMMING DIGITAL INPUTS DIGITAL INPUT 1 Diam calc Dis: Disabling of the diameter calculation (see also by Line speed thr). In the event that it has just been temporarily disabled during operation, the system keeps the last value calculated in memory. This function must be enabled only if the application requests it. Menu I/O CONFIG > digital input > digital input 1: Diam calc Dis:
DIGITAL INPUT 2 Wind/unwind Selection of winder/unwinder: In the event the selection is made using a digital input: 0 V = Winder, +24 V = Unwinder
6/21
DIGITAL INPUT 3 Winder side
Selection of winding/unwinding direction: in the event the selection is made using a digital input: 0 = up, 1 = down.
DIGITAL INPUT 4 Diam reset Diameter initialization. When this parameter is enabled, the diameter takes the value selected with Diam preset sel. If 2 to 4 different initial diameter values are required, the selection must be made by means of configurable digital inputs such as: Diam preset sel 0- Diam preset sel 0 If the initial diameter value is set using an analog input, enter Diam preset sel = 3. When controlling a winder, an initialization command has to be given each time a reel is changed by entering the value of the minimum diameter (empty winder diameter). When controlling an unwinder, a readjustment command has to be given each time a reel is changed by entering the value of the maximum diameter (maximum winder diameter). Enable parameter Diam reset by a pulse greater than 20 ms. Reset the digital input before starting.
DIGITAL INPUT 5 Diam preset sel 0 DIGITAL INPUT 6 Diam preset sel 1 Where a system controls only a winder or only an unwinder, it is possible to set the initial diameter value in Diam preset 0; for the winder, the minimum diameter, for the unwinder; the maximum diameter. Enter Diam preset sel = 0 (do not program any digital input as diam preset sel 0 - diam preset 1). When command Diam reset is enabled, the value in diam preset 0 is copied into Roll diameter. Menu OPTION > Torque winder Torque winder En; program Enable to activate the diameter slaving function. If the system requests it, this function can also be programmed (enable/disable) using a digital input.
6/22
Adjustment of parameters in the DIAMETER CALCULATION menu PARAMETERS OPTION Menu > Torque winder > Diam calculation Wind/unwind Minimum diameter Maximum diameter Line spd source Selection of winder/unwinder: Selection only to be made if the digital inputs are not programmed. Value of minimum diameter expressed in [mm]. Enter 100 mm Value of maximum diameter expressed in [mm]. Enter 0.7 m Assignment of the line speed. To obtain the actual number to enter, +2000H (8192 in decimal) must be added to the number of the selected assigned parameter.
Adjustment of PAD 0 (N. 503) as line speed input: OPTION Menu > Torque winder > Diam calculation > Line speed source = 8695 Line speed gain Calibration value for line speed. Its programming depends on the parameter assigned to the line speed; it is used to obtain Line speed = 100% of its maximum value. The calculation of Line speed gain must be carried out using the formula: [32768 x 16384 / (maximum value of assignment parameter x 8)] -1 When an analog input is programmed using a PAD parameter, its maximum value is + / - 2048 consequently, to give Line speed = 100 %: Line speed gain = [32768 x 16384 / (2048 x 8) - 1] = 32767 (To obtain fine tuning, it is necessary to carry out self-tuning on the analog input). Assignment of the line speed reference. To obtain the actual number to enter, +2000H (8192 in decimal) must be added to the number of the selected parameter.
Ref spd source
Adjustment of PAD 0 (N. 503) as line speed input: OPTION Menu > Torque winder > Diam calculation > Ref speed source = 8695 Ref speed gain Calibration value of the line speed reference. Its programming depends on the parameter assigned to the line speed reference, it is used to obtain Line speed = 100% of its maximum value. The calculation of Ref speed gain must be carried out using the formula: [32768 x 16384 / (maximum value of parameter assigned x 8)] -1
6/23
When an analog input is programmed using a PAD parameter, its maximum value is + / - 2048 consequently, to give Ref Line speed = 100 %: Ref speed gain = [32768 x 16384 / (2048 x 8) - 1] = 32767 (To obtain fine tuning, it is necessary to carry out self-tuning on the analog input). Line speed Display of line speed as a %. After line speed source and line speed gain have been programmed, it is possible to check the setting by checking that with the line speed at its maximum, the value of the line speed parameter = 100%. Display of line speed reference as a %. Value in [rpm] corresponding to the maximum angular speed of the winder/unwinder (on the motor shaft). Vp= x min x x R where: Vp = peripheral speed min = minimum winder diameter (mm) = motor rpm R = gearbox ratio =Vp/ x min x R=400 / (3.14 x 0.1 x 0.5)=2547 rpm Base omega = enter 2547 rpm. Line speed detection threshold expressed as a %. When Line speed is less than Line speed thr, the diameter calculation is disabled. When Line speed exceeds the threshold, the diameter calculation is activated with an initial filter corresponding to Diam init filter for the time set in Diam stdy delay. At the end of this time, the filter will be adjusted to Diam filter. Maximum line speed = 400 m/min. Line speed thr = 5 % (the calculation of the diameter is automatically activated at 20 m/mn)
Ref line speed Base omega
Ref speed thr
Adjustment of parameters in the SPEED DEMAND menu PARAMETERS OPTION Menu > Torque winder > Speed demand Speed demand En Winder side Activation of speed reference calculation; enter Enable Selection of winding/unwinding direction. Selection only to be made if the digital inputs are not programmed. 0 = up, 1 = down. Adjustment of the speed reference gain used for saturating the loop. Parameter expressed as a % of the increase/decrease of the angular speed reference. W gain = 30 % (enter this initial value) Adjustment of the offset on the speed reference for tensioning the winder/unwinder when the line has stopped. This parameter is expressed in [rpm]. W offset = 50 rpm (check with the material)
W gain
W offset
6/24
Offset acc time
Adjustment of the tensioning ramp when the machine has stopped. This parameter is expressed in [s]. The acc time is relative to the Speed base value parameter. Assignment of the speed reference. To obtain the actual number to enter, +2000H (8192 in decimal) must be added to the number of the desired parameter. W target : enter as speed reference 2: OPTION Menu > Torque winder > Speed demand > W target = 8235 Paragraph 8.2. List of high priority parameters shows that Speed ref 2 has the decimal value 43. To obtain the number to enter, 8192 in decimal must be added (fixed offset): 8192 + 43 = 8235 It is possible to use this as display for the speed reference.
W target
W reference
Adjustment of parameters in the COMP CALCULATION menu OPTION Menu > Torque winder > torque calculation > Comp calculation Static f: Compensation of static frictions expressed as a % of the rated current of the DC drive. Check that the parameters Static f and Dinamic f = 0. Enter tension ref = 0. The diameter calculation function is blocked (enable the programmed digital input as Dis diam calc). Operations to be carried out without material in the machine, without the Jog function and without line reference. Winder/unwinder motor stopped in current limit (In use t curr lim+/- active = 0). Gradually increase the value of Static f. The motor starts to run. Adjust a value such that the winder/unwinder is hardly turning (it must always stay within the current limit. The Ilim LED on the keyboard is illuminated). Compensation of dynamic frictions expressed as a % of the rated current of the drive. Enter the maximum reference of the line speed, check that the minimum diameter has been entered in Roll diameter (otherwise carry out a Diam reset on the minimum diameter). Temporarily enter the parameter Static f with a value of 10 to 20 %. The speed of the motor will increase until it reaches a speed of Base omega (the DC drive in this phase will exceed the current limit). When the motor reaches its maximum speed, reset parameter Static f to the value previously adjusted. The speed will start to reduce.
Dinamic f:
6/25
Static f Zero
Gradually increase parameter Dinamic f until the speed stops decreasing and the motor turns at a constant speed. Increase the speed by temporarily increasing the parameter Static f. Reset the parameter Static f to its correct value. The motor should maintain the speed it has reached. If not, readjust parameter Dinamic f and repeat the test until you attain the conditions required.
By setting the parameter to Enabled, the friction compensation is fully enabled for all speeds. When it is set to Disabled, the compensation for static frictions is fully enabled with Ref line speed = 1.5%. Enable calculation of the reel acceleration. If enabled, this function calculates the angular acceleration internally to the drive. In this case, it is only necessary to set the value of Time acc/dec min. If it is disabled, it is necessary to adjust parameters Line acc %, Line dec % , Fast stop % and Time acc/dec min and provide the digital inputs with the corresponding status information. Enter the time expressed in [s] corresponding to the smallest time values for acceleration, deceleration and fast deceleration. Enter time acc/dec min =15 seconds (time given for fast deceleration). Filter expressed in [ms] on the acceleration calculation internal to the DC Drive. Enter = 30 ms Width of the rolled material expressed as a % of the maximum width. Enter = 100 % Compensation of fixed inertias (motor, gearbox, chuck, etc) expressed as a % of the rated current of the DC Drive. Increase this value until the motor can increase its speed according to the line reference. During this phase, the DC Drive must always stay within the current limits. diameter calculation function disabled (activate the programmed digital input as Dis diam calc), operations to be carried out without material in the machine, install the empty reel (check that the parameter Roll diameter = min diameter). Check that the parameters Constant J compVariable J comp = 0 Set tension (tension ref)=0 . Run and line reference to minimum. Vary the line reference. Gradually increase the value of Constant J comp until the winder/ unwinder manages to follow the line speed reference. Compensation of variable inertias due to the rolled material expressed as a % of the rated current of the drive. Install a full reel (check that the parameter Roll diameter = max diameter). Follow the same setting procedure as for Constant J comp. Display current value of the variable inertia compensation, expressed as a % of the rated drive current. Display current value of the fixed inertia compensation, expressed as a % of the rated drive current.
Int acc calc En
Time acc/dec min
Acc/dec filter
Mat width Constant J comp
Variable J comp
Act var J comp Act const J comp
6/26
Act comp
Display current values of compensations (addition of static and dynamic frictions and inertia forces) expressed as a % of the rated current of the DC Drive.
6/27
Closed loop winder/unwinder control with loading cell Nipp roll

Forward Reverse Up
Winder/unwinder
Down
Load cell 0...+10V
R M
E
R M
Feed-back
E
Drive
Line speed (nip roll motor) +10V (Internal ramp of the master drive) Line speed reference +10V Forward -10V Reverse Tension setting
Drive
Wind/unwind Winder side (up/down) Diam reset
Enable PI-PD PID
+24V
Machine features: Maximum line speed = 400 m/min Maximum processing speed of the winding motor, Vn=3000 rpm Maximum winder diameter = 0.7m Minimum winder diameter = 100 mm Motor gearbox ratio - winder = 0.5 Speed reference of 0-10V line of the roller motor. Acceleration/deceleration time of the line = 30 seconds Fast stop deceleration time = 15 seconds Winder/unwinder selection by means of a digital input. Winder direction (up/down) selection by means of a digital input. Tension adjustment by means of a analog input. Adjust all parameters as indicated in the previous example. After having tested the machine with the material in open loop, carry out the following adjustments for setting with the load sensor. ANALOG INPUT 3 Pid feed back Load sensor input; 10 V (20 mA) = 100 % I/O CONFIG Menu > Analog input > Analog input 3 Pid feed back Closure of the tension loop (to be used with a load sensor). Adjust parameter Closed loop En = enable Monitoring of the active compensation, output from the PID regulator used for closing the loop.
Closed loop En Closed loop comp DIGITAL INPUT
Programming a digital input for activating the PID function I/O CONFIG Menu > digital input > digital input 7 : enable PI-PD PID
6/28
Adjustment of Pid parameters Program Pid Source as PAD 1. Pid source=(8192+504)=8696 PARAMETERS OPTION Menu > PID > Pid source > Pid source = 8695 Program PAD 0 =10000 (PAD 0 is found in the Special functions menu) Program Pid source gain =1 Program PID target as parameter Closed loop comp The closed loop comp parameter has the decimal number 1208. To obtain the value to insert, 8192 in decimal must be added (fixed offset). PID target = 8192+1208 = 9400 Program Pid out scale Pid out scale = (max. value of closed loop comp)/PID max output. Pid out scale = 10000/10000 = 1 Program PI top lim and Pi bottom lim to get a correction of 100% correction of its maximum value. PI top lim = 1 Pi bottom lim = -1 With this configuration, the output from the regulator will be positive and negative. The gains of the various components must be defined experimentally with a loaded machine. It is possible to start tests with the values below: Program PI: P gain PID = 10 % program PI: I gain PID = 4 % program PD: P gain PID = 5 % program PD: D gain PID = 0 % PD: D filter PID = 20 ms Program PI central vsel = 1 Set PI central v 1 = 0 With this configuration, when the ON/OFF switch is actuated for parameters activating the PID function, the regulator output starts from 0. Before activating the PID regulator and closing the loop, it is necessary to check the correspondence between the programmed tension and that actually measured by the load sensor. The load sensor must be calibrated so as to present an analog output = 10V corresponding to the maximum tension required for the material. With material in the machine, start the winder/unwinder by setting a tension of 50%. Check the values of parameters Act tension ref (0... 100%, tension adjusted in the Torque winder menu) and Pid feedback (0... 10000, retro-action load sensor in the PID menu). These two values must be equal. If not, adjust parameter Tension scale until these two parameters reach the same value. After carrying out this configuration, it is possible to start the tests with the material. Optimize the stability of the system using the various components of the PI and PD PID blocks.
6/29
Conventions To simplify the commissioning procedure and make it consistent, a convention has been installed in the system concerning the speed and torque directions which should be complied with: As a general rule, it has been agreed to consider the speed and torque directions of a winder winding from the top as positive. All other possible system configurations shown in the examples below refer to this convention. Note! The polarity of the line speed reference is not important as the system defines the reference polarity on output only as a function of parameters Wind/unwind and Winder side.
1. Drive actioning a winder - winding direction = from above.

Nip roll Winder
T[+]
W[+]
M R
Wind/unwind = Winder Winder side = Up
Drive Line speed
Figure 6.6.1: drive actioning a winder - winding direction = from above.
If the speed demand function is used, the system creates a positive speed reference; it is therefore necessary to connect the motor such that with this polarity, the reel winds the material from the top. The winding torque is positive.
6/30
2. Drive actioning a winder - winding direction = from below.

Nip roll Winder T[-] W[-]
M R
Wind/unwind = Winder Winder side = Down
Drive Line speed
Figure 6.6.2: drive actioning a winder - winding direction = from below.
If the speed demand function is used, the system creates a negative speed reference; it is therefore necessary to connect the motor such that with this polarity, the reel winds the material from the bottom. The winding torque is negative. 3. Drive actioning an unwinder - unwinding direction = from above
Nip roll
Unwinder W[-]
T[+]
M R
Wind/unwind = Unwinder Winder side = Up
Drive Line speed
Figure 6.6.3: drive actioning an unwinder - unwinding direction = from above.
6/31
If the speed demand function is used, the system creates a negative speed reference; it is therefore necessary to connect the motor such that with this polarity, the reel unwinds the material from the top. The unwinding torque is positive. 4. Drive actioning an unwinder - unwinding direction = from below
Nip roll
Unwinder T[-]
W[+]
M R
Wind/unwind = Unwinder Winder side = Down
Drive Line speed
Figure 6.6.4: drive actioning an unwinder - unwinding direction = from below.
If the speed demand function is used, the system creates a positive speed reference; it is therefore necessary to connect the motor such that with this polarity, the reel winds the material from the bottom. The unwinding torque is negative.
6/32
Preset sel 1 Preset sel 0 W% Diam inc/dec En Diam inc/ dec En Minimum Maximum diameter diameter Wind/unwind Diam preset 0 Diam preset 1 Diam preset 2 Diam preset 3
Actual speed
Base omega
DIAMETER CALCULATION Roll diameter Calc En

X
Line speed gain
Line speed
Line speed source Diameter reset
Gain
6.7 Functional diagram
Radius
Ref speed gain
Ref line spd
Ref spd source
Gain
Diameter reached
Ref line spd Diam calc Dis
Diameter thr
Internal variable Ref speed thr
Parameter
I/O parameter
Diam filter Diam stdy delay Diam init filter
6/33
6/34
4 5 6 7 8 9
Taper Enable Act tension ref

A
Closed loop En
Tension ref Radius
To PID function
Internal variable
B
Parameter
I/O parameter f(x,y,z) Tension red Init diameter Final diameter
Speed match Torque current Jog TW enable
Torque winder En
+ +
X Y
+ +
T current lim Act comp Flux ref Spd match torque
Radius
Tension scale
T current lim +/-
Closed loop En
TORQUE WINDER (Torque calculation)
Closed loop comp
Mod. Index
E
Author: DLG Date: 30.08.98 Page Over 4 2
f(t)
+ A
Ref line spd Line speed acc %
Line acc status Acc calc filter Int acc calc En Wind/unwind
Time acc/dec min
Line acc %
B
Dinamic f
-
+
+
Line dec status +
Line dec % W% Static f
Time acc/dec min
Wind/unwind
C
Line fstp status Math width f(x,y)
Line fast stop % Minimum diameter f(x,y,z) Radius Line speed acc % Maximum diameter
Variable J comp
Act var J comp
Internal variable
Constant J comp
f(x,y)
Parameter Act cost J comp Line speed acc % Radius

TORQUE WINDER (Comp calculation)
I/O parameter
Author: DLG Date:

30.08.98
+ + Act comp
Mod. Index
3 0
E
Page Over
4
6/35
6/36
4 5 6 7 8 9
Speed match
A
Start/stop Actual speed t
Wind/unwind Speed match comp
Torque request sign
Jog TW speed
X Y
W gain management
+ -
Ref line spd Radius W offset management Speed demand En Start/stop Torque Offset W offset request sign acc time 1 Spd demand status Jog TW enable W gain
Jog TW enable
Minimum radius
Speed match
C
Spd match gain
+ W target
W reference Winder side
Internal variable Parameter I/O parameter
Spd demand status
Acc/dec time management
Spd match acc
Spd match dec
TORQUE WINDER (Speed demand)
Mod. Index
E
Author: DLG Date:
30.08.98
Page Over
4 4
7 - Troubleshooting
7.1 Precautions
DCV DC drives must be installed and connected according to the recommendations given in Chapter 3. Before any work is carried out on the DC drive, apply the safety recommendations given in Chapter 1, in particular those relating to powering off. The screws on all terminals on the product must be tightened two weeks after first use. Thereafter retighten each year.
7/1
7 - Troubleshooting
7.2 Fault message
Error message displayed on the keyboard Error message Failure supply Possible causes Fault in internal power supply: the voltage is above the permitted value switch off voltages before disconnecting. In most cases, this will be from external cabling. Disconnect the terminals which can be removed from the control board and reset using the Cancel key. If no other fault is shown, check there is not a short circuit on the control cabling or even on the cable shielding. If the fault persists, disconnect the optional DCVS562 board (if present) and try to acknowledge again. If this attempt also fails, contact Schneider Electric Undervoltage on the power circuit supply. - Parameter Undervolt thr wrongly configured (may be 500V, while the DC drive is working on 400V). - Grid voltage to low or voltage drops too long - Bad connection (e.g.: terminals on switch or armatures badly tightened). - Line fuses fused. - Micro power cuts on the grid, or large distortion in supply voltage. - The DC drive must be enabled in the absence of the grid supply voltage. Overvoltage in the armature circuit. - Setting of Max out voltage parameter too low. - The DC drive does not operate in field weakening mode while the fixed speed can only be reached when the field excitation current is reduced. Check the parameter Flux reg mode. Heatsink temperature too high. - Ambient temperature too high. - DC drive fan defect (DC drives> 110A) - Heatsink dirty. Temperature of motor too high (indicated by the thermistor to terminals 78/79) - Breakage or short-circuit in the wires between the motor and terminals 78/79. - Motor overheating: Thermal cycle of motor exceeded Ambient temperature too high The motor has an external fan: ventilation broken down or turning in wrong direction The motor has no external fan: load too high at low speed.
WARNING!
Undervoltage
Overvoltage
Heatsink
Overtemp Motor
7/2
7 - Troubleshooting
7.2 Fault message
Error message External fault
Possible causes External fault, connected to terminal 15
Overcurrent
Overcurrent in the motor circuit - Short circuit or earthing fault on the output from the DC drive - Badly optimized current regulator - Parameter Overcurrent thr too low. Excitation current too low - Excitation regulation is blocked - The supply to the excitation regulator is disconnected - Defective fuses in the energising circuit. No speed feedback signal - The speed feedback wires are disconnected or short-circuiting - The tachogenerator is connected the wrong way round - One or more encoder channels are missing (wires disconnected or short-circuiting, faulty power supply). Fault on Option 2 board. - Acknowledge using Cancel key. If the fault does not go away, it may be an internal fault on the board. Replace the board Fault in the bus link (only with optional board DCVS5Z27) - Check wiring and tightness of connections - Acknowledge using Cancel key. If the fault does not go away, it may be an internal fault on the board. Replace the board Wrong DC drive release sequence - Correct the sequence according to the instructions on page 5/61. Fault on Option 1 board. - Acknowledge using Cancel key. If the fault does not go away, it may be an internal fault on the board. Replace the board
Field loss
Speed fbk loss
Opt2 failure
Bus loss
Enable seq err
Hw opt1 failure
Brake error
Mechanical brake fault - The DC drive has not managed to establish the selected tension within the time specified by the Torque delay parameter - The brake feedback has not been received within the allotted time - The brake feedback remains for 1 second after the closure order has been given to it.
7/3
7 - Troubleshooting
7.2 Fault message
Other faults Faults Possible causes
The keyboard display is dark - Lack of supply voltage to terminals U2/V2 or internal fuses fused. The motor does not run Run and/or Start command missing The DC drive is not accepting commands: procedure wrongly selected The input circuit breaker has triggered or the ultra-fast fuses have fused. The analog input used for the reference value has not been assigned or has been assigned incorrectly. Negative reference applied to the DCV94. The reference for the 2quadrant DC drives must always be positive.
The motor turns in the wrong direction - Incorrect reference polarity (with DCV104) - The motor connections are reversed. WARNING: when the motor turns in the wrong direction and the direction of rotation must be changed, switch round the armature or field wires as well as the two connections of the tachogenerator or the encoder (A+ with Aor B+ with B-). The motor does not reach the set speed DC drive at speed limit: check parameters Speed base value, Speed max amount, Speed max pos and Speed max neg. DC drive at current limit (Led Ilim illuminated). Possible causes: - Motor overloaded - DC drive too small - Reduction of tension selected via Torque reduct. The input value for the number of pulses per encoder turns is too high. Check the parameters concerned (encoder 1 pulses by using connector XE1 or encoder 2 pulses with use of connector XE2) and set the correct value. Incorrect adaptation of the tachogenerator feedback. Check the voltage range choice (switch S4). Check parameter Tacho scale. The factor function has not been configured correctly. The motor immediately reaches its maximum speed Reference value at the terminal block: Check if the value varies from the minimum value to the maximum value. Reference potentiometer: is there a 0V connection? Encoder/tachogenerator not connected, badly connected or do not have a power supply: Select parameter Actual spd in the DRIVE STATUS menu. With the regulator disabled, run the motor in a clockwise direction (facing the shaft). The value shown must be positive. If the value shown does not change or if inconsistent values are displayed, check the wiring to the tachogenerator and the power supply to the encoder. If the value shown is negative, change round connections A+ and A- or B+ and B- of the encoder or of the tachogenerator.
7/4
7 - Troubleshooting
7.2 Fault message
Faults
Possible causes
The motor accelerates too slowly Ramp incorrectly defined Motor working at limit of current Motor overloaded DC drive too small The motor decelerates too slowly Ramp values and times incorrectly defined Braking current too low (DCV104 only). The motor runs slowly although the reference value = zero Minimum speed selected Interference from unused analog inputs. Configure unused analog inputs to OFF. Disconnect the reference cable to the analog input used If the motor stops, the cause is external or the resistance of the 0V wire is too high. If the drive continues to run: adjust the offset to the analog input. Change the parameter Offset input xx so that the motor remains stopped. The thermal state of the motor has been exceeded Thermal cycle of motor too severe Thermal protection of motor badly adjusted The motor does not provide the maximum traction and current DC drive working at limit of current Check if the value for Full load curr in the CONFIGURATION menu is set correctly Check the value for the current limitation. The speed during acceleration with maximum current is not linear Reduce Speed I and Speed P proportionally. If this does not improve matters, optimize the regulator. Speed oscillation Check parameters Speed I and Speed P If the oscillations take place in the field weakening phase, check the parameters Flux P and Flux I, then parameters Voltage P and Voltage I. If this does not improve matters, optimize the regulator. The drive is not stable over the whole speed range Adjust and check the Variable Gains function. Function motorpotentiometer not executed Function not enabled. Enable motor pot = Enabled DC drive control from the terminal block: Motor pot up and/or Motor pot down have not been assigned to a digital input.
7/5
7 - Troubleshooting
7.2 Fault message
Faults
Possible causes
Jog operation not possible A Start command is always present Function not enabled. Enable jog = Enabled DC drive control from the terminal block: Jog + and/or Jog - have not been assigned to a digital input. Internal speed reference value not applied Function not enabled. Enab multi spd = Enabled DC drive control from the terminal block: Speed sel 0 and Speed sel 1 and Speed sel 2 have not been assigned to a digital input. Multi-Ramp function does not restart Function not enabled. Enab multi rmp = Enabled DC drive control from the terminal block: Ramp sel 0 and Ramp sel 1 have not been assigned to a digital input. Overload not possible Function not enabled. Enable overload = Enabled The R&L Search process does not end Due to a special value of the motor inductance, the subprogram enters an unending cycle with no change in algorithm. Procedure: 1 - Check the two inductance values shown on the display 2 - Insert the average value as motor inductance during the self-tuning phase If the procedure still does not stop, repeat steps 1 and 2.
7/6
7 - Troubleshooting
7.3 Repairs
It is advised that repairs should only be carried out on the DC drive by specialist personnel from Schneider Electric. If you carry out a repair yourself, observe the following points: When ordering spare parts, indicate the reference number and quantity of the part required and also the type and serial number of the DC drive to which they belong. When changing the DCVS5N45 control board, do not power the DC drive on without having previously checked the configuration of all switches and jumpers present on the board and in particular switch S15 which identifies the type and product of the DC drive. When changing the DCVS4B2 control block for drives with separate bridges, do not power the DC drive on without having previously checked the configuration of all switches and jumpers present on the board and in particular switch S15 which identifies the type and product of the DC drive, and the configuration of jumper S1 and switches S3-S4 present on the power interface board.
7.3.1 Separate spare parts
For DCV (A) DC drive Fuses integrated into the DC drive 104C77S (6) 104M11S (6) 94C77S (3) 94M10S (3) 104M15S (6) 104M14Y (6) 94M15S (6) 94M14Y (6) 104M20S (6) 94M20S (6) 94M20Y (6) 104M20Y (12) 104M27S (12) 94M27S (12) 94M27Y (12) 104M27Y (12) Integrated field excitation fuses D40S to C18S (2) C28S to 94M10S or 104M11S (2) 2 pre-assembled thyristor subassemblies with heatsink 104M15S Upper module (3) 104M15S Lower module (3) 104M14Y Upper module (3) 104M14Y Lower module (3) 104M20S Upper module (3) 104M20S Lower module (3) 104M20Y Upper module (3) 104M20Y Lower module (3) 104M27S Upper module (3) 104M27S Lower module (3) 104M27Y Upper module (3) 104M27Y Lower module (3) 94M15S - One phase module (3) 94M14Y - One phase module (3) 94M20S - One phase module (3) 94M20Y - One phase module (3) 94M27S - One phase module (3) 94M27Y - One phase module (3)
Reference (B) DCVF4G59 (1) DCVF4G60 (2) DCVF4G61 (2) DCVS7793 (3) DCVS7804 (1) DCVS7799 (3) DCVS7798 (3) DCVS7802 (3) DCVS7794 (2) DCVS7797 (3) DCVS7805 (1) DCVF4M07 (10) DCVF4M11 (10)
DCVS7B20 DCVS7B26 DCVS7B23 DCVS7B29 DCVS7B21 DCVS7B27 DCVS7B24 DCVS7B30 DCVS7B22 DCVS7B28 DCVS7B25 DCVS7B31 DCVS7B01 DCVS7B04 DCVS7B02 DCVS7B05 DCVS7B03 DCVS7B06
(1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1)
7/7
7 - Troubleshooting
7.3 Repairs
Power part fans
For DCV (A) DC drive For separated control blocks DCVS4B21(1) and DCVS4B22 (1) and DC drives D70S (1) C11S (1) C18S (1) C28S (2) C42S (2) C65S (2) C77S (3) to M11S (3) Power bridges M14Y (2) M15S (2) M20S (2) Power bridges 94M20Y (2) Power bridges 104M27S (2)
Reference (B) DCVS7G76 DCVS7G71 DCVS7G78 DCVS7G17 DCVS7R24 DCVS7R25 DCVS7R26 (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1)
Control module for DC drives with separate power bridges M15S (1) to M27S (1) M14Y (1) to M27Y (1) Control board Configuration terminal All DC drives(1) All DC drives(1)
DCVS4B21 (1) DCVS4B22 (1) DCVS5N45 (1) DCVS5P0S (1)
(A) The values between parentheses indicate the quantities mounted for each DC drive. (B) The values between parentheses indicate the product packaging.
7/8
8 - List of parameters
Key 1
Parameter
2
No.
3
Format min
4
Value max Factory
5
6
Keyp.
7
RS
8
Term
9
D/P
Access via
Fast stop
316 No Fast Stop Fast Stop
U16
c a b
Term. 13 +1530 V 0V
R/W 1 0 R/W R/W 1 0
14 H L IA, QA 12 H L
R/W 1 0 R/W R/W 1 0
DRIVE STATUS 44 314 Enabled Disabled I16 U16 -2 * P45 0 +2 * P45 1 0 Disabled (0) Term. 12 +1530 V 0V Yes Yes
Ramp ref 1 [FF] Enable drive
a b c 1 2
White text on a black background Black text on a white background Parts on a grey background
Menu/sub-menu. Accessible functions. Function not accessible from the keyboard. The corresponding parameter status only is displayed. Dimension based on the factor function. Parameter number (decimal). The value 2000H (=decimal 8192) must be added to the number given in column N. to obtain the parameter address using RS485 or CANopen. Internal parameter format: I = Integer (e.g.: I 16 = 16 bit integer). U= No polarity (e.g.: U32 = 32 bit, no polarity). Float = Floating value.
[FF] in the Parameter column N column : (Number)
Format column:
* When access to the parameter is via board DCVS5W04 automatic mode/PDC, the format is U16 ** When access to the parameter is via board DCVS5W04 automatic mode/PDC, the format is I16 *** When access to the parameter is via board DCVS5W04 automatic mode/PDC, the least significant word of the parameter is used
4 5
Value columns
Minimum, maximum and factory-set values. S= the value depends on the size of the product.
Standard Configuration column: Factory assignation or possibility of assignment.

(A) This parameter can be assigned to a programmable analog input. (B) This parameter can be assigned to another analog input. (C) This parameter can be assigned to a programmable analog input. (D)This parameter can be assigned to a programmable digital output. (E) = This parameter may be assigned to a programmable digital input. (F) = Optional DCVS5V62 board must be present. (G) This parameter is only accessible by a programmable digital input (H) This parameter can be assigned to relay 2. P .45 = Speed base value. Cannot exceed 8192
8/1
6 7
Keyboard column :
Yes = Parameter accessible via keyboard.
RS Column (RS485/Bus/DCVS5W04) Parameter accessible via RS485 link, CANopen DCVS5Z27 board or via the DCVS5W04 applications development and programming board in manual communications mode Low priority. The figures indicate the value to be sent during communication to enable the parameter. Terminal column (Terminals) Parameters which might be assigned to one of the analogue input/output terminals or digital. Parameter available via asynchronous communication (see DCVS5W04) and/or Process Data Channel /PDC Manual). DCVS5W04, in asynchronous communication mode = Low priority PDC = High priority When using a bus link, parameters between [min = 0; max = 1] can be allocated to any virtual digital input (if there is an access code W ) and/or virtual digital output (if there is an access code R). The figures indicate the value to be sent during communication to enable the parameter. IA, QA, ID, QD in the Terminal column This gives access to the function through a programmable analogue or digital input or output. IA = analogue input QA = analogue output ID = digital input QD = digital output The figure which appears is the one through which the terminal is allocated. H, L in the Terminal column R/W/Z/C Signal level (H=Status 1, L=Status 0) allowing the function to be enabled. Can be accessed via the serial link, CANopen or via the applications development and programming board in manual communications or asynchoronous mode: R = Read, W = Write, Z= writing is only possible if the function is not enabled. C= command parameter (entering a value causes a command to be executed). X Pyy The value of the parameter may be min/max X times the value of parameter yy.
8 9
D/P Column (DCVS5W04/PDC)
8/2
8.1 List of parameters and menus
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
1
Factory
-
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Custom. values
Drive ready
380 Drive ready Drive not ready Quick stop 343 No Quick stop Quick stop Start/Stop 315 Start Stop Fast stop 316 No Fast Stop Fast Stop Ramp ref 1 Enable drive Enabled Disabled Start/Stop Start Stop Output voltage [V] Motor current [%] Actual spd (rpm) Speed ref (rpm) Output power [Kw] Flux current (A) Mains voltage [V] Digital I/Q 233 199 122 118 1052 351 466 315 44 314
U16
U16
U16
U16
Term. 13 +1530 V 0V Term. 13 +1530 V 0V
Yes
R 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R R R R R R R R/Z R/Z R/W 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/Z R/Z 0 1 2 R/Z R/Z R/Z R/Z R/W R/W R/W R/Z R/Z R/Z 0 1 2
QD H L -
R 1 0 -
13 H L 14 H L IA, QA 12 H L 13 H L QA QA QA QA -
R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R R R R R -
DRIVE STATUS I16 U16 -2 * P45 0 +2 * P45 1 0 Disabled (0) Stop (0) S 1500 S Disabled (0) 100 1 100 Term. 12 +1530 V 0V Term. 13 +1530 V 0V Yes Yes
U16
Yes
Float ** I16 I16 I16 Float Float U16
0 -250 -32768 0.01 0.1 0
999 250 +32767 9999.99 99.9 999
(A)
START UP Speed base value 45 Nom flux curr [A] 374 Speed-0 f weak 499 Enabled Disabled Acc delta speed 21 Acc delta time [s] Dec delta speed Dec delta time [s] Motor nom flux [A] Flux reg mode 22 29 30 280 469 U32*** Float U16 1 0.5 0 16383 80.0 1
U32 U16 U32 U16 Float U16
0 0 0 0 0.0 0
232-1 65535
232-1 65535 1 START UP \ Motor data P374 2 P374x0.3 Constant current (0)
Constant current Voltage control External control Full load curr [A] 179 Motor max speed [rpm] Max out voltage [V] Flux weak speed [%] T current lim [%] Flux current max [%] Flux current min [%] Speed min amount Speed max amount Speed fbk sel Encoder 1 Encoder 2 Tacho 162 175 456 7 467 468 1 2 414
Float Float * Float U16 U16 U16 U16 U32 U32 U16
0.1 0 20 0 0 P468 0 0 0 0
IdN 6553
IdN 1500
IA -
R R R/W R/W ---R
999 400 100 100 START UP \ Limits 200 100 P467 232-1 100 100 5 0 (A), (C)
5000 232-1 START UP \ Speed feed-back 3 1
8/3
Parameter
Armature Tacho scale Speed offset Encoder 2 pulses Enable fbk contr Enabled Disabled Refresh enc 2 Enabled Disabled Undervolt thr [V] Overcurrent thr [%] Enable overload Enabled Disabled Overload mode Curr limited Curr not limited I2t Overload current [%] Base current [%] Overload time [s] Ovrld prealarm I2t accumulator Pause time [s] Overld available Overload possible Overload not possible Overload state Current > limit value Current limit value Select input 1 OFF Jog reference Speed ref 1 Speed ref 2 Ramp ref 1 Ramp ref 2 T current ref 1 T current ref 2 Adap reference T current limit T current lim + T current lim Pad 0 Pad 1 Pad 2 Pad 3 Load comp PID offset 0 PI central v3 PID feed-back Flux current max Out vlt level Speed ratio Tension red Tension ref Preset 3
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Custom. values
562 563 169 457
Float Float Float * U16
0.90 -20.00 150 0
3.00 +20.00 9999 1
1.00 0.00 1000 Enabled (1) Disabled
Yes Yes Yes Yes
652
U16
Yes
(0) START UP \ Alamrs 481 584 309 U16 U16 I16 0 0 0 1000 230 200 110 START UP \ Overload contr 1 Disabled (0) Curr limited (0) Yes Yes Yes
3 R/W R/W R/Z R/Z 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W R/W R/Z 1 0 R/W 0 1 2 R/W R/W R/W R R R/W R 1 0 R 1 0 R/Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 19 21 22 23 25 26 28 29 30 31
R -
318
U16
Yes
312 313 310 1289 655 311 406
U16 U16 U16 U16 Float U16 U16
P313 0 0 0 0 0 0
200 P312 < 100 65535 1 100.00% 65535 1
100 80 30 300 Dig. Output 4 (D) (D)
QD H L QD H L -
R 1 0 R 1 0 -
407
U16
START UP \ Analog inputs \Analog input 1 70 U16 0 31 Ramp ref 1 Yes
(-4)
8/4
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Custom. values
Scale input 1 72 Auto tune inp 1 259 Auto tune Offset input 1 74 Select input 2 (Select like Input 1) 75
Float U16 I16 U16 Float U16 I16 U16 Float U16 I16 U16
-10.000
10.000
1.000
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
-32768 +32767 0 START UP \ Analog inputs \Analog input 2 0 -10.000 31 10.000 OFF (0) 1.000
R/W C/W 1 R/W R/Z R/W C/W 1 R/W R/Z R/W C/W 1 R/W R/Z 0 1 R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/Z 1 2 R/Z C R/W R R/W R R/W R R/W R Z/C R/Z 1 0 R/Z 1 0 C/W (1) R/Z 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W
Scale input 2 77 Auto tune inp 2 260 Auto tune Offset input 2 79 Select input 3 80 (Select like Input 1) Scale input 3 82 Auto tune inp 3 261 Auto tune Offset input 3 84 R&L Search OFF ON Enable drive Enabled Disabled Start/Stop Start Stop Fwd-Rev spd tune Fwd direction Rev direction Test T curr lim [%] Start Inertia [kg*m*m*] Inertia Nw [kg*m*m] Friction [N*m] Friction Nw [N*m] Speed P [%] Speed P Nw [%] Speed I [%] Speed I Nw [%] Take val Main commands Digitals Terminals Control mode Bus Local Save parameters R&L Search ON OFF Enable drive Enabled Disabled Start/Stop 315 314 256 452 253 1029 315 314 452
-32768 +32767 0 START UP \ Analog inputs \Analog input 3 0 -10.000 31 10.000 OFF (0) 1.000
-32768 0
+32767 0 DRIVE STATUS 1 OFF
U16
Disabled (0) Stop
U16
(0) START UP \ Speed self tune U16 1 Fwd Direction (1) S 20 65535 999.999 S 999.999 99.999 S 99.99 100.00 S 100.00 100.00 S 100.00 65535 START UP 1 Term (0) Local (0) U16 TUNING U16 0 1 OFF (0) Disabled (0) Stop 2
Term. 12 +1530 V 0V Term. 13 +1530 V 0V
Yes
Yes
12 H L 13 H L -
R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 -
Yes
1048 1027 1014 1030 1015 1031 87 1032 88 1033 1028 252
U16 U16 Float Float Float Float Float Float Float Float U16 U16
0 0 0.001 0.001 0.000 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0 0
U16
Yes
Yes Yes
U16
U16
Term. 12 +1530 V 0V Term. 13
Yes
Yes
12 H L 13
R/W 1 0 R/W
8/5
Parameter
Start Stop Fwd-Rev spd tune Fwd direction Rev direction Test T curr lim [%] Start Inertia [kg*m*m] Inertia Nw [kg*m*m] Friction [N*m] Friction Nw [N*m] Speed P [%] Speed P Nw [%] Speed I [%] Speed I Nw [%] Take val Speed P [%] Speed I [%] Prop filter [ms] Flux P [%] Flux I [%] Voltage P [%] Voltage I [%] Save parameters
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
+1530 V 0V
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Custom. values
(0) TUNING \ Speed self tune 1029 U16 1 Fwd Direction (1) S 20 65535 999.999 S 999.999 99.999 S 99.99 100.00 S 100.00 100.00 S 100.00 65535 TUNING 100.00 100.00 1000 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 10.00 1.00 0 2.00 1.00 30.00 40.00 2
1 0 Yes R/Z 1 2 R/Z C R/W R R/W R R/W R R/W R Z/C R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W C/W (1)
H L -
1 0 -
1048 1027 1014 1030 1015 1031 87 1032 88 1033 1028 87 88 444 91 92 493 494 256
U16 U16 Float Float Float Float Float Float Float Float U16 Float Float U16 Float Float Float Float U16
0 0 0.001 0.001 0.000 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0 0.00 0.00 0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
MONITOR Enable drive Enabled Disabled Start/Stop Start Stop Ramp ref (d) Ramp output (d) Speed ref (d) Actual spd (d) F act spd (d) Act spd filter [s] Ramp ref (rpm) Ramp outp (rpm) Speed ref (rpm) Actual spd (rpm) Enc 1 speed (rpm) Enc 2 speed (rpm) F act spd (rpm) Act spd filter [s] Ramp ref (%) Ramp output (%) Speed ref (%) Actual spd (%) Mains voltage [V] Mains frequency [Hz] Output power [Kw] 109 112 115 119 925 923 110 113 118 122 427 420 924 923 111 114 117 121 466 588 1052 315 314 U16 Term. 12 +1530 V (0) 0V U16 0 1 Stop Term. 13 +1530 V (0) 0V MONITOR \ Measurements \ Speed \ Speed in DRC [ ] -32768 +32767 (A) -32768 +32767 -32768 +32767 (A) -32768 +32767 -32768 +32767 (A) 0.001 1.000 0.100 MONITOR \ Measurements \ Speed \ Speed in rpm -32768 +32767 (A) -32768 +32767 (A) -32768 +32767 (A) -8192 +8192 -8192 +8192 -8192 +8192 -32768 +32767 (A) 0.001 1.000 0.100 MONITOR \ Measurements \ Speed \ Speed in % -200.0 -200.0 -200.0 -200.0 0 0.0 0.01 + 200.0 + 200.0 + 200.0 + 200.0 MONITOR \ Measurements 999 70.0 9999.99 (A) (A) 0 1 Disabled Yes R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R R R R R R/W R R R R R R R R/W R R R R R R R 12 H L 13 H L QA QA QA QA R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R R R R R R R R R R R R -
Yes
I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 Float I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 Float Float Float Float Float U16 Float Float
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
QA -
(A)
8/6
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
999 250 +500 0.250 +200 100.0 100.0 99.9
Factory
0.100 S 0 0
(A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A)
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Custom. values
Output voltage [V] Motor current [%] F T curr (%) T curr filter [s] T current ref [%] Flux reference [%] Flux current [%] Flux current (A) Digital I/Q Dig input term Dig input term 1 Dig input term 2 Dig input term 3 Dig input term 4 Dig input term 5 Dig input term 6 Dig input term 7 Dig input term 8 Dig input term 9 Dig input term 10 Dig input term 11 Dig input term 12 Dig input term 15 Dig input term 16 Dig output term Virtual dig inp Virtual dig out Ramp ref 1 Ramp ref 1 (%)
233 199 928 926 41 500 234 351
Float ** I16 I16 Float I16 Float Float * Float
0 -250 -500 0.001 -200 0.0 0.0 0.1
R R R R/W R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R/W R/W
QA QA QA QA QA QA IA, QA -
R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R/W -
MONITOR \ I/O 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 579 580 581 582 583 44 47 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 I16 Float 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -2 * P45 -200.0 65535 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 65535 65535 65535 +2 * P45 +200.0
INPUT VARIABLES \ Ramp ref \ Ramp ref 1 Analog inp.1 (Terminals 1+2) (B) (B) Yes Yes
INPUT VARIABLES \ Ramp ref \ Ramp ref 2 Ramp ref 2 Ramp ref 2 (%) Speed ref 1 Speed ref 1 (%) Speed ref 2 Speed Ref 2 (%) T current ref 1 [%] 48 49 42 378 43 379 39 I16 Float I16 Float I16 Float I16 -2 * P45 -200.0 -2 * P45 -200.0 -2 * P45 -200.0 -200 +2 * P45 +200.0 +2 * P45 +200.0 +2 * P45 +200.0 +200 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Speed regulator output (C) (C) (C) Ramp output (C) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W IA, QA IA, QA IA, QA IA, QA R/W R/W R/W R/W
INPUT VARIABLES \ Speed ref \ Speed ref 1
INPUT VARIABLES \ Speed ref \ Speed ref 2
INPUT VARIABLES \ T current ref
T current ref 2 [%] Speed min amount Speed max amount Speed min pos Speed max pos Speed min neg Speed max neg Speed limited
40 1 2 5 3 6 4 372
I16 U32 U32 U32 U32 U32 U32 U16
-200 0 0
+200 232-1
32
0 0 5000 0 5000 0 5000
R/W R/Z R/Z R/Z R/Z R/Z R/Z R
IA, QA QD
LIMITS \ Speed limits \ Speed amount 2 -1 LIMITS \ Speed limits \ Speed min/max 232-1 232-1 232-1 232-1 1
0 0 0 0 0
(D)
8/7
Parameter
Speed limited Speed not limited
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Custom. values
1 0 LIMITS \ Current limits U16 0 1 0 Yes R/Z 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R 1 0 R R R/W R/W 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/Z 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 1 2 3 R/W R/W R/Z 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R 1
H L -
1 0 -
T current lim type 715 T lim mot gen T lim +/T current lim [%] 7 T current lim + [%] 8 T current lim - [%] 9 Curr limit state 349 Curr. limit reached Curr. limit not reached In use Tcur lim+ [%] 10 In use Tcur lim- [%] 11 Current lim red [%] 13 Torque reduct 342 Active Not active Flux current max [%] Flux current min [%] Acc delta speed Acc delta time [s] Dec delta speed Dec delta time [s] QStp delta speed QStp delta time [s] Ramp shape S-Shaped Linear S shape t const [ms] S acc t const [ms] S dec t const [ms] Ramp +/- delay [ms] Fwd-Rev No direction Fwd direction Rev direction No direction Forward sign Reverse sign Enable ramp Enabled Disabled Ramp out = 0 Not active Active Ramp in = 0 Not active Active Freeze ramp Not active Active Ramp + Acc.CW+Dec.antiCW 467 468 21 22 29 30 37 38 18
U16 U16 U16 U16
0 0 0 0
200 200 200 1
100 100 100
(E) (E) (E) Digital output 5 (D)
Yes Yes Yes -
U16 U16 U16 U16
0 0 0 0
200 200 200 1
100 Not active (0)
(E)
Yes Yes Yes Yes
IA IA IA QD H L ID H L -
R/W R/W R/W R 1 0 R R R/W R/W 1 0 R/W ----
LIMITS \ Flux limits U16 U17 U32 U16 U32 U16 U32 U16 U16 P468 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 P467 232-1 65535 232-1 65535 232-1 65535 RAMP 1 Linear 0 300 300 300 100 1 Yes 100 5 100 1 100 1 1000 1 (A), (C) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
RAMP \ Acceleration
RAMP \ Deceleration
RAMP \ Quick stop
19 663 664 20 673
Float Float Float U16 U16
100 100 100 0 0
3000 3000 3000 65535 3
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
ID
293 294 245
U16 U16 I16
0 0 0
1 1 1
0 0 Enabled (1) Not active (1) Not active (1) Not active (1) (E)
Yes
ID ID -
R/W 0 1 2 3 R/W R/W -
344
U16
Yes
345
U16
(E)
Yes
373
U16
(E)
Yes
346
U16
ID H L ID H L ID H L QD H
R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R 1
8/8
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Custom. values
Other states Ramp 347 Acc.anti CW+DecCW Other states Acc state 1259 Acc CW+Acc.antiCW Other states Dec state 1260 Dec CW+Dec.antiCW Other states
U16
0 R 1 0 R 1 0 R 1 0
L QD H L QD H L QD H L QA QA ID H L -
0 R 1 0 R 1 0 R 1 0 R R R/W 1 0 -
U16
U16
SPEED REGULAT Speed ref [rpm] Speed reg output [%] Lock speed reg ON OFF Enable spd reg Enabled Disabled Lock speed I 348 Not active Active Aux spd fun sel 1016 Inertia-loss cp Speed up Prop filter [ms] 444 Fwd-Rev spd tune Fwd direction Rev direction Test T curr lim [%] Start Inertia [kg*m*m] Inertia Nw [kg*m*m] Friction [N*m] Friction Nw [N*m] Speed P [%] Speed P Nw [%] Speed I [%] Speed I Nw [%] Take val Enable spd=0 I Enabled Disabled Enable spd=0 R Enabled Disabled Enable spd=0 P Enabled Disabled Spd=0 P gain [%] Ref 0 level Speed up gain [%] Speed up base [ms] 1029 U16 0 1 242 I16 0 1 118 236 322 I16 I16 U16 -32768 -200 0 +32767 +200 1 OFF (0) Enabled (1) Not active (1) Speed up (0) 0 Fwd Direction (1) 20 S S S S Disabled (0) Disabled (0) Disabled (E) (A) T current ref (A) (E) Yes Yes Yes R R R/W 1 0 R/Z 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/Z 1 0 R/W R/Z 1 2 R/Z C R/W R R/W R R/W R R/W R Z/C R/Z 1 0 R/Z 1 0 R/Z 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W
Yes
Yes
U16
(E)
Yes
ID H L -
R/W 1 0 -
U16 U16
0 1
1000 2
Yes Yes
SPEED REGULAT. \ Self tuning
1048 1027 1014 1030 1015 1031 87 1032 88 1033 1028 123
U16 U16 Float Float Float Float Float Float Float Float U16 U16
0 0 0.001 0.001 0.000 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0 0
S 65535 999.999 999.999 99.999 99.99 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 65535 1
SPEED REGULAT \ Spd zero logic
124
U16
Yes
125
U16
Yes
126 106 445 446
Float U16 Float Float
0.00 1 0.00 0
(0) 100.00 10.00 32767 10 SPEED REGULAT \ Speed up 100.00 16000 0.00 1000
Yes Yes Yes Yes
8/9
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Custom. values
Speed up filter [ms] Droop gain [%] Droop filter [ms] Load comp [%] Droop limit Enable droop Enabled Disabled Inertia [kg*m*m] Friction [N*m] Torque const [N*m/A] Inertia c filter [ms] T current ref [%] Motor current [%] Arm resistance [ ] Arm inductance [mH] Current scale E int [V] R&L search ON OFF Zero torque Not active Active Enable flux reg ON OFF Flux reg mode Constant current Voltage control External control Enable flux weak ON OFF Speed-0 f weak ON OFF Flux reference [%] Flux current [%] Out vlt level I field cnst 40 I field cnst 70 I field cnst 90 Set flux / if Reset flux / if Nom flux curr [A] Motor nom flux [A] Speed P [%] Speed I [%] Speed P bypass [%] Speed I bypass [%] Flux P [%] Flux I [%]
447 696 697 698 700 699
U16 Float U16 I16 U16 U16
1000 0 SPEED REGULAT \ Droop function 100.00 1000 +200 2*P45 1 0.00 0 0 1500 Disabled
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 0 R/W R/W R R/W R R R/W R/W R/W R R/Z 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/Z 0 1 2 R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R R R/W R/Z R/Z R/Z Z/C Z/C R/Z R/Z R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
IA ID
R/W R/W 1 0 R R -
0.00 0 -200 0 0
(C) (E)
(0) SPEED REGULAT \ Inertia/loss cp 1014 1015 1013 1012 41 199 453 454 1365 587 452 Float Float Float U16 I16 I16 Float Float Float I16 U16 0.001 0.000 0.01 0 -200 -250 S S 0.3 -80 0 999.999 S 99.999 S 99.99 S 1000 0 CURRENT REGULAT +200 250 S S 2.0 +80 1 0.500 4.00 1 OFF (0) 353 U16 0 1 Not active (1) (E) Yes (A) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
QA QA QA -
(A)
ID H L ID H L -
R/W
FLUX REGULATION 497 U16 0 1 ON (1) Const. current (0) (E) Yes -
469
U16
Yes
498
U16
OFF (0) OFF
(E)
Yes
499
U16
Yes
ID H L -
500 234 921 916 917 918 919 920 374 280 87 88 459 460 91 92
Float* Float* Float* Float Float Float U16 U16 Float Float Float Float Float Float Float Float
0.0 0.0 0 0 0 0
(0) 100.0 0.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 FLUX REGULATION \ Flux \ if curve 100.0 100.0 100.0 40.0 70.0 90.0
(A) (A) (A), (C)
QA QA IA, QA
R R/W -
0.5 80.0 S 0.0 P374 P374x0.3 REG PARAMETERS \ Percent values \ Speed regulator 0.00 100.0 10.00 0.00 100.0 1.00 0.00 100.0 10.00 0.00 100.0 1.00 REG PARAMETERS \ Percent values \ Flux regulator 0.00 0.00 100.0 100.0 2.00 1.00
8/10
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Custom. values
REG PARAMETERS \ Percent values \ Voltage reg Voltage P [%] Voltage I [%] Speed P base Speed I base 493 494 93 94 Float Float Float Float 0.00 100.0 30.00 0.00 100.0 40.00 REG PARAMETERS \ Base values \ Speed regulator 0,300 P93max 0.001 S 0,3 P94max REG PARAMETERS \ Base values \ Flux regulator 1 32767 3277 1 32767 3277 REG PARAMETERS \ Base values \ Voltage reg 0.0100 S S 0.01 S S REG PARAMETERS \ In use values 0.00 0.00 0 100.00 S 100.00 S CONFIGURATION 1 Term. (0) Local (0) 1500 IdN 400 0 0.001 S Yes Yes Yes Yes R/W R/W R/Z R/Z -
Flux P base Flux I Base Voltage P base Voltage I base Speed P in use [%] Speed I in use [%] Main commands Digital Terminals Control mode Bus Local Speed base value Full load curr [A]
97 98 495 496 99 100 252
Float Float Float Float Float Float U16
R/Z R/Z R/Z R/Z R R R/Z 1 0 R/Z 1 0 R/Z R/Z R/Z R/Z 1 0 R/Z R/Z 0 1 2 3 R 1 0 R/Z 1 0 R/Z 1 0 R/Z R/Z R/W R/W R/Z R/Z R/W 1 0 R 1 0 R/W 1
253
U16
Yes
45 179
U32*** Float Float I16
1 0.1 20 0
16383 IdN 999 1
Yes Yes Yes Yes
R -
Max out voltage [V] 175 Ok relay funct 412 Ready to Start Drive healthy Motor max speed [rpm] Speed fbk sel Encoder 1 Encoder 2 Tacho Armature Encoder 1 state Encoder ok Encoder Fault Enable fbk contr Enabled Disabled Enable fbk bypas Enabled Disabled Flux weak speed [%] Speed fbk error [%] Tacho scale Speed offset Encoder 1 pulses Encoder 2 pulses Refresh enc 1 Enabled Disabled Encoder 2 state Encoder ok Encoder Fault Refresh enc 2 Enabled 162 414
CONFIGURATION \ Speed fbk Float * U16 0 0 6553 3 1500 1 Yes Yes R R
648
U16
QD
457
U16
Enabled (1) Disabled (0) 100 22 1.00 0 1024 1000 Disabled (0)
Yes
R 1 0 -
458
U16
Yes
456 455 562 563 416 169 649
U16 U16 Float Float Float * Float * U16
0 0 0.90 -20.00 600 150 0
100 100 3.00 +20.00 9999 9999 1
R R R -
651
U16
QD
652
U16
Disabled
Yes
R 1 0 -
8/11
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
(0) Disabled (0) 0 0
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Custom. values
Disabled Enable ind store 911 Enabled Disabled Ind store ctrl 912 Index storing 913 Drive size [A] 2B + E ON OFF Size selection 464 465 201
U16
Yes
U16 U32 U16 U16
0 0 0 0
65535
+232-1 CONFIGURATION \ Drive type S 1 S OFF (0) S
Yes Yes
0 R/W 1 0 R/W R R R/Z 1 0 R/Z 1 0 R R 10 11 R/Z R/Z R/Z R/Z R/Z R/Z 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W R/Z 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W R/W R/Z 0 1 2 R/Z 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W R/W R/Z 1 2 3
R/W
R/W R R -
U16
Yes
American Standard Software version 331 Drive type 300 DCV94 DCV104 Dim factor num Dim factor den Dim factor text Face value num Face value den Latch ON OFF Ok relay open ON OFF Undervolt thr [V] Latch ON OFF Ok relay open ON OFF Hold off time [ms] Restart time [ms] Activity Ignore Warning Disable drive Latch ON OFF Ok relay open ON OFF Hold off time [ms] Restart time [ms] Activity Warning Disable drive Quick stop 482 483 368 362 361 470 359 203 358 481 357 195 50 51 52 54 53 194
Text U16
10
11
Yes -
R 10 11 R R R R -
CONFIGURATION \ Dimension fact I32*** I32*** Text I16 I16 U16 1 1 65535 +231 -1 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
rpm CONFIGURATION \ Face value fact 1 +32767 1 1 +32767 1 CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ Failure supply 0 1 ON (1) ON (1)
I16
Yes
CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ Undervoltage U16 U16 0 0 1000 1 230 ON (1) ON (1) Yes Yes -
I16
Yes
U16 U16 U16
0 100 0 0 65535 1000 CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ Overvoltage 0 2 Ignore (0)
Yes Yes Yes
U16
ON (1) ON (1)
Yes
I16
Yes
U16 U16 U16
0 10000 0 0 10000 0 CONFIGURATION \ Prog. Alarm \ Heatsink 1 5 Disable drive
Yes Yes Yes
8/12
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Custom. values
Normal stop Curr lim stop Ok relay open 370 ON OFF Activity 365
I16
ON (1)
Yes
4 5 R/W 1 0 R/Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 R/W 1 0 R/Z 1 2 3 4 5 R/Z 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W R/W R/Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 R/W 1 0 R/Z 0 1 2 R/W 1 0 R/W R/Z 0 1 2 R/Z 1 0 R/W 1
CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ Overtemp motor U16 Ignore Warning Disable drive Quick stop Normal stop Curr lim stop Ok relay open 367 ON OFF Activity Warning Disable drive Quick stop Normal stop Curr lim stop Latch ON OFF Ok relay open ON OFF Hold off time [ms] Restart time [ms] Activity 502 501 U16 U16 U16 356 I16 0 1 355 U16 0 1 ON (1) ON (1) Yes 354 Disable dive Yes -
I16
ON (1) CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ External fault
Yes
U16
Disable drive
Yes
Yes
0 10000 0 0 10000 0 CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ Brake fault Ignore (0)
Yes Yes Yes
1296 Ignore Warning Disable drive Quick stop Normal stop Curr lim stop Ok relay open 1297 ON OFF Activity 1366
I16
ON (1) CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ I2t overload
Yes
U16
Disable drive
Yes
Ignore Warning Disable drive Ok relay open 1367 ON OFF Overcurrent thr [%] Activity Ignore Warning Disable drive Latch ON OFF Ok relay open ON 584 212
I16
(2) ON (1)
Yes
CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ Overcurrent U16 U16 0 0 200 2 110 Ignore (0) Yes Yes -
363
U16
ON (1) ON (1)
Yes
364
I16
Yes
8/13
Parameter
OFF Hold off time [ms] Restart time [ms] Activity Ignore Warning Disable drive Latch ON OFF Ok relay open ON OFF Hold off time [ms] Restart time [ms] Activity
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Custom. values
586 585 473
U16 U16 U16
0 10000 0 0 10000 0 CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ Field loss 0 2 Disable drive
Yes Yes Yes
0 R/W R/W R/Z 0 1 2 R/Z 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W R/W R/Z 1 2 R/W 1 0 R/W R/Z 2 3 4 5 R/W 1 0 R/Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 R/Z 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W R/W R/Z 1 2 3 4 5 R/W 1 0 R/Z
471
U16
ON (1) ON (1)
Yes
472
I16
Yes
475 474
U16 U16 U16
0 10000 0 0 10000 0 CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ Speed fbk loss 1 2 Disable drive
Yes Yes Yes
478 Warning Disable drive Ok relay open 477 ON OFF Hold off time [ms] 480 Activity 639 Disable drive Quick stop Normal stop Curr lim stop Ok relay open 640 ON OFF 634 Ignore Warning Disable drive Quick stop Normal stop Curr lim stop Latch ON OFF Ok relay open ON OFF Hold off time [ms] Restart time [ms] Activity 636 637 635 633
I16
ON (1)
Yes
U16 U16
0 10000 8 CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ Opt2 failure 0 5 Disable drive
Yes Yes
I16
ON (1)
Yes
CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ Bus loss Activity U16 0 5 Disable drive Yes -
U16
ON (1) ON (1)
Yes
I16
Yes
U16 U16 U16
0 10000 0 0 10000 0 CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ Hw opt1 failure 1 5 Disable drive
Yes Yes Yes
386 Warning Disable drive Quick stop Normal stop Curr lim stop Ok relay open 387 ON OFF 728
I16
ON (1)
Yes
CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ Enable seq err Activity U16 0 2 Disable drive Yes -
8/14
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Custom. values
Ignore Disable drive Latch ON OFF Ok relay open ON OFF Device address Ser answer delay Ser protocol sel SLINK3 MODBUS RTU JBUS Ser baudrate sel 19200 9600 4800 2400 1200 Pword 1 Select output 1 OFF Speed ref 1 Speed ref 2 Ramp ref 1 Ramp ref 2 Ramp ref Speed ref Ramp output Actual spd (rpm) T current ref 1 T current ref 2 T current ref Speed reg out Motor current Output voltage Analog input 1 Analog input 2 Analog input 3 Flux current Pad 0 Pad 1 Pad 4 Pad 5 Flux reference Pad 6 PID output Out vlt level Flux current max F act spd (rpm) F T curr (%) Spd draw out Output power Roll Diameter Act tension ref Torque current W reference Actual comp 319 408 323 U16 U16 U16 0 0 0 255 900 2 730 U16 0 1 729 U16 0 1 ON (1) ON (1) Yes
Yes
0 2 R/Z 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/Z R/W R/W 0 1 2 R/W 0 1 2 3 4 W R/Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 15 16 20 24 25 26 27 31 32 33 34 35 38 39 79 80 81 82 84 88 89 90 91 92 93
CONFIGURATION \ Set serial comm 0 0 SLINK3 (0) Yes Yes Yes -------
326
U16
9600 (1)
Yes
--
---
CONFIGURATION 85 66 I32 U16 0 99999 I/O CONFIG \ Analog outputs \ Analog output 1 0 93 Actual speed Yes Yes -
(8)
8/15
Parameter
Brake current Scale output 1 Select output 2 (Select like output 1) Scale output 2 Select output 3 (Select like output 1) Scale output 3 Select output 4 (Select like output 1) Scale output 4 Select input 1 OFF Jog reference Speed ref 1 Speed ref 2 Ramp ref 1 Ramp ref 2 T current ref 1 T current ref 2 Adap reference T current limit T current lim + T current lim Pad 0 Pad 1 Pad 2 Pad 3 Load comp PID offset 0 PI central v3 PID feed-back Flux current max Out vlt level Speed ratio Tension red Tension ref Preset 3 Brake ref An in 1 target Not assigned Assigned Input 1 type -10V ... + 10 V 0...20 mA, 0...10 V 4...20 mA Input 1 sign Positive Negative Scale input 1 Tune value inp 1 Auto tune inp 1 Auto tune Input 1 filter [ms] Input 1 compare Input 1 cp error Input 1 cp delay
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Custom. values
62 67 63 68 64 69 65 70
Float U16 Float U16 Float U16 Float U16
-10.000 +10000 0 I/O CONFIG \ Analog outputs \ Analog output 2 0 93 Motor current (16)
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
94 R/W R/Z R/W R/Z R/W R/Z R/W R/Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 19 21 22 23 25 26 28 29 30 31 32 R/W 1 0 R/Z 0 1 2 R/W 1 0 R/W R/W C/W 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W
-10.000 +10000 0 I/O CONFIG \ Analog outputs \ Analog output 3 0 93 Flux (27) (F)
-10.000 +10000 0 I/O CONFIG \ Analog outputs \ Analog output 4 0 93 Output voltage (20) (F)
-10.000 +10000 0 I/O CONFIG \ Analog inputs \ Analog input 1 0 31 Ramp ref 1 Term. 1/2
(4)
295
U16
Yes
71
U16
10 V
Yes
ID H L -
R/W 1 0 -
389
U16
(E)
Yes
72 73 259 792 1042 1043 1044
Float Float U16 U16 I16 U16 U16
-10.000 0.100
10.000 10.000
1.000 1.000
R/W 1 0 R/W -
0 -10000 0 0
1000 +10000 10000 65000
0 0 0 0
8/16
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
1
Factory
-
(D)
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Custom. values
Input 1 cp match 1045 Input 1=thr.val. Input 1 not thr.val. Offset input 1 74 Select input 2 75 (Select like Input 1) An in 2 target 296 Assigned Not assigned Input 2 type 76 -10V ... + 10 V 0...20 mA, 0...10 V 4...20 mA Input 2 sign 390 Positive Negative Scale input 2 77 Tune value inp 2 78 Auto tune inp 2 260 Auto tune Offset input 2 79 Select input 3 80 (Select like Input 1) An in 3 target 297 Not assigned Assigned Input 3 type 81 -10V ... + 10 V 0...20 mA, 0...10 V 4...20 mA Input 3 sign 391 Positive Negative Scale input 3 82 Tune value inp 3 83 Auto tune inp 3 261 Auto tune Offset input 3 84 Digital output 1 OFF Speed zero thr Spd threshold Set speed Curr limit state Drive ready Overld available Overload state Ramp + Ramp Speed limited Undervoltage Overvoltage Heatsink Overcurrent Overtemp motor External fault Failure supply Pad A bit Pad B bit 145
U16
I16 U16 U16
-32768 +32767 0 I/O CONFIG \ Analog inputs \ Analog input 2 0 0 31 1 OFF (0) 0 Term. 3/4
Yes Yes Yes
R 1 0 R/W R/Z R/W 0 1 R/Z 0 1 2 R/W 1 0 R/W R/W C/W 1 R/W R/Z R/W 1 0 R/Z 0 1 2 R/W 1 0 R/W R/W C/W 1 R/W R/Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
QD H L ID L H -
R/W 0 1 -
U16
10 V
Yes
U16
(E)
Yes
Float Float U16 I16 U16 U16
-10.000 0.100
10.000 10.000
1.000 1.000
ID H L -
R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 -
-32768 +32767 0 I/O CONFIG \ Analog inputs \ Analog input 3 0 0 31 1 OFF (0) 0 Term. 5/6
U16
10 V
Yes
U16
(E)
Yes
Float Float U16 I16 U16
-10.000 0.100
10.000 10.000
1.000 1.000
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
R/W 1 0 -
-32768 0
+32767 0 I/O CONFIG \ Digital outputs 61 Ramp +
(8)
8/17
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Custom. values
Virt dig input Torque sign Stop control Field loss Speed fbk loss Bus loss Hw opt1 failure Opt2 failure Encoder 1 state Encoder 2 state Enable seq err Diameter calc st Input 1 cp match Diam reached Spd match compl Acc state Dec state Brake comand Brake failure ChangeSetup Ovrld prealarm I2t ovrld failure Inversion out 1 Enabled Disabled Digital output 2 (Select like output 1) Inversion out 2 Enabled Disabled Digital output 3
1267
U16
Disabled (0) Ramp (9) Disabled (0) Spd thr. (2) Disabled (0) Overld avail. (6) Disabled (0) Curr lim. State (4) Disabled (0) Overvolt (12) Disabled (0) Undervolt(11) Disabled (0) Overcurr (14) Disabled (0) Stop ctrl (23)
Yes
146 1268
U16 U16
0 0
61 1
Yes Yes
20 21 23 24 25 26 28 29 30 31 35 38 49 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 R/W 1 0 R/Z R/W 1 0 R/Z R/W 1 0 R/Z R/W 1 0 R/Z R/W 1 0 R/Z R/W 1 0 R/Z R/W 1 0 R/Z R/W 1 0 R/Z
147
U16 U16
0 0
61 1
Yes Yes
(Select like output 1) Inversion out 3 1269 Enabled Disabled Digital output 4 148 (Select like output 1) Inversion out 4 1270 Enabled Disabled Digital output 5 149 (Select like output 1) Inversion out 5 1271 Enabled Disabled Digital output 6 150 (Select like output 1) Inversion out 6 1272 Enabled Disabled Digital output 7 151 (Select like output 1) Inversion out 7 1273 Enabled Disabled Digital output 8 152 (Select like output 1) Inversion out 8 1274 Enabled Disabled Relay 2 629
U16 U16
0 0
61 1
Yes Yes
U16 U16
0 0
61 1
Yes Yes
U16 U16
0 0
61 1
Yes Yes
U16 U16
0 0
61 1
Yes Yes
U16 U16
0 0
61 1
Yes Yes
U16
61
Yes
8/18
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Custom. values
(Select like output 1) Inversion relay 2 1275 Enabled Disabled Digital input 1 OFF Motor pot reset Motor pot up Motor pot down Motor pot sign + Motor pot sign Jog + Jog Failure reset Torque reduct Ramp out = 0 Ramp in = 0 Freeze ramp Lock speed reg Lock speed I Auto capture Input 1 sign + Input 1 sign Input 2 sign + Input 2 sign Input 3 sign + Input 3 sign Zero torque Speed sel 0 Speed sel 1 Speed sel 2 Ramp sel 0 Ramp sel 1 Field loss Enable flux reg Enable flux weak Pad A bit 0 Pad A bit 1 Pad A bit 2 Pad A bit 3 Pad A bit 4 Pad A bit 5 Pad A bit 6 Pad A bit 7 Forward sign Reverse sign An in 1 target An in 2 target An in 3 target Enable droop Enable PI PID Enable PD PID PI integral freeze PID offs. Sel PI central vs0 PI central vs1 Diameter calc Diam reset Diam calc Dis Torque winder EN Line acc status Line dec status 137
U16
Disabled
Yes
(0) I/O CONFIG \ Digital inputs U16 0 83 OFF (0) Yes
R/W 1 0 R/Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 44 45 46 47 48 49 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 68 69 70 71 72
8/19
Parameter
Line fstp status Speed match Diam inc/dec En Wind/unwind Diam preset sel0 Diam preset sel1 Taper enable Speed demand En Winder side Enable PI-PD PID Jog TW enable Brake fbk Setup1/Setup2 Inversion in 1 Enabled Disabled Digital input 2 (Select like input 1) Inversion in 2 Enabled Disabled Digital input 3 (Select like input 1) Inversion in 3 Enabled Disabled Digital input 4 (Select like input 1) Inversion in 4 Enabled Disabled Digital input 5 (Select like input 1) Inversion in 5 Enabled Disabled Digital input 6 (Select like input 1) Inversion in 6 Enabled Disabled Digital input 7 (Select like input 1) Inversion in 7 Enabled Disabled Digital input 8 (Select like input 1) Inversion in 8 Enabled Disabled Select enc 1 OFF Speed ref 1 Speed ref 2 Ramp ref 1 Ramp ref 2 Select enc 2 OFF Speed ref 1 Speed ref 2
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Custom. values
1276
U16
Disabled (0) OFF (0) Disabled (0) OFF (0) Disabled (0) OFF (0) Disabled (0) OFF (0) Disabled (0) OFF (0) Disabled (0) OFF (0) Disabled (0) OFF (0) Disabled
Yes
138 1277
U16 U16
0 0
83 1
Yes Yes
73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 R/W 1 0 R/Z R/W 1 0 R/Z R/W 1 0 R/Z R/W 1 0 R/Z R/W 1 0 R/Z R/W 1 0 R/Z R/W 1 0 R/Z R/W 1 0 R/Z 0 2 3 4 5 R/Z 0 2 3
139 1278
U16 U16
0 0
83 1
Yes Yes
140 1279
U16 U16
0 0
83 1
Yes Yes
141 1280
U16 U16
0 0
83 1
Yes Yes
142 1281
U16 U16
0 0
83 1
Yes Yes
143 1282
U16 U16
0 0
83 1
Yes Yes
144 1283
U16 U16
0 0
83 1
Yes Yes
(0) I/O CONFIG \ Encoder inputs 1020 U16 0 5 OFF (0) Yes
1021
U16
OFF 0
Yes
8/20
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Custom. values
Ramp ref 1 Ramp ref 2 Encoder 1 pulses Encoder 2 pulses Refresh enc 1 Enabled Disabled Refresh enc 2 Enabled Disabled Auto capture ON OFF Enable spd adap Enabled Disabled Select adap type Adap reference Speed Adap reference Adap speed 1 [%] Adap speed 2 [%] Adap joint 1 [%] Adap joint 2 [%] Adap P gain 1 [%] Adap I gain 1 [%] Adap P gain 2 [%] Adap I gain 2 [%] Adap P gain 3 [%] Adap I gain 3 [%] Spd threshold + Spd threshold Threshold delay [ms] Spd threshold Speed not exceeded Speed exceeded Set error Set delay [ms] Set speed Speed = ref. val. Speed not ref. val.
416 169 649
Float* Float* U16
600 150 0
9999 9999 1
1024 1024 Disabled (0) Disabled
Yes Yes Yes
652
U16
Yes
(0) ADD SPEED FUNCT 388 U16 OFF 0 ADD SPEED FUNCT \ Adaptive spd reg 181 U16 0 1 Disabled (0) Speed (C) Yes (E) Yes
4 5 R/Z R/Z R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/Z 1 0 R/Z 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R 1 0 R/W R/W R 1 0 R/W R/W R 1 0 R/Z 0 1 R/Z 0 1 R 0 1
R R -
ID H L -
182
U16
Yes
183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 101 102 103 393
I16 Float Float Float Float Float Float Float Float Float Float U16 U16 U16 U16
-32768 +32767 1000 0.0 200.0 20.3 0.0 200.0 40.7 0.0 200.0 6.1 0.0 200.0 6.1 0.00 100.00 10.00 0.00 100.00 1.00 0.00 100.00 10.00 0.00 100.00 1.00 0.00 100.00 10.00 0.00 100.00 1.00 ADD SPEED FUNCT \ Speed control 1 1 0 0 32767 32767 65535 1 1000 1000 100 Dig. Output 3 (D) 100 100 (D)
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
IA QD H L QD H L QD H L -
R/W R 1 0 R 1 0 R 1 0 -
104 105 394
U16 U16 U16
1 1 0
32767 65535 1
Yes Yes -
ADD SPEED FUNCT \ Speed zero Speed zero level 107 Speed zero delay [ms] 108 Speed zero thr 395 Drive rotating Drive not rotating Copy setup Setup1 Setup2 Load setup Setup1 Setup2 Actual setup 1352 Not selected Setup1 U16 0 2 1351 U16 0 1 1350 U16 U16 U16 1 0 0 32767 65535 1 10 100 (D) Yes Yes -
FUNCTIONS \ Double setup U16 0 1 Setup1 (0) Setup1 (0) Not selected (0) Yes
Yes
ID
Yes
8/21
Parameter
Setup2
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Custom. values
2 FUNCTIONS \ Motor pot 246 I16 0 1 Disabled (0) 247 248 I16 0 1 Positive (1) (G) Yes Yes Yes R/Z 1 0 R/W 1 0 Z/C(1) R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/Z 1 0 R/Z 1 0 R/W R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/Z 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W R/Z 1 0 R/W R/W R/W -
Enable motor pot Enabled Disabled Motor pot oper Motor pot sign Positive Negative Motor pot reset Motor pot up Acceleration No acceleration Motor pot down Deceleration No deceleration Enable jog Enabled Disabled Jog operation Jog selection Ramp input Speed input Jog reference Jog + Forwards jog No jog forwards Jog Backwards jog No backwards jog Enab multi spd Enabled Disabled Multi speed 1 Multi speed 2 Multi speed 3 Multi speed 4 Multi speed 5 Multi speed 6 Multi speed 7 Speed sel 0
ID
249 396
U16 U16
(E) (E)
Yes
397
U16
(E)
ID (H) ID H L ID H L -
R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 -
FUNCTIONS \ Jog function 244 I16 0 1 Disabled (0) 0 Yes
265 375
U16
Yes Yes
266 398
I16 U16
0 0
32767 1
(C) (E)
Yes
399
U16
(E)
IA ID H L ID H L -
R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 -
FUNCTIONS \ Multi speed fct 153 I16 0 1 Disabled (0) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Dig. input 5 (E) Dig. input 6 (E) Dig. input 7 (E) Yes
154 155 156 157 158 159 160 400
I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 U16
-32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 0
+32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 1
Value 2 0 selected Value 2 0 not selected Speed sel 1 401 Value 2 1 selected Value 2 1 not selected Speed sel 2 402 Value 2 2 selected Value 2 2 not selected Multispeed sel 208 Enab multi rmp Enabled Disabled Ramp selector Acc delta speed0 Acc delta time 0 [s] 202 659 660 243
ID H L ID H L ID H L ID -
R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W -
U16
U16
U16 I16
0 0
7 0 FUNCTIONS \ Multi ramp fct 1 Disabled
Yes Yes
U16 U32 U16
(0) 0 3 0 FUNCTIONS \ Multi ramp fct \ Ramp 0 \ Acceleration 0 0 0 232-1 65535 100 1
Yes Yes Yes
ID -
R/W -
8/22
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Custom. values
S acc t const 0 [ms] Dec delta speed0 Dec delta time 0 [s] S dec t const 0 [ms] Acc delta speed1 Acc delta time 1 [s] S acc t const 1 [ms] Dec delta speed1 Dec delta time 1 [s] S dec t const 1 [ms] Acc delta speed2 Acc delta time 2 [s] S acc t const 2 [ms] Dec delta speed2 Dec delta time 2 [s] S dec t const 2 [ms] Acc delta speed3 Acc delta time 3 [s] S acc t const 3 [ms] Dec delta speed3 Dec delta time 3 [s] S dec t const 3 [ms] Ramp sel 0
665 661 662 666 23 24 667 31 32 668 25 26 669 33 34 670 27 28 671 35 36 672 403
Float U32 U16 Float U32 U16 Float U32 U16 Float U32 U16 Float U32 U16 Float U32
100 3000 300 FUNCTIONS \ Multi ramp fct \ Ramp 0 \ Deceleration 0 100 0 232-1 0 65535 1 100 3000 300 FUNCTIONS \ Multi ramp fct \ Ramp 1 \ Acceleration 1 100 0 232-1 0 65535 1 100 3000 300 FUNCTIONS \ Multi ramp fct \ Ramp 1 \ Deceleration 1 100 0 232-1 0 65535 1 100 3000 300 FUNCTIONS \ Multi ramp fct \ Ramp 2 \ Acceleration 2 100 0 232-1 0 65535 1 100 3000 300 FUNCTIONS \ Multi ramp fct \ Ramp 2 \ Deceleration 2 100 0 232-1 0 65535 1 100 3000 300 FUNCTIONS \ Multi ramp fct \ Ramp 3 \ Acceleration 3 0
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W R R R/Z 1 0 R/W 0 1 2 R/W R/W R/W R R R/W R 1 0 R
ID H L ID H L IA QA -
R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W R/W -
100 232-1 U16 0 65535 1 Float 100 3000 300 FUNCTIONS \ Multi ramp fct \ Ramp 3 \ Deceleration 3 U32 U16 Float U16 0 0 100 0 232-1 65535 3000 1 100 1 300 (E)
Value 2 0 selected Value 2 0 not selected Ramp sel 1 404 Value 2 1 selected Value 2 1 not selected
U16
(E)
FUNCTIONS \ Speed draw Speed ratio Speed draw out (d) Speed draw out (%) 1017 1018 1019 I16 I16 Float I16 0 -32768 -200.0 0 +32767 +10000 +32767 +200.0 FUNCTIONS \ Overload contr 1 Disabled (0) U16 0 1 Curr limited (0) Yes (C) (A) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Enable overload 309 Enabled Disabled Overload mode 318 Curr limited Curr not limited I2t Overload current [%] 312 313 Base current [%] Overload time [s] Ovrld prealarm I2t accumulator Pause time [s] Overld available Overload possible Overload not possible Overload state 310 1289 655 311 406
U16 U16 U16 U16 Float U16 U16
P313 0 0 0 0 0 0
200 P312 < 100 65535 1 100.00% 65535 1
100 80 30 300 Dig. Output 4 (D) (D)
QD H L QD
R 1 0 R
407
U16
8/23
Parameter
Current > limit value Current limit value
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Custom. values
1 0 FUNCTIONS \Brake control 1295 I16 0 1 Disabled Yes R/W 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/Z 0 1 2 3 R/W R/W R/Z 1 0 R/Z 1 0 R/Z R/Z R/Z R/Z R/Z R/Z R/Z 0 2 3 4 5 R/W R/W R/W C/W(1) Z/C(1) R R/W R R R R 5100h 3120h 3310h 2300h 4210h 5000h 6110h 6120h 7301h 9000h
H L -
1 0 -
Enable Torque pr Enabled Disabled Closing speed Torque delay Torque proving Actuator delay Stop mode
1262 1293 1294 1266
U16 I16 I16 U16 U16
0 0 0 0 0
(0) 200 30 30000 3000 200 75 30000 1000 FUNCTIONS \ Stop control 3 Stop & Speed 0 (D) Relay 75/76
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
626 OFF Stop & speed 0 Fast stp & spd 0 Fst / stp & spd 0 Spd 0 trip delay [ms] 627 Trip cont delay [ms] 628 Jog stop control 630 ON OFF I/n curve Enabled Disabled I/n lim 0 [%] I/n lim 1 [%] I/n lim 2 [%] I/n lim 3 [%] I/n lim 4 [%] I/n speed [rpm] Generator access Not connected T current ref Flux ref Ramp ref Speed ref Gen frequency [Hz] Gen amplitude [%] Generator offset [%] Save parameters Load default Life time [h.min] Failure register Failure text Failure hour Failure minute Failure code Failure supply Undervoltage Overvoltage Overcurrent Heatsink Hardware DSP error Interrupt error Speed fbk External fault 751 752 753 754 755 756 58 750
U16 U16 U16
0 0 0
40000 40000 1
0 0 OFF
Yes Yes Yes
(0) FUNCTIONS \ I/n curve U16 0 1 Disabled Yes
U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(0) 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 P162 0 SPEC FUNCTIONS \ Test generator 5 Not conn.
59 60 61 256 258 235 330 327 328 329 417
Float Float Float U16 U16 Float U16 Text U16 U16 U16
0.1 0 -200.00
62.5 0.1 200.00 0 +200.00 0 SPEC FUNCTIONS
0 1 0 0 0
65535 10 65535 59 65535
10
8/24
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Custom. values
Overtemp motor Field loss Bus loss Hw opt 1 failure Opt2 Unknown Enable seq err Brake error I2t ovrld error Failure reset 262 Failure reg del Source Destination Mul gain Div gain Input max Input min Input offset Output offset Inp absolute ON OFF Source Destination Mul gain Div gain Input max Input min Input offset Output offset Inp absolute ON OFF Source Destination Mul gain Div gain Input max Input min Input offset Output offset Inp absolute ON OFF Source Destination Mul gain Div gain Input max Input min Input offset Output offset Inp absolute ON 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 263 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492
U16 U16 SPEC FUNCTIONS \ Links \ Link 1 U16 U16 Float Float Float Float Float Float U16 0 0 -10000 -10000 -231 -231 -2
31
Yes Yes 65535 65535 +10000 +10000 231-1 231-1 231-1 231-1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 OFF Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
4310h 3330h 8110h 7510h 7400h 1001h 9009h 9090h 7120h Z/C (1) C R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1
ID (H) -
W -
-231 0
(0) SPEC FUNCTIONS \ Links \ Link 2 U16 U16 Float Float Float Float Float Float U16 0 0 -10000 -10000 -231 -2 -2
31 31
65535 65535 +10000 +10000 231-1 231-1 2 -1 231-1 1

31
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 OFF
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
-231 0
(0) SPEC FUNCTIONS \ Links \ Link 3 U16 U16 Float Float Float Float Float Float U16 0 0 -10000 -10000 -231 -2 -2
31 31
65535 65535 +10000 +10000 231-1 231-1 231-1 231-1 1
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 OFF
-231 0
(0) SPEC FUNCTIONS \ Links \ Link 4 U16 U16 Float Float Float Float Float Float U16 0 0 -10000 -10000 -231 -2
31
65535 65535 +10000 +10000 231-1 231-1 231-1 231-1 1
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 OFF
-231 -231 0
8/25
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Custom. values
OFF Source Destination Mul gain Div gain Input max Input min Input offset Output offset Inp absolute ON OFF Source Destination Mul gain Div gain Input max Input min Input offset Output offset Inp absolute ON OFF Pad 0 Pad 1 Pad 2 Pad 3 Pad 4 Pad 5 Pad 6 Pad 7 Pad 8 Pad 9 Pad 10 Pad 11 Pad 12 Pad 13 Pad 14 Pad 15 Bitword pad A Pad A Bit 0 Pad A Bit 1 Pad A Bit 2 Pad A Bit 3 Pad A Bit 4 Pad A Bit 5 Pad A Bit 6 Pad A Bit 7 Pad A Bit 8 Pad A Bit 9 Pad A Bit 10 Pad A Bit 11 Pad A Bit 12 Pad A Bit 13 Pad A Bit 14 Pad A Bit 15 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 U16 U16 Float Float Float Float Float Float U16 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 U16 U16 Float Float Float Float Float Float U16
(0) SPEC FUNCTIONS \ Links \ Link 5 0 0 -10000 -10000 -231 -231 -231 -231 0 65535 65535 +10000 +10000 231-1 231-1 231-1 231-1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 OFF Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W -
(0) SPEC FUNCTIONS \ Links \ Link 6 0 0 -10000 -10000 -231 -231 -231 -231 0 65535 65535 +10000 +10000 231-1 231-1 231-1 231-1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 OFF Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
(0) SPEC FUNCTIONS \ Pad Parameters -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 65535 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (A), (C) (A), (C) (C) (C) (A) (A) (A) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
(E), (D) (E), (D) (E), (D) (E), (D) (E), (D) (E), (D) (E), (D) (E), (D) (E), (D)
(H)
IA, QA IA, QA IA IA QA QA QA ID*, ID, QD ID, QD ID, QD ID, QD ID, QD ID, QD ID, QD ID, QD QD* QD* QD* QD* QD* QD* QD* QD*
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W -
8/26
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
(D) (D) (D) (D) (D) (D) (D) (D) (D)
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Custom. values
Bitword pad B Pad B Bit 0 Pad B Bit 1 Pad B Bit 2 Pad B Bit 3 Pad B Bit 4 Pad B Bit 5 Pad B Bit 6 Pad B Bit 7 Pad B Bit 8 Pad B Bit 9 Pad B Bit 10 Pad B Bit 11 Pad B Bit 12 Pad B Bit 13 Pad B Bit 14 Pad B Bit 15
536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552
U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
65535 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 OPTIONS \ Option 1 OPTIONS \ Option 2
(H)
Yes -
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
QD* QD QD QD QD QD QD QD QD QD* QD* QD* QD* QD* QD* QD* QD*
R/W R R R R R R R R -
Accessible only with optional DCVS5Z27 CANopen card Menu Enable OPT2 Enabled Disabled Enable PI PID Enabled Disabled Enable PD PID 770 U16 0 1 Enabled Disabled Enable PI-PD PID 1258 Enabled Disabled PID source PID source gain Feed-fwd PID PID error Act tension ref PID feed-back PID offs. Sel Offset 1 Offset 0 PID offset 0 PID offset 1 PID acc time PID dec time PID err gain [%] PID clamp PI P gain PID PI I gain PID PI steady thr PID steady delay P init gain PID I init gain PID PI central v sel 760 761 1046 1047 1254 757 765 764 695 731 793 734 779 I16 I16 Float Float Float I16 Float Float I16 U16 Float Float U16 -10000 -10000 0.0 0.0 0.00 -10000 0.00 0.00 0 0 0.00 0.00 0 +10000 0 +10000 0 900.0 0.0 900.0 0.0 32.00 1 +10000 10000 OPTIONS \ PID \ PI controls 100.00 100.00 10000 60000 100.00 100.00 3 10.00 10.00 0 0 10.00 10.00 1 (C) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 786 787 758 759 1194 763 762 769 U16 0 1 Accessible only with optional DCVS5W04 card 425 U16 0 1 Disabled (0) OPTIONS \ PID Disabled (0) Disabled 0 Disabled (E) Yes Yes R/Z 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W R/W R R R R/W R/W 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W -
ID
R/W
(E)
Yes
ID
R/W
U16
ID
R/W
(0) OPTIONS \ PID \ PID source U16 Float I16 I16 Float I16 U16 0 65535 0 -100.000 +100.00 1.000 -10000 +10000 0 OPTIONS \ PID \ PID references -10000 0.00 -10000 0 +10000 200.00 +10000 1 0 0 0 0 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
(C)
IA IA ID
R R R R/W R/W
(C) (E)
IA ID
R/W R/W
(E)
8/27
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
PI toplim PI toplim PI toplim 10.00 PI toplim 1
Factory
1.00 1.00 1.00 10.00 0.00 OFF
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Custom. values
PI central v1 PI central v2 PI central v3 PI top lim PI bottom lim PI integr freeze ON OFF PI output PID Real FF PID PD P gain 1 PID [%] PD D gain 1 PID [%] PD P gain 2 PID [%] PD D gain 2 PID [%] PD P gain 3 PID [%] PD D gain 3 PID[%] PD D filter PID [ms] PD output PID PID out sign PID Bipolar Positive PID output PID target PID out scale Diameter calc Enabled Disabled Positioning spd [rpm] Max deviation Gear box ratio Dancer constant [mm] Minimum diameter [cm] PI central vs0 PI central vs1 Diameter calc st
776 777 778 784 785 783
Float Float Float Float Float U16
PI bot lim PI bot lim PI bot lim PI bot lim -10.00 0
(C)
(E)
771 418 768 766 788 789 790 791 767 421 772
I16 I16 Float Float Float Float Float Float U16 I16 U16
(0) 1000 x PI 1000 toplim -10000 +10000 0 OPTIONS \ PID \ PD control 0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0 -10000 0 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 1000 +10000 1 10.00 1.00 10.00 1.00 10.00 1.00 0 0 Bipolar (1) (A)
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 0 R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R/W 1 0 R R/W R/W Z/R 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R/W 1 0 R R R R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 1 0 R/Z R/Z
IA ID
R/W
R R -
774 782 773 794
I16 U16 Float U16
-10000
+10000 0 OPTIONS \ PID \ PID target
Yes Yes Yes
QA ID
R R/W
0 65535 0 -100.000 +100.000 1.000 OPTIONS \ PID \ Diameter calc 0 1 Disabled (E)
Yes
795 796 797 798 799 780 781 800
I16 I16 Float U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 U16
-100 -10000 0.001 1 1 0 0 0 0
0 100 0 +10000 8000 1.000 1.000 10000 1 2000 1 OPTIONS \ PID 1 1 1 0 1 0 OPTIONS \ TORQUE WINDER 1 Disabled (D)
ID ID QD ID
R/W R/W R R/W
Torque winder En 1209 Enabled Disabled Roll diameter [m] Line speed [%] Ref line speed [%] Diam calc Dis ON OFF Diam inc/dec En Enabled Disabled Wind/unwind Unwinder Winder Minimum diameter [mm] Maximum diameter [m] 1205 1154 1160 1286 1161
(0) OPTIONS \ TORQUE WINDER \ Diam Calculatio Float Float Float U16 0.000 0.00 0.00 0 32.000 200.00 200.00 1 (A) Yes Yes Yes Yes
ON (1) Enabled (0) Winder (0) 100 1000
(E)
QA ID
R/W
U16
(E)
Yes
ID
R/W
1187
U16
(E)
Yes
ID
R/W
799 1153
U16 Float
1 0.000
2000 32.000
Yes Yes
8/28
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Custom. values
Line spd source Ref spd source Line speed gain Ref speed gain Base omega [rpm] Ref speed thr [%] Diam filter [ms] Diam init filter [ms] Diam stdy delay [ms] Diam reset Diam thr [%] Diam reached Diam preset sel Diam preset 0 [m] Diam preset 1 [m] Diam preset 2 [m] Diam preset 3 [m] Tension ref [%] Tension scale [%] Act tension ref [%] Torque current [%] Int acc calc En Enabled Disabled Time acc/dec min [s] Acc/dec filter [ms] Line acc [%] Line dec [%] Line fast stop [%] Line acc status Line dec status Line fstp status Variable J comp [%] Constant J comp [%] Act var J comp [%] Act const J comp [%] Mat width [%] Static f [%] Dinamic f [%] Static f Zero Enabled Disabled Actual comp [%] Closed loop En Enabled Disabled Close loop comp Taper enable Enabled Disabled Init diameter [m] Final diameter [m] Tension ref [%] Tension red [%] Act tension ref [%] Speed demand En
1204 1284 1156 1285 1163 1155 1162 1206 1207 1157 1158 1159 1168 1164 1165 1166 1167 1180 1181 1194 1193 1183
U16 U16 I16 I16 U16 Float U16 U16 U16 U16 Float U16 U16 Float Float Float Float
0 65535 0 0 65535 0 0 32767 0 0 32767 0 0 8191 1500 0 150.00 5 0 5000 100 0 5000 100 0 60000 0 0 1 0 (E) 0 150.00 10 0 1 (D) 0 3 0 (E) 0.000 32.000 0 0.000 32.000 0 0.000 32.000 0 0.000 32.000 0 (C) OPTIONS \ TORQUE WINDER \ Torque calculat
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
R/Z R/Z R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R/Z 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 0 R R/Z 1 0 R R/W 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R R/W
ID QD ID IA IA QA -
R/W R -
Float 0.00 199.99 0 (C) I16 0 200 100 Float 0.00 199.99 Float 0.00 200.00 (A) OPTIONS \ TORQUE WINDER \ Torque calculat \ Comp calculat U16 0 1 Enabled (1) 9.01 30 100 100 100 OFF OFF OFF 0 0 0 0 100 0 0 Disabled (0) (E)
1182 1212 1184 1185 1186 1188 1189 1190 1171 1172 1192 1191 1173 1174 1175 1287
Float U16 Float Float Float U16 U16 U16 Float Float Float Float Float Float Float U16
0.15 0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0 0 0 0.00 -100.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0
300.00 5000 100.00 100.00 100.00 1 1 1 199.99 +100.00 200.00 200.00 100.00 199.99 199.99 1
(E) (E) (E)
ID ID ID -
R/W R/W R/W -
1213 1214
I16 U16
-200 0
+200 1
Disabled
Yes Yes
QD -
R/Z
1208 1176
(0) I16 -32767 +32767 OPTIONS \ TORQUE WINDER \ Torque calculat \ Taper function U16 0 1 Disabled (E)
Yes Yes
ID
R/W
1177 1178 1180 1179 1194 1215
Float Float Float Float Float U16
(0) 0.000 32.000 0.1 0.000 32.000 1 0.00 199.99 0 (C) 0.00 199.99 0 (C) 0.00 200.00 0 (A) OPTIONS \ TORQUE WINDER \ Speed demand 0 1 Disabled
IA IA QA -
R/W
8/29
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max
Factory
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Custom. values
Enabled Disabled Winder side Down Up W gain [%] Speed match ON OFF Spd match gain [%] Spd match acc [s] Spd match dec [s] Spd match compl Spd match torque [%] W offset [rpm] Offset acc time [s] W target W reference [rpm] Jog TW enable Enabled Disabled Jog TW speed [%] Password 2 1202 1195 U16 U16 0 0 100 1 1201 U16 0 1
(0) Up (0) 0 OFF (0) 100 83.88 83.88
(E)
Yes
(E)
Yes Yes
1200 1196 1197 1203 1216 1199 1198 1210 1217 1256
U16 Float Float U16 U16 I16 Float U16 I16 U16
0 0.30 0.30 0 0 0 0.30 0 -8192 0
150 300.00 300.00 1 200 1000 950.00 65535 +8192 1
(D) 100 0 83.88 0 Disabled (0) 0 SERVICE (A) (E)
1255 86
I16
100
Yes
1 0 R/W 1 0 R/W R/W 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/Z R R/W 1 0 R/W
ID
R/W
ID
R/W
QD QA ID
R R/W
8/30
8.2 List of high-priority parameters
When a development and programming board for DCVS5W04 applications is used, the following variable parameters may be exchanged at high speed with the option board (Automatic synchronous communication). For more information see the technical documentation for the board.
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max 200 200 200 200 200 +200 100 0 Factory 100 100
Standard Configurat. (E) (E)
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
T current lim + [%] T current lim - [%] In use Tcur lim+ [%] In use Tcur lim- [%] Current lim red [%] T current ref 1 [%]
8 9 10 11 13 39
U16 U16 U16 U16 U16 I16
0 0 0 0 0 -200
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
R/W R/W R R R/W R/W
IA IA IA, QA
R/W R/W R R R/W R/W
T current ref 2 [%] T current ref [%] Speed ref 1 Speed ref 2 Ramp ref 1 Ramp ref 2 Ramp ref (rpm) Ramp outp (rpm) Speed ref (rpm) Actual spd (rpm) Adap reference Speed reg output [%] Lock speed reg ON OFF Flux current max [%] Flux reference [%] Pad 0 Pad 1 Pad 2 Pad 3 Pad 4 Pad 5 Pad 6 Pad 7 Pad 8 Pad 9
40 41 42 43 44 48 110 113 118 122 183 236 322
I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 U16
-200 -200 -2 * P45 -2 * P45 -2 * P45 -2 * P45 -32768 -32768 -32768 -8192 -32768 -200 0
+200 +200 +2 * P45 +2 * P45 +2 * P45 +2 * P45 +32767 +32767 +32767 +8192 +32767 +200 1
0 0 0 0 0 1000 OFF (0)
Speed regulator output (C) (C) (A) Ramp output (C) (C) Analog inp.1 (B) (A) (A) (A)
Yes
R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R R R/W R R/W 1 0
IA, QA QA IA, QA IA, QA IA, QA IA, QA QA QA QA QA IA QA ID H L QA IA, QA IA, QA IA IA QA QA QA -
R R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R R R/W R R/W 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
T08ppef-a
T current ref (A) (E)
Yes Yes
467 500 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512
U16 Float I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16
P468 0.0 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768
100 100.0 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767
100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(A), (C) (A) (A), (C) (A), (C) (C) (C) (A) (A) (A)
R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
8/31
8.2 List of high-priority parameters
Parameter
No.
Format min
Value max +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 +32767 65535 65535 65535 65535 +200 65535 +232-1 100.0 +32767 +32767 +500 +32767 +32767 Factory 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100.0 +10000 -
Access via
Keyp. RS Term D/P
Pad 10 Pad 11 Pad 12 Pad 13 Pad 14 Pad 15 Bitword pad A Bitword pad B Dig input term Dig output term Load comp [%] Ind store ctrl Index storing Out vlt level F act spd (rpm) F act spd (d) F T curr (%) Speed ratio Speed draw out (d)
513 514 515 516 517 518 519 536 564 581 698 912 913 921 924 925 928 1017 1018
I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 I16 U16 U16 U16 U16 I16 U16 U32 Float* I16 I16 I16 I16 I16
-32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 0 0 0 0 -200 0 0 0 -32768 -32768 -500 0 -32768
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes (E), (D) (D) Yes Yes (C) Yes (A), (C) (A) (A) (A) (C) (A) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R/W R/W R R/W R R R R/W R
ID*, QD* QD* IA IA, QA QA QA IA QA
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R/W R/W R R/W R R R R/W R/W
T08ppef-b
Note ! 1) [ SPD ] 2) [ CURR ] Configuration of the speed expressed in rpm*4. Configuration of the current expressed as DC drive rated current/2000; 2000 is the value of TOP_CURR. Position of encoder expressed in pulses * 4. Last time (s) for the encoder expressed in 50ns per unit (1 = 50ns ). Encoder 2 parameters (indicated by * in the table) which can be read by the DCVS5W04 board only if the parameter Speed fbk sel = Encoder 2.
3) [ ENC_PLS ] 4) [ ENC_TIM ] 5)
8/32
Rev. 1.0 - 29-3-2006
DCVDOC100EN
1S4A38

Direct Current Drive Systems Solutions

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Direct Current Drive Systems Solutions

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Direct Current Drive Systems Solutions

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the document about?

What is the document about?

What are some of the main sections covered?

What are some of the main sections covered?

DCV94/104 Direct Current Drive Systems Solutions

2.2 Selection guide ..................................................................................................................................... 6

2.3 Features .............................................................................................................................................. 13

3.2 Connections .......................................................................................................................................... 3

3.2.4 Installing the input - output extension option board ..................................................................................... 7

3.3 DC drive installation ............................................................................................................................... 8

4.2 Earth Terminal Designation and Control Points .................................................................................... 5

4.3 Control Keyboard ................................................................................................................................ 10

4.6 Start-up procedure: Start Up Menu .................................................................................................... 21

4.6.3. Manual adjustment of regulators ............................................................................................................... 28

Figure 4.6.2.4.1: Functional diagram of excitation controller. ................................................................................. 27

4.6.4 Advanced drive settings ............................................................................................................................. 33

5.5 Limits .................................................................................................................................................... 21

5.6 Ramp .................................................................................................................................................... 26

5.7 Speed regulator ................................................................................................................................... 31

Figure 5.7.2.1: Spd zero logic. ................................................................................................................................ 34

5.8 Current regulator .................................................................................................................................. 39

5.9 Flux regulation ..................................................................................................................................... 41

5.12 I/O configuration ................................................................................................................................ 66

5.13 Add speed function ............................................................................................................................ 81

5.13.4 Speed zero ................................................................................................................................................ 86

5.14 Functions ........................................................................................................................................... 87

Figure 5.14.3.2: Preselected Multi speed function ................................................................................................ 93

5.14.6 Overload control ...................................................................................................................................... 101

5.14.9 L/n curve .................................................................................................................................................. 113

5.15 Specific functions ............................................................................................................................. 114

5.16 Options ............................................................................................................................................. 124

5.16.3.6 Proportional-derivative (PD) control block .................................................................................................... 134

6.3 Estimation of speed reference ............................................................................................................. 11

6.4 Typical winder connection diagrams ................................................................................................... 16

6.5 Command logic ................................................................................................................................... 17

6.6 Application example ............................................................................................................................ 20

6.7 Functional diagram .............................................................................................................................. 33

Short-circuit current 5 kA 10 kA 18 kA 30 kA 42 kA 100 kA 150 kA 200 kA

2 - Presentation - General information

Power supply (ULN):

2 - Presentation - General information

2.1.2 DC drive sizes

Table 2.1.2.1: DC drive sizes.

2.1.3 Functions and general features

2 - Presentation - General information

2 - Presentation - General information

2.1.4 Detachable display and programming module

Description MM+ AL EN n=0 Ilim

Color yellow yellow red green yellow yellow

2 - Presentation - General information

2.1.5 Storage, transport

2 - Presentation - General information

2.2.1 DC drive choice

2 - Presentation - General information

2.2.2 Single cyclic load

I induced permanent (A) Io (A) Ip (A)

2000 1050 3000 (1) 2740 (2)

2700 1620 3500 (1) 3600 (2)

(1) DC drives DCV104/94M2 (2) DC drives DCV104/94M2

2 - Presentation - General information